Mercedes e Class Saloon 2012 w212 Owners Manual 01 PDF

Disclaimer
All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz The technical documentation team at
Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with motoring.
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer
vehicle life, follow the instructions and warn-
ing notices in this manual. Disregarding them
may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal
injury.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may vary according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability
The illustrations in this manual show a left-

hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the layout of components and controls
differs accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
Therefore, descriptions may vary from those
of your own vehicle.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RService Booklet
Requipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in the interactive Own-
er's Manual on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/
betriebsanleitung
2125847981Z102 É2125847981Z102(ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29
Introduction ......................................... 23 Safety ................................................... 41
Opening and closing ........................... 81
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 105
Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 123
Climate control ................................. 141
Driving and parking .......................... 159
On-board computer and displays .... 243
Stowing and features ....................... 309
Maintenance and care ...................... 343
Breakdown assistance ..................... 359
Wheels and tyres .............................. 379
Technical data ................................... 431

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... AdBlue®
Display message ............................ 281
12 V socket
Filling capacity ............................... 440
see Socket Notes ............................................. 440
4ETS Service indicator ............................ 350
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
AdBlue® service indicator ................ 350
tion System)
Additional speedometer ................... 258
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 442
drive) .................................................. 211
Adjusting the headlamp range ......... 128
4MATIC off-road system ................... 211
Airbags
Front airbag (driver, front
A passenger) ....................................... 46
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety guidelines ............. 44
Display message ............................ 269 Kneebag ........................................... 46
Function/notes ................................ 70 Pelvis airbag .................................... 47
Important safety notes .................... 70 Sidebag ............................................ 47
Warning lamp ................................. 301 Triggering ......................................... 43
Activating/deactivating air-recir- Windowbag ...................................... 48
culation mode .................................... 149 Air-conditioning system
Activating/deactivating cooling see Climate control
with air dehumidification ................. 145 Air filter (white display message) .... 281
Active Blind Spot Assist AIRMATIC
Activating/deactivating (on- Display message ............................ 282
board computer) ............................ 257 Function/notes ............................. 208
Display message ............................ 285 Air pressure
Function/notes ............................. 229 see Tyre pressure
Towing a trailer .............................. 232 Air vents
Active Driving Assistance package . 229 Glove compartment ....................... 156
Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safety notes .................. 155
Activating/deactivating (on- Rear ............................................... 156
board computer) ............................ 257 Setting ........................................... 155
Display message ............................ 284 Setting the centre air vents ........... 156
Function/notes ............................. 232 Setting the side air vents ............... 156
Towing a trailer .............................. 234 Alarm system
Active light function ......................... 130 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Active multicontour seat .................. 112 Ambient lighting
Active Service System Setting the brightness (on-board
see ASSYST PLUS computer) ...................................... 260
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 72 pension ............................................... 209
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Anti-glare film .................................... 341
Display message ............................ 278 Anti-lock Braking System
Function/notes ............................. 131 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Adaptive Main-beam Assist Anti-Theft Alarm system
Switching on/off (on-board com- see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
puter) ............................................. 260 Aquaplaning ....................................... 188
Ashtray ............................................... 331
Index 5
Assistance menu (on-board com- Overview ........................................ 170

puter) .................................................. 255 Problem (fault) ............................... 179
ASSYST PLUS Program selector button ................ 174
Displaying a service message ........ 349 Pulling away ................................... 164
Hiding a service message .............. 349 Releasing the parking lock man-
Notes ............................................. 349 ually ............................................... 179
Resetting the service interval dis- Selector lever ................................ 171
play ................................................ 350 Shift ranges ................................... 176
Service message ............................ 349 Starting the engine ........................ 163
Special service requirements ......... 350 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ... 175
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Trailer towing ................................. 174
Activating/deactivating ................... 78 Transmission position display ........ 171
Function ........................................... 78 Transmission position display
Interior motion sensor ..................... 79 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 172
Switching off the alarm .................... 78 Transmission positions .................. 173
Tow-away protection ........................ 79 Automatic transmission emer-
ATTENTION ASSIST gency running mode ......................... 179
Activating/deactivating ................. 257 Auxiliary heating
Display message ............................ 282 Activating/deactivating ................. 151
Function/notes ............................. 220 Activating/deactivating (on the
Authorised workshop centre console) .............................. 152
see Qualified specialist workshop Display message ............................ 295
AUTO lights Important safety notes .................. 151
Display message ............................ 278 Problem (display message) ............ 155
see Lights Remote control .............................. 152
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Setting ........................................... 262
stop function) .................................... 167 Setting the departure time ............. 153
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Auxiliary ventilation
start/stop function) .......................... 166 Activating/deactivating ................. 151
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 125 Activating/deactivating (on the
Automatic transmission centre console) .............................. 152
Accelerator pedal position ............. 174 Problem (display message) ............ 155
Automatic drive program ............... 175 Remote control .............................. 152
Changing gear ............................... 173 Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 171 ing) ...................................................... 450
Display message ............................ 293
Drive position (ECO start/stop B
function) ........................................ 172
Bag hook ............................................ 319
Drive program display .................... 172
Ball coupling
Driving tips .................................... 174
Folding in ....................................... 239
Emergency running mode .............. 179
Folding out ..................................... 237
Engaging drive position .................. 173
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 71
Engaging neutral ............................ 172
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Engaging reverse gear ................... 172
PLUS) .................................................... 71
Engaging the park position ............ 172
Kickdown ....................................... 174
Manual drive program .................... 177
Neutral (ECO start/stop function) . 172
6 Index
Battery (key) Brakes

Checking .......................................... 85 ABS .................................................. 70
Important safety notes .................... 85 BAS .................................................. 71
Replacing ......................................... 85 BAS PLUS ........................................ 71
Battery (vehicle) Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 442
Charging ........................................ 369 Display message ............................ 269
Display message ............................ 280 Driving tips .................................... 186
Important safety notes .................. 367 High-performance brake system .... 188
Jump starting ................................. 370 Important safety notes .................. 186
Belt Parking brake ................................ 184
see Seat belt Warning lamp ................................. 300
Belt force limiters (activation) ........... 43 Breakdown
Belt tensioner see Flat tyre
Activation ......................................... 43 Bulbs
Function ........................................... 54 see Changing bulbs
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 257 C
Display message ............................ 285
Calling up a fault
Notes/function .............................. 225
see Display messages
Trailer towing ................................. 227
Car
see Active Blind Spot Assist
see Vehicle
BlueTEC (AdBlue®) ............................. 440
Care
Bluetooth® SAP V3 telephone mod- Automatic car wash ....................... 351
ule Carpets .......................................... 357
see Separate operating instructions Display ........................................... 355
Bonnet Exterior lighting ............................. 354
Active bonnet (pedestrian protec- Gear or selector lever .................... 356
tion) ............................................... 344 High-pressure cleaner .................... 352
Closing ........................................... 346 Interior ........................................... 355
Display message ............................ 295 Matt paintwork .............................. 353
Opening ......................................... 345 Night View Assist Plus ................... 355
Boot Notes ............................................. 350
Emergency release .......................... 94 Paint .............................................. 352
Boot lid Plastic trim .................................... 356
Display message ............................ 294 Reversing camera .......................... 354
Opening dimensions ...................... 444 Roof lining ...................................... 357
Boot load (maximum) ........................ 444 Seat belt ........................................ 357
Bottle holders .................................... 329 Seat cover ..................................... 356
Box (boot) ........................................... 322 Sensors ......................................... 354
Brake Assist System Steering wheel ............................... 356
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Tail pipes ....................................... 355
Brake fluid Trim pieces .................................... 356
Display message ............................ 272 Washing by hand ........................... 352
Notes ............................................. 442 Wheels ........................................... 353
Brake lamps Windows ........................................ 353
Adaptive ........................................... 72 Wiper blades .................................. 353
Display message ............................ 276 Wooden trim .................................. 356
Index 7
Car wash (care) ................................. 351 Demisting the windows .................. 149
CD player/CD changer(on-board Demisting the windscreen ............. 148
computer) .......................................... 253 Important safety notes .................. 142
Central locking Indicator lamp ................................ 146
Automatic locking (on-board com- Information on using
puter) ............................................. 261 THERMOTRONIC automatic cli-
Locking/unlocking (key) .................. 83 mate control .................................. 145
Centre console Notes on using THERMATIC auto-
Lower section .................................. 37 matic climate control ..................... 143
Upper section .................................. 36 Overview of systems ...................... 142
Changing bulbs Problems with cooling with air
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 136 dehumidification ............................ 146
Important safety notes .................. 135 Problem with the rear window
Infrared lamp ................................. 137 heating .......................................... 149
Main-beam headlamps ................... 136 Rear control panel ......................... 144
Overview of bulb types .................. 135 Setting the air distribution ............. 147
Parking lamps (front) ..................... 137 Setting the airflow ......................... 148
Standing lamps .............................. 137 Setting the air vents ...................... 155
Turn signals (front) ......................... 137 Setting the climate mode ............... 146
Child-proof locks Setting the temperature ................ 147
Important safety notes .................... 69 Switching air-recirculation mode
Rear doors ....................................... 69 on/off ............................................ 149
Children Switching on/off ........................... 145
Fastening seat belts ......................... 62 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 150
In the vehicle ................................... 55 Switching the rear window heat-
Restraint systems ............................ 55 ing on/off ...................................... 149
Child seat Switching the ZONE function on/
Automatic recognition ..................... 57 off .................................................. 148
Integrated ........................................ 61 THERMATIC automatic climate
Integrated, ICS padded play table .... 63 control (2-zone) ............................. 143
Integrated, side head restraints ....... 64 THERMOTRONIC (3-zone) auto-
Integrated, storing ........................... 65 matic climate control ..................... 144
ISOFIX .............................................. 58 Coat hooks ......................................... 322
On the front-passenger seat ............ 56 Cockpit
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 61 Overview .......................................... 30
Recommendations ........................... 67 see Instrument cluster
Suitable positions ............................ 65 Collapsible emergency spare
Top Tether ....................................... 59 wheel
Cigarette lighter ................................ 331 see Emergency spare wheel
Cleaning COMAND display
Mirror turn signal ........................... 354 Cleaning ......................................... 355
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 355 COMAND Online
Climate control see separate operating instructions
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 151 Combination switch .......................... 128
Controlling automatically ............... 146 Combined luggage cover and net .... 320
Convenience opening/closing Consumption statistics (on-board
(air-recirculation mode) ................. 150 computer) .......................................... 249
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 145 Convenience box ............................... 322
8 Index
Convenience closing feature .............. 97 Daytime driving lights

Convenience opening/closing (air- Display message ............................ 278
recirculation mode) ........................... 150 Function/notes ............................. 125
Convenience opening feature ............ 96 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Coolant (engine) puter) ............................................. 259
Checking the level ......................... 348 Dealership
Display message ............................ 279 see Qualified specialist workshop
Important safety notes .................. 442 Delayed switch-off
Temperature (on-board computer) . 264 Exterior lighting (on-board com-
Temperature gauge ........................ 246 puter) ............................................. 260
Warning lamp ................................. 305 Interior lighting .............................. 261
Cooling Diagnostics connection ...................... 25
see Climate control Diesel particle filter .......................... 186
Cornering light function Digital speedometer ......................... 250
Display message ............................ 275 Dipped-beam headlamps
Function/notes ............................. 130 Changing bulbs .............................. 136
Crash-responsive emergency light- Display message ............................ 275
ing ....................................................... 134 Setting for driving abroad (sym-
Cruise control metrical) ........................................ 124
Activation conditions ..................... 190 Setting for driving on the right/
Cruise control lever ....................... 190 left ................................................. 260
Deactivating ................................... 192 Switching on/off ........................... 126
Display message ............................ 287 DIRECT SELECT lever
Driving system ............................... 189 see Automatic transmission
Important safety notes .................. 189 Display message
LIM indicator lamp ......................... 190 ASSYST PLUS ................................ 349
Selecting ........................................ 190 General information ....................... 268
Setting a speed .............................. 191 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 268
Storing and maintaining current KEYLESS-GO .................................. 297
speed ............................................. 190 Display messages
Cup holder Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 268
Centre console .............................. 328 Driving systems ............................. 282
Folding bench seat ........................ 329 Engine ............................................ 279
Important safety notes .................. 328 Key ................................................ 297
Rear compartment ......................... 328 Lights ............................................. 275
Safety systems .............................. 269
D Tyres .............................................. 289
Vehicle ........................................... 293
Dashboard
Distance display (on-board com-
see Instrument cluster
puter) .................................................. 256
Dashboard lighting
Distance warning signal (warning
see Instrument cluster lighting
lamp) .................................................. 307
Data
DISTRONIC PLUS
see Technical data
Deactivating ................................... 203
Display message ............................ 286
Displays in the multifunction dis-
play ................................................ 202
Function/notes ............................. 195
Index 9
Important safety notes .................. 195 Driving system

Setting the specified minimum Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 232
distance ......................................... 201 Driving systems
Warning lamp ................................. 307 Active Driving Assistance pack-
Door age ................................................. 229
Automatic locking (on-board com- AIRMATIC ...................................... 208
puter) ............................................. 261 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 90 pension .......................................... 209
Central locking/unlocking (key) ...... 83 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 220
Control panel ................................... 40 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 225
Display message ............................ 295 Cruise control ................................ 189
Emergency locking ........................... 90 Display message ............................ 282
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 Distronic Plus ................................ 195
Important safety notes .................... 88 HOLD function ............................... 205
Opening (from the inside) ................ 89 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 227
Drive program Lane package ................................ 225
Automatic ...................................... 175 Night View Assist Plus ................... 222
Display ........................................... 171 Parking Guidance ........................... 215
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 172 PARKTRONIC ................................. 211
Manual ........................................... 177 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 207
Drive program selector ..................... 175 Reversing camera .......................... 218
Driver's door Speed Limit Assist ......................... 221
see Door SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 192
Drive system Driving tips
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 229 AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 188
Driving abroad Aquaplaning ................................... 188
Service24h .................................... 350 Automatic transmission ................. 174
Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 124 Brakes ........................................... 186
Driving on flooded roads .................. 188 Downhill gradient ........................... 187
Driving safety system Driving abroad ............................... 124
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Driving in winter ............................. 188
PLUS) ............................................... 71 Driving on flooded roads ................ 188
Electronic Brake-force Distribu- Driving on wet roads ...................... 188
tion .................................................. 76 General .......................................... 185
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Icy road surfaces ........................... 189
gram) ............................................... 72 Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction ted roads ....................................... 187
System) ........................................... 73 New brake pads/linings ................ 187
Important safety guidelines ............. 70 Running-in tips ............................... 160
Driving safety systems Snow chains .................................. 383
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 70 Symmetrical dipped beam ............. 124
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76 Towing a trailer .............................. 236
Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 72 Wet road surface ........................... 187
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 71 DVD audio
Overview .......................................... 70 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 253
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 76 DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 253
10 Index
E Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes .................. 425
EASY-ENTRY feature Inflating the collapsible spare
Activating/deactivating ................. 263 wheel ............................................. 427
Function/notes ............................. 118 Points to remember ....................... 425
EASY-EXIT feature Removing ....................................... 426
Crash-responsive ........................... 118 Storage location ............................ 426
Function/notes ............................. 118 Stowing .......................................... 427
Switching on/off ........................... 263 Technical data ............................... 429
EASY-PACK convenience box ........... 322 Emergency unlocking
EASY-PACK folding floor Tailgate ............................................ 95
Important safety notes .................. 325 Vehicle ............................................. 90
EASY-PACK folding luggage-com- Engine
partment floor Display message ............................ 279
Opening and closing ...................... 326 ECO start/stop function ................ 164
EASY-PACK loading sill protector .... 326 Engine number ............................... 435
EASY-PACK load-securing kit Jump-starting ................................. 370
Components and storage .............. 323 Running irregularly ......................... 168
Inserting the brackets into the Starting problems .......................... 168
loading rail ..................................... 323 Starting the engine with the key .... 163
EASY-PACK luggage compartment Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 163
management system ........................ 323 Stopping ........................................ 184
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 375
bution) Warning lamp (engine diagnos-
Display message ............................ 271 tics) ............................................... 305
Function/notes ................................ 76 Engine electronics
ECO display Notes ............................................. 433
Function/notes ............................. 185 Problem (fault) ............................... 168
On-board computer ....................... 250 Engine oil
ECO start/stop function Additives ........................................ 442
Deactivating/activating ................. 165 Checking the oil level ..................... 346
General information ....................... 165 Checking the oil level using the
Electrical fuses dipstick .......................................... 347
see Fuses Display message ............................ 280
Electronic Stability Program Filling capacity ............................... 441
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Notes about oil grades ................... 440
Electronic Traction System Notes on oil level/consumption .... 346
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- Temperature (on-board computer) . 264
tion System) Topping up ..................................... 347
Emergency key Viscosity ........................................ 442
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 90 Environmental protection
Emergency key element Returning an end-of-life vehicle ....... 23
Function/notes ................................ 84 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Locking vehicle ................................ 90 gram)
Emergency release AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 265
Driver's door .................................... 90 Deactivating/activating (AMG
Fuel filler flap ................................. 181 vehicles) .......................................... 74
Index 11
Deactivating/activating (except Flat tyre

AMG vehicles) ................................ 256 MOExtended tyres ......................... 363
Deactivating/activating (notes; Preparing the vehicle ..................... 363
except AMG vehicles) ...................... 73 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 364
Display message ............................ 269 Floormat ............................................. 341
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 73 Foglamps
Function/notes ................................ 72 Extended range .............................. 131
Important safety guidelines ............. 72 Switching on/off ........................... 126
Trailer stabilisation .......................... 75 Folding bench seat (luggage com-
Warning lamp ................................. 302 partment) ........................................... 113
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Frequencies
tem) ...................................................... 73 Garage door opener ....................... 338
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc- Mobile phone ................................. 433
tions) .................................................. 355 Two-way radio ................................ 433
Exterior lighting Front foglamps
Settings options ............................. 124 Display message ............................ 277
see Lights Fuel
Exterior mirrors Additives ........................................ 438
Adjusting ....................................... 119 Consumption information .............. 439
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 120 Consumption statistics .................. 249
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 120 Displaying the current consump-
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 119 tion ................................................ 250
Folding in when locking (on-board Displaying the range ...................... 250
computer) ...................................... 264 Fuel gauge ............................... 32, 245
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 120 Grade (petrol) ................................ 437
Parking position ............................. 120 Important safety notes .................. 436
Resetting ....................................... 120 Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 437
Storing settings (memory func- Problem (malfunction) ................... 182
tion) ............................................... 121 Quality (diesel) ............................... 438
Refuelling ....................................... 179
F Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 436
Fuel filler flap
Fault message
Emergency release ........................ 181
see Display messages
Opening/closing ............................ 180
Filler cap
Fuel filter (white display message) . 281
see Fuel filler flap
Fuel level
Fire extinguisher ............................... 361
Calling up the range (on-board
First-aid kit ......................................... 360
computer) ...................................... 250
Fitting a wheel
Gauge ...................................... 32, 245
Removing a wheel .......................... 392
Fuel reserve
Fitting wheels
see Fuel
Fitting a wheel ............................... 392
Fuel tank
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 393
Capacity ........................................ 436
Raising the vehicle ......................... 390
Problem (malfunction) ................... 182
Securing the vehicle against roll-
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
ing away ........................................ 389
kit) ...................................................... 361
12 Index
Fuses Heating
Allocation chart ............................. 376 see Climate control
Before changing ............................. 376 High-pressure cleaners .................... 352
Fuse box in the boot ...................... 376 Hill start assist .................................. 164
Fuse box in the engine compart- HOLD function
ment .............................................. 376 Display message ............................ 283
Fuse box in the luggage compart- Function/notes ............................. 205
ment .............................................. 377
Important safety notes .................. 375 I
ICS padded play table ......................... 63
G
Ignition lock
Garage door opener see Key positions
Clearing the memory ..................... 337 Immobiliser .......................................... 78
Frequencies ................................... 338 In-car hotspot
Important safety notes .................. 335 see Separate operating instructions
Opening/closing the garage door .. 337 Indicator and warning lamps
Programming (button in the rear- Coolant .......................................... 305
view mirror) ................................... 336 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 307
Gear indicator (on-board com- Engine diagnostics ......................... 305
puter) .................................................. 264 Fuel tank ........................................ 305
Gearshift program SPORT handling mode ................... 303
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 265 Indicator lamps
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 432 Display message ............................ 276
Glove compartment .......................... 311 see Warning and indicator lamps
Infrared lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 137
H Insect protection on the radiator .... 346
Inspection
Handbrake
see ASSYST PLUS
see Parking brake
Instrument cluster
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 129
Overview .................................. 32, 245
Headbag
Settings ......................................... 258
Display message ............................ 275
Warning and indicator
Headlamp
lamps ....................................... 34, 298
Cleaning system (function) ............ 130
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 246
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 443
Integrated child seat
Headlamps
ICS padded play table ...................... 63
Misting up ...................................... 133
Important safety guidelines ............. 61
Topping up the cleaning system .... 349
Side head restraints ......................... 64
see Automatic headlamp mode
Storing, ICS padded play table and
Head restraints
side head restraints ......................... 65
Adjusting ....................................... 109
Intelligent Light System
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 110
Activating/deactivating ................. 259
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 109
Display message ............................ 278
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 110
Overview ........................................ 130
Fitting/removing (rear) .................. 111
Setting the dipped-beam head-
Luxury ............................................ 110
lamps for driving on the right/left . 260
Index 13
Interior lighting ................................. 133 Kickdown

Automatic control system .............. 134 Driving tips .................................... 174
Delayed switch-off (on-board Manual drive program .................... 177
computer) ...................................... 261 Kneebag ............................................... 46
Emergency lighting ........................ 134
Manual control ............................... 134 L
Overview ........................................ 133
Lamps
Reading lamp ................................. 133
Setting the ambient lighting see Warning and indicator lamps
brightness (on-board computer) .... 260 Lane detection (automatic)
Interior motion sensor ........................ 79 see Lane Keeping Assist
ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 58 Lane Keeping Assist
Display message ............................ 284
J
Function/information .................... 227
Jack Lane package ..................................... 225
Storage location ............................ 361 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 265
Using ............................................. 390 Lashing eyelets ................................. 318
Jump start (engine) Licence plate lamp (display mes-
see Jump starting (engine) sage) ................................................... 277
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 370 Lighting
see Lights
K Lights
Activating/deactivating the Intel-
Key
ligent Light System ........................ 259
Changing the battery ....................... 85
Activating/deactivating the inte-
Checking the battery ....................... 85
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 261
Convenience closing feature ............ 97
Active light function ....................... 130
Convenience opening feature .......... 96
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 125
Display message ............................ 297
Cornering light function ................. 130
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 83
Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 126
Emergency key element ................... 84
Driving abroad ............................... 124
Important safety notes .................... 82
Foglamps ....................................... 126
Loss ................................................. 87
Foglamps (extended range) ........... 131
Modifying the programming ............. 84
Hazard warning lamps ................... 129
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 161
Headlamp flasher ........................... 129
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 87
Headlamp range ............................ 128
Starting the engine ........................ 163
Light switch ................................... 125
KEYLESS-GO
Main-beam headlamps ................... 129
Convenience closing ........................ 97
Motorway mode ............................. 131
Display message ............................ 297
Parking lamps ................................ 128
Locking ............................................ 83
Rear foglamp ................................. 127
Start/Stop button .......................... 161
Setting the ambient lighting
Starting the engine ........................ 163
brightness (on-board computer) .... 260
Unlocking ......................................... 83
Side lamps ..................................... 127
Key positions
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Key ................................................ 161
Assist on/off ................................. 260
KEYLESS GO .................................. 161
14 Index
Switching the daytime driving Switching Adaptive Highbeam

lights on/off (on-board computer) . 259 Assist on/off ................................. 132
Switching the exterior lighting Switching on/off ........................... 129
delayed switch-off on/off (on- Manual transmission
board computer) ............................ 260 Engaging neutral (ECO start/stop
Switching the surround lighting function) ........................................ 170
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 260 Engaging reverse gear ................... 170
Turn signals ................................... 128 Gear lever ...................................... 169
see Changing bulbs Pulling away ................................... 163
see Interior lighting Shifting to neutral .......................... 170
Light sensor (display message) ....... 278 Shift recommendation ................... 170
LIM indicator lamp Starting the engine ........................ 163
Cruise control ................................ 190 Massage function (PULSE) ............... 112
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 196 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) . . 353
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 193 Memory card (audio) ......................... 253
Limiting the speed Memory function ............................... 121
see SPEEDTRONIC Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Loading guidelines ............................ 310 see Qualified specialist workshop
Loading sill protector ........................ 326 Message memory (on-board com-
Locking puter) .................................................. 268
see Central locking Messages
Locking (doors) see Display messages
Automatic ........................................ 90 Mirror
Emergency locking ........................... 90 see Vanity mirror (in sun visor)
From inside (central locking but- Mirrors
ton) .................................................. 89 see Exterior mirrors
Locking centrally see Rear-view mirror
see Central locking Mobile phone
Locking verification signal (on- Frequencies ................................... 433
board computer) ............................... 262 Installation ..................................... 433
Luggage compartment cover ........... 319 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 254
Luggage compartment enlarge- Notes/placing in the bracket ......... 333
ment ................................................... 317 Sliding adapter ............................... 335
Luggage compartment floor ............ 325 Transmission output (maximum) .... 433
Luggage holder (EASY-PACK load- Mobile telephone
securing kit) ....................................... 324 Pre-installed bracket ...................... 334
Lumbar support Modifying the programming (key) ..... 84
Adjusting ....................................... 113 MOExtended tyres ............................. 363
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Motorway mode ................................ 131
port ................................................ 113 MP3
Luxury head restraint ....................... 110 Operating ....................................... 253
see Separate operating instructions
M Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 248
M+S tyres ........................................... 382
Permanent display ......................... 259
Main-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 136
Display message ............................ 277
Index 15
Multifunction steering wheel Operating video DVD ..................... 253

Operating the on-board computer . 247 Operation ....................................... 247
Overview .......................................... 35 RACETIMER ................................... 265
Service menu ................................. 257
N Settings menu ............................... 258
Standard display ............................ 249
Navigation
Telephone menu ............................ 254
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 251 Trip menu ...................................... 249
NECK-PRO head restraints Vehicle submenu ........................... 261
Operation ......................................... 48 Operating system
Resetting after being triggered ........ 49 see On-board computer
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Outside temperature display ........... 247
Operation ......................................... 48 Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Resetting after being triggered ........ 50
Override feature
Night View Assist Plus
Rear side windows ........................... 69
Cleaning ......................................... 355
P
Function/notes ............................. 222
Problem (fault) ............................... 225 Paint code .......................................... 435
Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 160 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 352
Panic alarm .......................................... 42
O Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety information ........... 99
Occupant safety
Opening/closing ............................ 101
Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
Opening/closing the roller sun-
blind ............................................... 101
Odometer
see Total distance recorder
Rain closing feature ....................... 101
see Trip meter
Resetting ....................................... 102
Oil
Park Assist
see Engine oil
Parking Guidance ........................... 215
On-board computer
Parking ............................................... 183
AMG menu ..................................... 264
Assistance menu ........................... 255
Parking brake ................................ 184
Audio menu ................................... 252
Position of exterior mirror, front-
Convenience submenu .................. 263
passenger side ............................... 120
Displaying a service message ........ 349
Reversing camera .......................... 218
Display messages .......................... 268
see PARKTRONIC
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 202
Parking aid
Factory setting submenu ............... 264
see Exterior mirrors
Heating submenu ........................... 262
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 258
Display message ............................ 271
Light submenu ............................... 259
Notes/function .............................. 184
Menu overview .............................. 249
Warning lamp ................................. 304
Message memory .......................... 268
Navigation menu ............................ 251
Operating the TV ............................ 253
16 Index
Parking Guidance R
Display message ............................ 286
Important safety notes .................. 215 RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 207
Trailer towing ................................. 218 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 265
Parking lamps Radar sensors
Changing bulbs .............................. 137 Overview ........................................ 451
Display message ............................ 277 Radar sensor system
Switching on/off ........................... 128 Activating/deactivating ................. 262
Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 137 Display message ............................ 283
PARKTRONIC Radiator cover ................................... 346
Deactivating/activating ................. 213 Radio
Driving system ............................... 211 Selecting a station ......................... 252
Function/notes ............................. 211 see separate operating instructions
Important safety notes .................. 211 Rain closing feature
Problem (fault) ............................... 215 Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 101
Sensor range ................................. 211 Sliding sunroof ............................... 100
Trailer towing ................................. 214 Reading lamp ..................................... 133
Warning display ............................. 213 Rear bench seat
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Folding the backrest forwards/
lamp ...................................................... 57 back ............................................... 316
Petrol .................................................. 437 Rear compartment
Plastic hooks ..................................... 318 Setting the airflow ......................... 148
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 356 Setting the air vents ...................... 156
Power windows Setting the temperature ................ 147
see Side windows Rear-compartment seat belt sta-
PRE-SAFE® (preventive occupant tus indicator ........................................ 54
safety system) Rear foglamp
Display message ............................ 272 Display message ............................ 277
Operation ......................................... 50 Switching on/off ........................... 127
Rear seat
PRE-SAFE® Brake
Display message ............................ 295
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Display message ............................ 273
see Separate operating instructions
Function/notes ................................ 76
Rear-view mirror
Warning lamp ................................. 307
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ........ 120
Product information ............................ 23
Dipping (manual) ........................... 119
Program selector button .................. 174
Rear window blind ............................ 330
Protection of the environment
Rear window heating
General notes .................................. 23
Problem (fault) ............................... 149
Pulling away
Switching on/off ........................... 149
Automatic transmission ................. 164
Rear window wiper
Manual transmission ...................... 163
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 139
Switching on/off ........................... 138
Q
Refuelling
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25 Fuel gauge ............................... 32, 245
Index 17
Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 437 S

Refuelling process ......................... 180
see Fuel Safety
Releasing the parking lock man- Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
ually (automatic transmission) ........ 179 Child restraint systems .................... 55
Remote control Safety net
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 152 Attaching ....................................... 321
Changing the batteries (auxiliary Important safety information ......... 321
heating) ......................................... 154 Safety system
Garage door opener ....................... 335 see Driving safety system
Programming (garage door Seat
opener) .......................................... 336 Folding the backrest (rear com-
Replacing the battery (auxiliary partment) forwards/back .............. 317
heating remote control) .................... 154 Seat belt
Reserve (fuel tank) Adjusting the driver's and front-
see Fuel passenger seat belt ......................... 52
Reserve fuel Adjusting the height ......................... 52
Display message ............................ 280 Belt force limiter .............................. 54
Warning lamp ................................. 305 Belt tensioner .................................. 54
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 150 Centre rear-compartment seat ........ 53
Restraint system Cleaning ......................................... 357
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Display message ............................ 273
System) Fastening ......................................... 52
Rev counter ........................................ 247 Important safety guidelines ............. 51
Reverse gear Rear seat belt status indicator ......... 54
Engaging (automatic transmis- Releasing ......................................... 53
sion) ............................................... 171 Switching belt adjustment on/off
Engaging (manual transmission) .... 170 (on-board computer) ...................... 263
Reversing camera Warning lamp ................................. 299
Cleaning instructions ..................... 354 Warning lamp (function) ................... 53
Function/notes ............................. 218 Seats
Switching on/off ........................... 219 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 108
Reversing lamp (display message) . . 277 Adjusting (manually and electri-
Roller sunblind cally) .............................................. 108
Adjusting lumbar support .............. 113
Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 101
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
Rear window .................................. 330
port ................................................ 113
Roof carrier ........................................ 327
Adjusting the head restraint .......... 109
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
Cleaning the cover ......................... 356
instructions) ...................................... 357
Correct driver's seat position ........ 106
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 444
Overview ........................................ 107
Seat heating problem .................... 116
Seat ventilation problem ................ 116
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 121
18 Index
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 115 Rain closing feature ....................... 100
Switching the seat ventilation on/ Resetting ....................................... 100
off .................................................. 116 see Panorama sliding sunroof
Selector lever Snow chains ...................................... 383
Cleaning ......................................... 356 Socket
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 354 Centre console .............................. 332
Service Luggage compartment ................... 333
see ASSYST PLUS Rear compartment ......................... 332
Service Centre Sockets
see Qualified specialist workshop General notes ................................ 332
Service menu (on-board computer) . 257 Spare wheel
Service products Storing ........................................... 427
AdBlue® special additives .............. 440 Specialist workshop ............................ 25
Brake fluid ..................................... 442 Spectacles compartment ................. 311
Coolant (engine) ............................ 442 Speed, controlling
Engine oil ....................................... 440 see Cruise control
Fuel ................................................ 436 Speed Limit Assist
Important safety notes .................. 435 Activating/deactivating the warn-
Washer fluid ................................... 443 ing function .................................... 255
Settings Displaying ...................................... 255
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 264 Display message ............................ 283
On-board computer ....................... 258 Display message in the multifunc-
Setting the air distribution ............... 147 tion display .................................... 221
Setting the airflow ............................ 148 Important safety notes .................. 221
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 265 Speedometer
Shifting to neutral (manual trans- Activating/deactivating the addi-
mission) ............................................. 170 tional speedometer ........................ 258
Short journeys (diesel particle fil- Digital ............................................ 250
ter) ...................................................... 186 In the Instrument cluster ......... 32, 245
Sidebag ................................................ 47 Segments ...................................... 247
Side lamps Selecting the unit of measure-
Switching on/off ........................... 127 ment .............................................. 258
Side marker lamp Display mes- see Instrument cluster
sage .................................................... 277 SPEEDTRONIC
Side windows Deactivating variable ..................... 194
Convenience closing ........................ 97 Display message ............................ 287
Convenience opening ...................... 96 Function/notes ............................. 192
Important safety notes .................... 95 Important safety notes .................. 192
Opening/closing .............................. 96 LIM indicator lamp ......................... 193
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 99 Permanent ..................................... 195
resetting .......................................... 98 Selecting ........................................ 193
Skibag ................................................ 314 Storing the current speed .............. 193
Sliding sunroof Variable ......................................... 193
Important safety information ........... 99 SPORT handling mode
Opening/closing ............................ 100 Activating/deactivating (AMG
Problem (malfunction) ................... 103 vehicles) .......................................... 74
Warning lamp ................................. 303
Index 19
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- Supplement Restraint System

tem) see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Display message ............................ 274 System)
Introduction ..................................... 43 Surround lighting (on-board com-
Warning lamp ................................. 304 puter) .................................................. 260
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Suspension tuning
Starting (engine) ................................ 162 AIRMATIC ...................................... 209
Steering (display message) .............. 296 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Steering wheel pension .......................................... 210
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 117 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 265
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 117 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 78
Button overview ............................... 35
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 247 T
Cleaning ......................................... 356
Tailgate
Gearshift paddles ........................... 175
Display message ............................ 294
Emergency unlocking ....................... 95
Steering wheel heating .................. 117
Storing settings (memory func-
Limiting the opening angle ............... 94
tion) ............................................... 121
Opening/closing (automatically
Steering wheel gearshift paddles .... 175
from inside) ...................................... 93
Steering wheel heating
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 92
Switching on/off ........................... 117
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 91
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 265
Opening dimensions ...................... 444
Stowage areas ................................... 310
Tail lamps
Stowage compartment
Display message ............................ 276
Spectacles compartment ............... 311
Tank
Stowage compartments
see Fuel tank
Armrest (front) ............................... 312
Technical data
Armrest (under) ............................. 312
Emergency spare wheel ................. 429
Centre console .............................. 311
Information .................................... 432
Cup holder ..................................... 328
Trailer loads ................................... 448
Glove compartment ....................... 311
Tyres/wheels ................................. 393
Important safety information ......... 310
Vehicle data ................................... 444
Rear ............................................... 313
Telephone
Under driver's seat/front-
Accepting a call ............................. 254
passenger seat .............................. 312
Display message ............................ 296
Stowage net ....................................... 313
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 254
Stowage space
Number from the phone book ........ 254
Stowage net ................................... 313
Redialling ....................................... 255
Stowage well beneath the boot
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 254
floor .................................................... 325
Telephone compartment ................ 312
Summer tyres .................................... 382
Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 324
Sun blind
Temperature
Rear side windows ......................... 330
Coolant .......................................... 246
Sun visor ............................................ 329
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 264
Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 264
20 Index
Outside temperature ...................... 247 Driving tips .................................... 236

Setting (climate control) ................ 147 Folding in the ball coupling ............ 239
TEMPOMAT Folding out the ball coupling .......... 237
Function/notes ............................. 189 Important safety notes .................. 234
Theft-deterrent system Lights display message .................. 275
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 78 Mounting dimensions .................... 447
Immobiliser ...................................... 78 Parking Guidance ........................... 218
Through-loading ................................ 315 Parktronic ...................................... 214
Through-loading feature ................... 315 Power supply ................................. 240
Time Shift range ..................................... 174
see Separate Owner's manual Trailer loads ................................... 448
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 265 Transmission
Tiredness Assist see Automatic transmission
see ATTENTION ASSIST see Manual transmission
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 364 Transmission position display ......... 172
Top Tether ............................................ 59 Transmission position display
Total distance recorder .................... 249 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 172
Tow-away protection .......................... 79 Transporting the vehicle .................. 374
Towing Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 356
Important safety notes .................. 372 Trip computer (on-board com-
With the rear axle raised ................ 373 puter) .................................................. 249
Towing a trailer Trip meter
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 232 Calling up ....................................... 249
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 234 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 251
Axle load, permissible .................... 450 Turn signal
Bulb failure indicator for LED see Turn signals
lamps ............................................. 241 Turn signals
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Changing bulbs (front) ................... 137
gram) ............................................... 75 Switching on/off ........................... 128
Towing away TV
Fitting the towing eye .................... 373 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 253
Removing the towing eye ............... 373 see Separate operating instructions
With both axles on the ground ....... 374 Two-way radio
Tow-starting Frequencies ................................... 433
Emergency engine starting ............ 375 Installation ..................................... 433
Important safety notes .................. 372 Transmission output (maximum) .... 433
Removing the towing eye ............... 373 Type identification plate
Trailer see Vehicle identification plate
Display message ............................ 295 Tyre pressure
Trailer coupling Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 386
see Towing a trailer Display message ............................ 289
Trailer towing Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 366
7-pin connector ............................. 241 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 366
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 227 Recommended ............................... 383
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 355 Tyre pressure loss warning
Coupling up a trailer ...................... 238 Important safety notes .................. 385
Decoupling a trailer ....................... 239 Restarting ...................................... 385
Index 21
Tyre pressure monitor Securing from rolling away ............ 389

Checking the tyre pressure elec- Towing away .................................. 372
tronically ........................................ 386 Tow-starting ................................... 372
Function/notes ............................. 386 Transporting .................................. 374
Restarting ...................................... 387 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 90
Warning lamp ................................. 308 Unlocking (key) ................................ 83
Warning message .......................... 387 Vehicle data ................................... 444
Tyres Vehicle data ....................................... 444
Changing a wheel .......................... 388 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 444
Checking ........................................ 381 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 90
Direction of rotation ...................... 389 Vehicle identification number
Display message ............................ 289 see VIN
Important safety notes .................. 380 Vehicle identification plate .............. 435
MOExtended tyres ......................... 382 Vehicle level
Replacing ....................................... 388 AIRMATIC ...................................... 208
Service life ..................................... 381 AMG RIDE CONTROL sports sus-
Storing ........................................... 389 pension .......................................... 210
Tyre size (data) .............................. 393 Vehicle level (display message) ....... 282
Tyre tread ...................................... 381 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 361
see Flat tyre Vehicle weights ................................. 444
Video
U Operating the DVD ......................... 253
VIN ...................................................... 435
Unladen weight ................................. 444
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 90 W
From inside the vehicle (central Warning and indicator lamps
unlocking button) ............................. 89 ABS ................................................ 301
Brakes ........................................... 300
V Distance warning signal ................. 307
Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 330 ESP® .............................................. 302
Variable SPEEDTRONIC ESP® OFF ....................................... 303
see SPEEDTRONIC LIM (cruise control) ........................ 190
Vehicle LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 196
Correct use ...................................... 26 LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 193
Data acquisition ............................... 26 Overview .................................. 34, 298
Display message ............................ 293 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 57
Electronics ..................................... 433 Reserve fuel ................................... 305
Equipment ....................................... 24 Seat belt ........................................ 299
Implied warranty .............................. 26 SRS ................................................ 304
Individual settings .......................... 258 Tyre pressure monitor ................... 308
Leaving parked up ......................... 185 Warning triangle ................................ 360
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 90 Washer fluid
Locking (key) ................................... 83 Display message ............................ 296
Lowering ........................................ 393 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 393
Pulling away ................................... 163 Wheel chock ...................................... 389
Raising ........................................... 390
Registration ..................................... 26
22 Index
Wheels Workshop
Changing/replacing ....................... 388 see Qualified specialist workshop
Changing a wheel .......................... 388
Checking ........................................ 381
Cleaning ......................................... 353
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 389
Emergency spare wheel ................. 425
Fitting a new wheel ........................ 392
Fitting a wheel ............................... 389
Removing a wheel .......................... 392
Storing ........................................... 389
Tightening torque ........................... 393
Wheel size/tyre size ...................... 393
Windowbag
Operation ......................................... 48
Windows
Cleaning ......................................... 353
see Side windows
Windscreen
Demisting ...................................... 148
Windscreen washer fluid
see Windscreen washer system
Windscreen washer system
Notes ............................................. 443
Topping up ..................................... 349
Windscreen wipers
Rear window wiper ........................ 138
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 139
Switching on/off ........................... 137
Winter operation
Radiator cover ............................... 346
Slippery road surfaces ................... 189
Snow chains .................................. 383
Winter tyres
Limiting the speed (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 261
M+S tyres ...................................... 382
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 353
Replacing (on the rear window) ..... 139
Replacing (windscreen) .................. 139
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 356
Introduction 23
Protection of the environment Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
General notes
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
H Environmental note Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources Returning an end-of-life vehicle
which form the basis of our existence on this
Mercedes-Benz will take back your
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
which takes the requirements of both nature
mentally responsible manner, in accordance
and humanity into account.
the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles
You too can help to protect the environment Directive.
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
tally-responsible manner.
vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of up to
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, 3.5 t, in accordance with national regulations.
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
the following factors: meeting all the legal requirements for a
Roperating conditions of your vehicle design which allows for recycling and re-use.
Ryour personal driving style There is a network of return points and dis-
assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
You can influence both factors. You should
cle in an environmentally-responsible man-
bear the following in mind:
ner. The methods employed in vehicle and
Operating conditions: parts recycling are constantly being devel-
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- oped and improved. This means that your
sumption. Mercedes-Benz will also continue to meet
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are even the increased recycling quotas in the
always correct. future in good time. You can obtain further
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. information from your national Mercedes-
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Benz homepage or your national hotline num-
ber.
tion.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them. Product information
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
therefore adhere to the service intervals. genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion
Ralways have service work carried out at a parts and accessories that have been
qualified specialist workshop. approved for the type of vehicle.
Personal driving style: Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
version parts and accessories that have been
specifically approved for your vehicle for their
starting the engine.
reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
stationary. unable to assess other parts. Therefore,
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for
from the vehicle in front. the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi-
Z
24 Introduction
cles. This is also the case, even if they have the equipment on your vehicle may differ from
been independently or officially approved. that in the descriptions and illustrations.
The use of non-approved parts could affect The original purchase contract documenta-
your vehicle's operating safety. tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of the
Mercedes-Benz therefore recommends that systems in your vehicle.
you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, con- Should you have any questions concerning
version parts and accessories that have been equipment and operation, please consult a
approved for the type of vehicle. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved con- The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are
version parts and accessories are available important documents and should kept in the
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Here, vehicle.
you will receive advice about permissible
technical modifications, and the parts will be
professionally fitted. Operating safety
Important safety notes
Printed Owner's Manual
G WARNING
The printed Owner's Manual (including any All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work
Supplements) must be observed. relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
There is no electronic update to the Digital
cialist workshop.
Owner's Manual. Amendments are only made
to the printed Owner's Manual.
G WARNING
Some safety systems only function when the
Owner's Manual engine is running. You should therefore never
switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise,
General notes the safety systems of your vehicle may not
function correctly and as a result will no lon-
Before you first drive off, read this Owner's
ger protect you and other persons as inten-
Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with
ded. In addition, there is a risk that you may
your vehicle.
lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, accident.
follow the instructions and warning notices in
this manual. Disregarding them may lead to G WARNING
damage to the vehicle or personal injury.
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations
made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables
under coverings, could cause the safety sys-
Vehicle equipment
tems of your vehicle to stop working properly.
This Owner's Manual describes all models The safety systems would thus no longer pro-
and all standard and optional equipment tect you and other persons as intended. In
available for your vehicle at the time of pub- addition, there is a risk that you may lose con-
lication of the Owner's Manual. Country-spe- trol of your vehicle and thus cause an acci-
cific differences are possible. Note that your dent.
vehicle may not be fitted with all features All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g.
described. This is also the case for systems installations or modifications, should there-
and functions relevant to safety. Therefore,
Introduction 25
fore be carried out at a qualified specialist operating safety of your vehicle while driving.
workshop. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
G WARNING tics connection.
If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
ware is carried out incorrectly, this equipment G WARNING
could stop working. The electronic systems Loose equipment or cables hanging from a
are networked via interfaces. Tampering with device which are connected to a diagnostic
these electronic systems could cause mal- connection could impede pedal clearance.
functions in systems which have not been The equipment or cables could get caught
modified. Malfunctions such as these can between the pedals when driving and braking
seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating suddenly. This could impair the function of the
safety and therefore your own safety. pedals. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore have all work and mod- Do not attach any equipment or cables in the
ifications to electronic components carried driver's footwell.
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! If the engine is switched off and equip-
ment on the diagnostics connection is
Declarations of conformity used, the starter battery may discharge.
Wireless vehicle components The diagnostics connection is only intended

for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
The following information applies to all com- a qualified specialist workshop.
ponents of the vehicle and the COMAND sys- Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
tem which receive and/or transmit radio connection can lead to emissions monitoring
waves: information being reset, for example. This
The components of this vehicle which receive may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
and/or transmit radio waves are compliant requirements of the next emissions test dur-
with the basic requirements and other rele- ing the main inspection.
vant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. You
can obtain further information from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Qualified specialist workshop
A qualified specialist workshop has the nec-
Electromagnetic compatibility essary special skills, tools and qualifications
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehi- to correctly carry out any necessary work on
cle components has been checked and certi- your vehicle. This particularly applies to work
fied according to the currently valid version relevant to safety.
of Directive 72/245/EEC or the equivalent Observe the notes in the Service Booklet.
ECE Regulation ECE-R 10. Always have the following work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop:
Rwork relevant to safety
Diagnostics connection
Rservice and maintenance work
G WARNING Rrepair work
If you connect equipment to a diagnostics Rmodifications, installations and conver-
connection, it can affect the operation of the sions
vehicle systems. This could compromise the
Rwork on electronic components
Z
26 Introduction
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Implied warranty

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
Vehicle registration as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres culpable contraventions against these
to carry out technical inspections on certain instructions are not covered either by
vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
is improved as a result of the inspection. New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about
vehicle checks if it has your registration data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet Data stored in the vehicle
been registered in your name in the following
Fault data
cases:
Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an Components which are critical for vehicle
authorised specialist dealer. operation are equipped with fault data mem-
ories as standard. There are also data storage
Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined
devices which record how vehicle compo-
at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. nents have reacted in certain driving situa-
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a tions (e.g. airbag deployment or ESP® inter-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. vention).
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible This data is used exclusively to:
about any change in address or vehicle own-
Rassist in the rectification of faults and
ership.
defects
Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop
Correct use vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
G WARNING movements.
Various warning stickers are affixed to your When your vehicle is serviced by Mercedes-
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten- Benz, this technical information can be read
tion, and the attention of others, to various out from the fault memory. This is performed
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warn- by authorised employees of the Mercedes-
ing stickers unless the sticker clearly states Benz service network using special diagnos-
that you may do so. tic computers.
If you remove the warning stickers, you or After a fault has been rectified, the informa-
others could be injured by failing to recognise tion is deleted from the memory. Other mem-
certain dangers. ory data is constantly overwritten.
Observe the following information when driv-
ing your vehicle:
Other devices that store data
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual
Depending on the equipment level, your vehi-
cle may feature communications and/or
Rtraffic rules and regulations
entertainment systems (e.g. navigation devi-
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to ces, telephone systems). These allow you to
motor vehicles
Introduction 27
save and edit data required for the operation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
of the respective device. REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
Further information on operation (e.g. on ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
deleting data) can be found in the separate INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
operating instructions. IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-
POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
Copyright information THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
FreeType SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
Portions of this software are copyright © 2005 DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
rights reserved. © 1996-2000 by David OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
Gnu compiler LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-
GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the Uni- WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
versity of California. All rights reserved. EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
The Berkeley software License Agreement SUCH DAMAGE.
specifies the terms and conditions for redis-
tribution. Redistribution and use in source
and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistribution of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistribution in binary form must repro-
duce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other mate-
rials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning fea-
tures or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This
product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and
its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission.
Z
28
29
Cockpit ................................................. 30
Instrument cluster .............................. 32
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35
At a glance
Centre console .................................... 36
Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Door control panel .............................. 40
30 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Automatic transmission: F Adjusts the steering wheel
steering wheel gearshift manually 117
paddles 175
G Adjusts the steering wheel
; Cruise control lever 190 electrically 117
= Instrument cluster 32 Steering wheel heating 117
? H Combination switch 128

Horn
A I Parking brake 184
DIRECT SELECT lever 171
B J Diagnostics connection 25
PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play 211 K Opens the bonnet 345
C Overhead control panel 39 L Releases the parking brake 184
D Climate control systems 142 M Light switch 125
E Ignition lock 161 N Night View Assist Plus 222
Start/Stop button 161
Cockpit 31
At a glance
: Overhead control panel 39 G Diagnostics connection 25
; PARKTRONIC warning dis- H Releases the parking brake 184
play 211
I Ignition lock 161
= Cruise control lever 190 Start/Stop button 161
? Instrument cluster 32 J Adjusts the steering wheel
A Horn manually
B K Adjusts the steering wheel

DIRECT SELECT lever 171
electrically 117
C Steering wheel gearshift Steering wheel heating 117
paddles 175
L Combination switch 128
D Night View Assist Plus 222
M Parking brake 184
E Light switch 125
N Climate control systems 142
F Opens the bonnet 345
32 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page

Function Page ? Multifunction display 248
: Fuel gauge A Rev counter 247
; Clock: see the separate B Coolant temperature 246
operating instructions
C Instrument cluster lighting 246
= Speedometer with seg-
ments 247
Instrument cluster 33
At a glance
i Instrument cluster: miles Function Page
Function Page ? Multifunction display 248
: Fuel gauge A Rev counter 247
; Clock: see the separate B Coolant temperature 246
C Instrument cluster lighting 246
= Speedometer with seg-
ments 247
34 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: å ESP® OFF 302 F K Main-beam headlamp 129
; % Diesel engine: pre- G ÷ ESP® 302
glow 163
H ü Seat belt 299
= N Front foglamps 126
I 6 SRS 304
? R Rear foglamp 127
J ; Engine diagnostics 305
A J Only for certain vehi-
K J Brakes (red) 300
cles: brakes (yellow) 300
B L h Tyre pressure monitor 308
M SPORT handling
mode in AMG vehicles 303 M ? Coolant 305
C #! Turn signals 128 N ! ABS 301
D ä ESP® 302 O 8 Reserve fuel 305
E · Distance warning 307
Multifunction steering wheel 35
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 248 A %
; Audio/COMAND display; Back 247
see the separate operating Switches off LINGUA-
instructions TRONIC; see the separate
= ~
B =;
Rejects or ends a call 254
Exits telephone book/ Selects a menu 247
redial memory 9:
6 Selects a submenu or
Makes or accepts a call scrolls through lists 247
a
Switches to the redial mem-
ory Confirms the selection 247
WX Hides display messages 268
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
? ?
Switches on LINGUA-
TRONIC; see the separate
36 Centre console
Centre console
Centre console, upper section
At a glance

: £ Hazard warning C ¤ ECO start/stop func-
lamps 129 tion 164
; ATA indicator lamp 78 D c PARKTRONIC 211
= 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG E Ü Retracts the rear seat
OFF indicator lamp 57 head restraints 110
? Audio system/COMAND F u Saloon: rear window
Online; see the separate roller sunblind 330
G & Auxiliary heating 151
A c Seat heating 115
B s Seat ventilation 116
Centre console 37
Centre console, lower section
At a glance
i Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Function Page
Function Page K Stowage compartment 310
H Stowage compartment 310 L Ú Selects the drive pro-
Ashtray 331 gram 174
Cigarette lighter 331 M COMAND controller; see
Cup holders 328 the separate operating
I e Sets the suspension instructions
tuning 209
J É Sets the vehicle level 208
38
At a glance Centre console
i Vehicles with selector lever or gear lever Function Page

Function Page K Stowage compartment 310
H Stowage compartment 310 L COMAND controller; see
Ashtray 331 the separate operating
Cigarette lighter 331 instructions
I Gear lever 169 M Ú Selects the drive pro-
Selector lever 171 gram 174
J Stowage compartment 310

Cup holders 328
Overhead control panel 39
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: u Switches the rear 3 Opens/closes the
interior lighting on/off 134 panorama sliding sunroof
with roller sunblinds 101
; | Switches the auto-
C Buttons for the garage door
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off 134 opener 336
= D ê Deactivates the inte-

p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 133 rior motion sensor 79
? E p Switches the left-

ë Deactivates tow-
away protection 79 hand reading lamp on/off 133
A F c Switches the front

Rear-view mirror 120
interior lighting on/off 134
B 3 Opens/closes the
sliding sunroof 100
40 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: r45= B W Opens/closes the
Stores settings for the seat, side windows 96
exterior mirrors and steer-
C n Activates/deacti-
ing wheel 121
vates the override feature
; Adjusts the seats electri- for the side windows in the
cally 108 rear compartment 69
= %& Unlocks/locks D p Opens/closes the
the vehicle 89 boot lid/tailgate 93
? Opens the door 89
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exte-
rior mirrors in/out electri-
cally 119
41
Useful information .............................. 42

Panic alarm .......................................... 42
Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 55
Driving safety systems ....................... 70
Safety
Anti-theft systems .............................. 78
42 Occupant safety
Useful information Occupant safety
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Important safety notes

els, series and optional equipment for your G WARNING
vehicle that were available at the time of If service work is not carried out correctly, the
Safety
going to press. National variations are pos- operating safety of your vehicle may be affec-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be ted. This could cause you to lose control of
equipped with all of the functions descri- your vehicle and cause an accident. More-
bed. This is also the case for systems and over, the safety systems may no longer be
functions relevant to safety. able to protect you or others as they are
i Read the information on qualified special- designed to do.
ist workshops: (Y page 25). Always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Panic alarm G WARNING

Modifications to or work performed incor-
rectly on the following parts can result in the
restraint systems not functioning as intended:
Rthe restraint system, consisting of seat
belts and their anchorage points, belt ten-
sioners, belt force limiters and airbags
Rthe wiring
Rnetworked electronic systems
Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to

deploy or be triggered in an accident despite
the deceleration force being sufficient to trig-
X To activate: press ! button : for at ger the systems, or could be triggered unin-
least one second. tentionally. For this reason, never make any
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting modifications to the restraint systems.
flashes. Therefore, you must not tamper with elec-
X To deactivate: press ! button : tronic components or their software.
again.
or The seat belts, together with SRS (Supple-
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
mental Restraint System), are complemen-
tary, co-ordinated restraint systems
or (Y page 43). They reduce the risk of injury
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. in specific, pre-defined types of accident sit-
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- uations and thereby increase occupant
cle. safety. However, seat belts and airbags gen-
erally do not protect against objects pene-
i The panic alarm function is only available trating the vehicle from the outside.
in Mexico.
Occupant safety 43
To ensure that the restraint systems can SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming
deliver their full potential protection, make into contact with the vehicle's interior in the
sure that: event of an accident. It can also reduce the
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted forces to which occupants are subjected dur-
properly (Y page 106). ing an accident.
Safety
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly
(Y page 51).
SRS warning lamp
Rthe airbags can inflate unrestricted if G WARNING
deployed (Y page 44). If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly may be triggered unintentionally or might not
(Y page 117). be triggered in the event of an accident with
Rthe restraint systems have not been modi- a high rate of vehicle deceleration.
fied. A malfunction has occurred if:
An airbag increases the protection of vehicle Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
occupants wearing a seat belt. However, air- up when the ignition is switched on.
bags are only an additional restraint system Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
which complements, but does not replace,
warning lamp does not go out after a few
the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear
seconds.
their seat belt correctly at all times, even if
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
the vehicle is equipped with airbags. The air-
bags are not deployed in all types of acci- warning lamp lights up again.
dents. For example, if the protective capacity In this case, have SRS checked immediately
of correctly fastened seat belts is not at a qualified specialist workshop.
increased by deploying the airbags, the air-
bags will not deploy. SRS functions are checked regularly when
you switch on the ignition and when the
Airbag deployment only provides increased
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
protection if the seat belt is worn correctly.
can be detected in good time.
First, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
occupant in the best position in relation to the The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
airbag. Second, in a head-on collision, for cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
example, the seat belt prevents the vehicle on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
occupant from being propelled towards the after the engine is started.
point of impact.
Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
limiters and airbags
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) During the first stage of a collision, the airbag
Introduction control unit evaluates important physical
data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
SRS consists of: eration, such as:
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp Rduration
Rairbags Rdirection
Rthe airbag control unit with crash sensors Rmagnitude
Rbelt tensioners
Based on the evaluation of this data, the air-
Rbelt force limiters bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
belt tensioners in the first stage.
Z
44 Occupant safety
If there is an even higher rate of vehicle decel- i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
eration or acceleration in a longitudinal direc- gered if the seat belt tongues on the front
tion, the front airbags are also deployed. seats are correctly engaged in the seat belt
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air- buckles.
bags. The airbag control unit evaluates vehi- i Not all airbags are deployed in an acci-
cle deceleration or acceleration in the event
Safety
dent. The different airbag systems work

of a collision. In the first deployment stage, independently of each other.
the front airbag is filled with enough propel-
How the airbag system works is deter-
lant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The
mined by the severity of the accident detec-
front airbag is fully deployed if a second
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or
deployment threshold is reached within a few
acceleration, and the apparent type of acci-
milliseconds.
dent:
The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
Rhead-on collision
thresholds are variable and are adapted to the
rate of deceleration or acceleration of the Rsideimpact
vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Roverturn
The triggering process must take place in
good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- Airbags
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by:
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli- G WARNING
sion Airbags provide additional protection; they
Rthe collision angle are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- Observe the following notes to reduce the risk
cle of serious or even fatal injury caused by airbag
Rthe characteristics of the object with which deployment:
the vehicle has collided Rall vehicle occupants – in particular, preg-
Factors which can only be seen and measured nant women – must wear their seat belt
after a collision has occurred do not play a correctly at all times and lean back against
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, the backrest, which should be positioned
nor do they provide an indication of airbag as close to the vertical as possible. The
deployment. head restraint must support the back of the
The vehicle may be deformed significantly, head at about eye level.
e.g. the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag Ralways secure children less than
being deployed. This is the case if only parts 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suit-
which are relatively easily deformed are affec- able child restraint systems.
ted and the rate of deceleration is not high. Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat
Conversely, airbags may be deployed even position that is as far away from the airbag
though the vehicle suffers only minor defor- as possible. The driver's seat position must
mation. This is the case if, for example, very allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The
rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body driver's chest should be as far away from
members are hit, and sufficient deceleration the centre of the driver's airbag cover as
occurs as a result. possible.
Occupant safety 45
Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back Rmake sure that there are no people, ani-
as possible. This is especially important if mals or objects between the vehicle occu-
you have secured a child in a child restraint pants and the area where the airbags are
system on the front-passenger seat. deployed.
Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children Rdo not place any objects between the seat
Safety
– must not lean their heads into the area of backrest and the door.
the window in which the sidebag/window- Rdo not hang any hard objects, e.g. coat
bag is deployed. hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks.
Rrearward-facing child restraint systems Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders,
must not be fitted to the front-passenger to the doors.
seat unless the front-passenger airbag has It is not possible to rule out a risk of injury
been disabled. On the front-passenger being caused by an airbag, due to the high
seat, the front-passenger airbag is disabled speed at which the airbag must be deployed.
if a child restraint system with a trans-
ponder for automatic child seat recognition
G WARNING
is fitted to the front-passenger seat in a
Airbag functionality can only be assured if the
vehicle equipped with automatic child seat
following parts are not covered and no badges
recognition. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
or stickers are attached to them:
OFF indicator lamp must be continuously
lit. Rpadded steering wheel boss
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle Rkneebag cover below the steering column
does not have automatic child seat recog- Rfront-passenger airbag cover
nition, or your rearward-facing child Router side of front seat bolsters
restraint system does not have a trans- Rside trim next to the rear seat backrest
ponder for automatic child seat recogni-
Rroof frame cover between the front A-pillar
tion, children must be secured in a child
restraint system on a suitable seat in the and the C-pillar in the rear compartment
rear. If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint system to the front-passenger G WARNING
seat, you must move the front-passenger When an airbag deploys, a small amount of
seat as far back as possible. powder is released. The powder may cause
Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp- short-term breathing difficulties to persons
edged objects in the pockets of clothing. suffering from asthma or other pulmonary
conditions.
Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of
the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, In order to prevent potential breathing diffi-
particularly when the vehicle is in motion. culties, you should leave the vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so. You can also open the
Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard.
window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
interior. The powder does not constitute a
This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. health hazard and does not indicate that there
You could be injured if the airbag is is a fire in the vehicle.
deployed and you are holding the inside of
the steering wheel. G WARNING
Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the
The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
vehicle. been deployed. Do not touch them as you
could burn yourself.
Z
46 Occupant safety
Have the airbags replaced at a qualified spe- They are deployed:

cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
not protected by the airbags in the event of of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
another accident. longitudinal direction
Rif the system determines that airbag
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts
Safety
deployment can offer additional protection

the movement of the vehicle occupant.
to that provided by the seat belt
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
used
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a cle
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp If the vehicle overturns, the front airbags are
lights up. generally not deployed. The front airbags are
The airbag installation locations are identified deployed if the system detects high vehicle
by the AIRBAG symbol. deceleration in a longitudinal direction.
Vehicles with automatic child seat recog-
Front airbags nition in the front-passenger seat: front-
passenger airbag is only activated if the sys-
! Do not place heavy objects on the front- tem determines that the front-passenger seat
passenger seat. The system may then is occupied. The 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
detect that the seat is occupied and if there OFF indicator lamp on the centre console
is an accident, the restraint systems on the does not light up (Y page 57).
front-passenger side could be deployed.
If a child restraint system is fitted to the front-
Have restraint systems that have been trig-
passenger seat and the 4 PASSENGER
gered replaced.
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up
on the centre console:
Ra child restraint system without transpond-
ers for automatic child seat recognition is
fitted or
Ra child restraint system with transponders
is not properly fitted.
Driver's kneebag
Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the

steering wheel; front-passenger front air-
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
compartment.
The front airbags increase protection for the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
chest.
Occupant safety 47
Driver's kneebag : deploys under the steer- When deployed, the sidebags offer additional
ing column. It is deployed together with the protection for the thorax of the vehicle occu-
front airbags. The driver's kneebag is pants on the side of the vehicle on which the
designed to operate together with the front impact occurs. However, they do not protect
airbags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds the:
are exceeded. The driver's kneebag operates
Safety
Rhead
best in conjunction with correctly positioned Rneck
and fastened seat belts.
Rarms
The driver's kneebag increases protection of
The sidebags are deployed:
the driver against:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rknee injuries
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
Rthigh injuries
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
Rlower leg injuries
tion, e.g. in a side impact
i The driver's kneebag is only available in Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
certain countries. Rindependently of the front airbags
Rindependently of the belt tensioners
Sidebags
If the vehicle overturns, the sidebags are gen-
G WARNING erally not deployed. Sidebags are deployed if
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz the system detects high vehicle deceleration
recommends that, for safety reasons, you or acceleration in a lateral direction and
only use seat covers that have been approved determines that sidebag deployment can
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. offer additional protection to that provided by
the seat belt.
The seat covers must have a special tear seam
for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the side-
Pelvisbags
bag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and
would fail to provide the intended protection G WARNING
in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
covers can be obtained, for example, from a
recommends that, for safety reasons, you
only use seat covers that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The seat covers must have a special tear seam
for sidebags/pelvisbags. Otherwise, the side-
bag/pelvisbag cannot deploy correctly and
would fail to provide the intended protection
in the event of an accident. Appropriate seat
covers can be obtained, for example, from a
Sidebags (example: Saloon)

Front sidebags : and rear sidebags;
deploy next to the outer seat cushions.
Z
48 Occupant safety
Windowbags
Safety
Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of

protection of the vehicle occupants on the Front-passenger side windowbags (example:
side of the vehicle on which the impact Saloon)
occurs. Windowbags : enhance the level of protec-
Pelvisbags : deploy next to and below the tion for the head, but not chest or arms, of the
outer seat cushions. They are deployed: vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
Ron the side on which an impact occurs on which the impact occurs.
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate The windowbags are integrated into the side
of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera- of the roof frame and deployed in the area
tion, e.g. in a side impact from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt Windowbags are deployed:
Rindependently of the front airbags Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
Rindependently of the belt tensioners of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
If the vehicle overturns, the pelvisbags are tion, e.g. in a side impact
generally not deployed. Exception: if the sys- Ron the side on which an impact occurs
tem detects high vehicle deceleration or Ron the driver's and the front passenger's
acceleration in a lateral direction and deter- side if the vehicle overturns and the system
mines that deployment can offer additional determines that windowbag deployment
protection to that provided by the seat belt. can offer additional protection to that pro-
i Pelvisbags are only available in certain vided by the seat belt
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
countries.
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of the front airbags
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-

PRO luxury head restraints
G WARNING
Only use head restraint covers which have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz
for your vehicle model.
Occupant safety 49
The use of non-approved head restraint cov- Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head
ers may prevent NECK-PRO head restraints/ restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints from trig- restraint
gering properly. The NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints NECK-PRO head restraints
Safety
can therefore not provide the intended pro-
tection.
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
regarding availability.
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury

head restraints increase protection of the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
neck. In the event of a rear collision of a cer-
tain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driv-
er's and front-passenger seats are moved for- NECK-PRO head restraints (example: Saloon)
wards and upwards. This provides better X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
head support. cushion forwards in the direction of
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO arrow :.
luxury head restraints have been triggered in X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints it will go.
on the driver's and front-passenger seats X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
(Y page 50). Otherwise, the additional pro- cushion back in the direction of arrow =
tection will not be available in the event of
until the cushion engages.
another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
X Repeat this procedure for the second
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
that have been triggered are moved forwards NECK-PRO head restraint.
and can no longer be adjusted. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
Mercedes-Benz recommends having the requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO head culty resetting the NECK-PRO head
restraints checked at a qualified specialist restraints, have this work carried out at a
workshop after a rear-end collision. qualified specialist workshop.
Z
50 Occupant safety
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints the seat back. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to
protect occupants in certain hazardous sit-
uations.
Safety
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rwhen BAS activates, e.g. in emergency
braking situations
Rwhen BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully on
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS
Rif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints radar sensor system detects an imminent
X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle danger of collision in certain situations
document wallet. Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle
between the NECK-PRO luxury head understeers or oversteers severely
restraint and the rear cover of the head PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
restraint. depending on the hazardous situation detec-
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you ted:
hear the head restraint deployment mech- Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
anism engage. Rvehicles with the memory function: the
X Pull out resetting tool :. front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an
X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head unfavourable position.
restraint cushion back = until it engages. Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active
X Repeat this procedure for the second multicontour seat: the air pressure in the
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint. side bolsters of the seat cushion and back-
X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle rest is increased.
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/
document wallet.
panorama sliding sunroof and the side win-
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK- dows are closed so that only a small gap
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work remains.
carried out at a qualified specialist work- If the hazardous situation passes without
shop. resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pretensioning. The air pressure in the
side bolsters on the multicontour seat/active
PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant multicontour seat is reduced again. All set-
protection) tings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be
G WARNING reversed.
When adjusting the seat, make sure that If the seat belts are not released:
nobody can become trapped. X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but
only when the vehicle is stationary.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the The belt pretensioning is reduced and the
footwell or behind the seats when moving locking mechanism is released.
Occupant safety 51
More information about seat belt adjustment, other occupants being seriously or fatally
a convenience function integrated into PRE- injured.
SAFE®, can be found under "Seat belt adjust- RPersons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
ment" (Y page 52). seat belts correctly. For this reason secure
persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially
Safety
designed, suitable restraint systems.
Seat belts RChildren under 1.50 m tall and younger
Important safety notes than twelve years of age cannot wear the
seat belts correctly. For this reason secure
G WARNING them in special suitable child restraint sys-
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or tems installed on a suitable seat. Additional
which has not been engaged in the seat belt information can be found in the Operating
buckle correctly, cannot provide the intended Instructions in the chapter "Safety", "Chil-
level of protection. Under certain circumstan- dren in the Vehicle". Observe the installa-
ces, this could cause severe or even fatal inju- tion instructions of the child restraint sys-
ries in the event of an accident. tem manufacturer.
Therefore, make sure that all occupants — in RDo not secure an object with a seat belt if
particular, pregnant women — wear their seat the seat belt is also being used by one of
belts correctly at all times. the vehicle's occupants.
RThe seat belt must fit snugly on your body
and must not be twisted.Therefore, avoid G WARNING
wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. The seat belt does not offer the intended level
The shoulder section of the belt must be of protection unless the backrest is almost
routed across the centre of your shoulder vertical. Under certain circumstances, this
— on no account across your neck or under could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the
your arm — and pulled tight against your event of an accident.
upper body. The lap belt must always pass Before starting a journey, make sure that the
across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. seat is properly adjusted and that the back-
over your hip joints — not across your abdo- rest is almost vertical.
men. If necessary, push the seat belt
slightly downwards and adjust it by pulling G WARNING
it in the direction the seat belt retracts. A dirty or damaged seat belt or one that has
RDo not route the seat belt strap over sharp been modified or subjected to a load in an
or fragile objects. Please make sure that accident no longer offers the intended level of
such objects are not on or in your clothing, protection. Under certain circumstances, this
e.g. spectacles, pens or keys etc. The seat could cause severe or even fatal injuries in the
belt strap could become damaged and tear event of an accident.
during an accident and you or other vehicle For this reason, check regularly that the seat
occupants could be injured. belts are not damaged or dirty.
ROnly one person should use each seat belt Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
at any one time. Children must never travel that have been subjected to a load in an acci-
sitting on the lap of another occupant. The dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-
child will not be secured in the event of an shop.
accident, heavy braking or sudden change For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
of direction. This may result in the child or mends that you only use seat belts which have
Z
52 Occupant safety
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your For more information about releasing the seat
vehicle. belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
seat belts" (Y page 53).
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restraining the movement of vehicle occu- Seat belt adjustment
pants in the event of an accident. This
Safety
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
Fastening seat belts The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the key to position
2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
and you then engage the belt tongue in the
buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. You can switch the belt adjustment
on and off in the on-board computer
(Y page 263).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
Example: Saloon
under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to protection)" (Y page 50).
an almost vertical position (Y page 106).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt Belt height adjustment
sash guide :.
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-
tion of the seat belt across the middle of
your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driv-
er's and front-passenger seat belts auto-
matically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 52).
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 52). You can adjust the belt height for the front
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder seats. Estate: you can also adjust the belt
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt height on the outer rear seats. Adjust the belt
across your body. to a height that allows the upper part of the
Occupant safety 53
seat belt to be routed across the centre of

your shoulder.
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
tions.
Safety
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
X Let go of belt sash guide release : and
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged.
Wearing the rear centre seat belt

If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded
down and back up again, the rear centre seat Example: Saloon
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.
pulled out.
X Slide belt tongue ; back to belt sash
X To release the rear centre seat belt: pull
guide :.
the seat belt out approximately 20 mm at
the belt outlet on the backrest and then
release it again. Belt warning for the driver and front
The seat belt is retracted and released. passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
Releasing the seat belts ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled to fasten their seat belts. It may light up con-
tinuously or flash. In addition, there may be a
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
warning tone.
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door, The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- the warning tone ceases when the driver and
aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their the front passenger have fastened their seat
protective function and must be replaced. belt.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For certain countries only: regardless of
whether the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts, the 7 seat
belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds
after the engine is started. It then goes out if
the driver and the front passenger have fas-
tened their seat belts.
i For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Indicator and warn-
ing lamps in the instrument cluster, seat
belt" (Y page 299).
Z
54 Occupant safety
Rear seat belt status indicator Comply with safety regulations when dispos-
ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre can provide details of these
regulations.
! If the front-passenger seat is not occu-

Safety
pied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in

the buckle on the front-passenger seat.
Display for securely fastened occupants on right Otherwise, the belt tensioner could be trig-
and left side of rear compartment (example: vehi- gered in the event of an accident.
cles with rear bench seat) The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi- in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners
cator tells you if the rear passengers have and belt force limiters.
their seat belts fastened. The rear-compart- The belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in
ment seat belt status indicator indicates the an accident, pulling them close against the
rear seat on which the belt is fastened. The body.
ü symbol in the display indicates a fas-
Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat
tened seat belt. If a seat belt is not fastened positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
or if a seat is not occupied, the ý symbol
Belt tensioners do not pull vehicle occupants
is displayed.
back towards the backrest.
The rear-compartment seat belt status indi-
If the seat belt is also fitted with a belt force
cator appears in the multifunction display for
limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted
around 30 seconds if:
by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is
Ryou drive off and reach a speed of approx- reduced.
imately 10 km/h. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help
Rthe rear passengers fasten or unfasten to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat
their seat belts while the vehicle is in belt on the vehicle occupant.
motion. The belt force limiters for the front seats are
Rsomeone gets in or out of the vehicle and synchronised with the front airbags, which
the vehicle drives off again. take on a part of the deceleration force. This
You can also cancel the rear seat belt status results in the force exerted on the occupant
indicator immediately (Y page 268). being distributed over a greater area.
i The status indicator for the rear-compart- The belt tensioners can only be activated
ment seat belts is only available for certain when:
countries. Rthe ignition is switched on.
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43).
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
G WARNING
each of the three-point seat belts in front.
If the seat belt tensioners have been trig-
R
gered, they provide no additional protection
in the event of another accident. Therefore, The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the
have belt tensioners which have been trig- rear compartment are triggered independ-
gered replaced at a qualified specialist work- ently of the lock status of the seat belts.
shop.
Children in the vehicle 55
The belt tensioners are triggered depending Rifyou secure a forward-facing child
on the type and severity of an accident: restraint system to the front-passenger
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end col- seat, you must move the front-passenger
lision the vehicle decelerates or acceler- seat as far back as possible.
ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur- Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap
Safety
ing the initial stages of the impact of another occupant. Due to the forces
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side which occur in the event of a sudden
opposite the impact the vehicle deceler- change of direction, heavy braking or an
ates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direc- accident, it would not be possible to
tion restrain the child. The child could be thrown
Rin certain situations where the vehicle over- against parts of the vehicle interior and be
turns and the system determines that it can seriously or even fatally injured.
provide additional protection
G WARNING
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also The child restraint system cannot perform its
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang protective function if it is not correctly fitted
affect your hearing. The powder that is to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
released generally does not constitute a restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp braking or sudden changes of direction. The
child could be seriously or even fatally injured.
lights up.
For this reason, when fitting a child restraint
system, observe the manufacturer's installa-
Children in the vehicle tion instructions and the correct use of the
child restraint system.
Child restraint systems Child restraint systems should be fitted to the
rear seats. Children are generally better pro-
tected there.
G WARNING The entire base of the child restraint system
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal must always rest on the seat cushion. There-
injury to the child in the event of a sudden fore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion,
change in direction, braking or an accident: under the child restraint system.
Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under Only use child restraint systems with the orig-
twelve years of age must always be secured inal cover designed for them. Only replace
in special child restraint systems on a suit- damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz
able vehicle seat. This is necessary covers.
because the seat belts are not designed for We recommend the use of child restraint sys-
children. tems which have been approved for
RDo not drive with a child secured in a rear- Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
ward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat. Exception: if the vehi- G WARNING
cle is equipped with automatic child seat Do not leave children unsupervised in the
recognition on the front-passenger seat vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
and the child is secured in a child restraint restraint system. They could injure them-
system with transponders for automatic selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
child seat recognition be seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
Z
56 Children in the vehicle
Do not expose the child restraint system to Child restraint system on the front-
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys- passenger seat
tem could heat up and the child could burn
herself/himself on them.
G WARNING
If the front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
Safety
sons could be injured as a result. They could Ra child secured in a child restraint system
get out and injure themselves or be injured by on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
a passing vehicle. ously and even fatally injured by the front-
Observe the general notes on the HOLD func- passenger airbag deploying. This is espe-
tion, which can be found under the same key- cially a risk if the child is in the immediate
word. vicinity of the front-passenger airbag when
it deploys.
G WARNING Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
Unsecured or incorrectly positioned loads seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys-

increase the risk of injury for children and all tem. Only secure a rearward-facing child
other occupants in the event of: restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
Ran accident
the rearmost position if you secure a child
Rsudden braking in a forward-facing child restraint system
Ra sudden change of direction on the front-passenger seat.
Do not transport heavy or hard objects in the The front-passenger airbag is not disabled:
vehicle interior unless they are secured. You
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
will find further information under "Loading
recognition on the front-passenger seat
guidelines" in the index.
Rin vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure ognition in the front-passenger seat, if no
the child using a child restraint system which special child restraint system with trans-
is recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. ponders for automatic child seat recogni-
The child restraint system must be appropri- tion in the front-passenger seat has been
ate to the age, weight and size of the child. fitted
Ideally the child restraint system should be Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
installed on a suitable rear seat. You can also ognition on the front-passenger seat, if the
secure the child in the integrated child seat PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
(Y page 61). Make sure that the child is 4 is not lit.
secured in a child restraint system through- To make you aware of this danger, a corre-
out the trip. sponding warning sticker has been affixed on
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use the dashboard and on both sides of the sun
the listed child restraint systems visor on the front-passenger side.
(Y page 67). You can obtain further infor- Information about recommended child
mation about the correct child restraint sys- restraint systems is available at any
tem from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care
products to clean child restraint systems.
You can obtain information about this at
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to the rear-
most position.
Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
Safety
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat func-
tions/communicates correctly, never place
objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor restraint system. The entire base of the child
restraint system must always rest on the seat
cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint
system cannot perform its intended protec-
tive function in the event of an accident, and
could lead to injuries.
G WARNING
Do not place electronic devices on the front-
passenger seat, e.g.:
Rlaptops, when switched on
Rmobile phones
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or
access cards
Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat that is protected by an air- Signals from electronic equipment can cause
bag installed in front of it. interference in the automatic child seat rec-
ognition sensor system. This can lead to a
Automatic child seat recognition on the system malfunction. This may cause the
front-passenger seat 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp to light up without there being a child
G WARNING seat with transponders for automatic child
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- seat recognition fitted. The front-passenger
tor lamp does not light up when the child airbag will not then deploy during an accident.
restraint system is fitted, the front-passenger It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning
airbag has not been disabled. If the front- lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER
passenger airbag deploys, the child could be AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up
seriously or even fatally injured. briefly when you turn the key in the ignition
Proceed as follows: lock to position 2.
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system
on a suitable rear seat.
or
Z
i If the front-passenger front airbag is dis-

abled by the automatic child seat recogni-
tion, the following remain enabled on the
front-passenger side:
Rthe sidebag
Safety
Rthe pelvisbag
Rthe windowbag
Rthe belt tensioner
ISOFIX child seat securing system for

If your vehicle does not have automatic child the rear seats
seat recognition on the front-passenger seat,
this is indicated by a special sticker. The G WARNING
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
on the front-passenger side. The sticker is child seat securing system does not provide
visible when you open the front-passenger sufficient protection for children weighing
door. more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not
Vehicles without automatic child seat recog- secure children weighing more than 22 kg in
nition on the front-passenger seat: when you a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, child seat securing system. If the child weighs
the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
lamp lights up briefly, but does not have any system with the vehicle seat belt as well. In
function. It does not indicate that there is addition, when fitting a child restraint system,
automatic child seat recognition on the front- be sure to observe the manufacturer's instal-
passenger seat. lation instructions and the instructions for
correct use of the child restraint system.
G WARNING
Please note that if child restraint systems, or
their retaining systems, are damaged or sub-
jected to a load in an accident, they may not
be able to provide their protective function.
This could result in serious or even fatal inju-
ries to the secured child in the event of an
accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
in direction.
The front-passenger seat sensor system for For this reason, have child restraint systems
child restraint systems detects whether a and their anchorages which have been dam-
special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a aged or subjected to a load in an accident
transponder for automatic child seat recog- checked immediately at a qualified specialist
nition has been fitted. In this case, 4 workshop.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp :
! When fitting the child restraint system,
lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is
make sure that the seat belt for the centre
disabled.
seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
seat belt could be damaged.
Top Tether
Saloon
Safety
When installing the ISOFIX child restraint sys-
tem, fold protective caps ; of securing
rings : inwards.
X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system.
Comply with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions when installing the ISOFIX child
restraint system.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. Securing rings for two ISOFIX
child restraint systems are fitted on the left
and right of the rear seats.
Top Tether provides an additional connection

between the ISOFIX child restraint system
secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It
helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorage points are located
in the rear compartment behind the head
restraints.
X Move head restraint : upwards.
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
A.
X Route Top Tether belt = under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage A.
X Make sure that Top Tether belt = is not
twisted.
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchor-
age A.
Z
X Move head restraint : back down again X Hook Top Tether hook A into Top Tether
slightly if necessary (Y page 110). Make anchorage ? on the back of rear seat
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- backrest ;.
rect routing of Top Tether belt =. X Make sure that Top Tether belt B is not
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with twisted.
Safety
Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur- X Move head restraint : back down again
er's installation instructions when doing so.
slightly if necessary (Y page 110). Make
Make sure that Top Tether belt = is tight.
sure that you do not interfere with the cor-
rect routing of Top Tether belt B.
Estate
X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
Top Tether. Comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
Make sure that Top Tether belt B is tight.
X Install combined luggage cover and net
=(Y page 319).
Top Tether provides an additional connection

between the ISOFIX child restraint system
secured with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It
helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorages are attached to
the rear of the rear seat backrests.
X Move head restraint : upwards.
X Remove combined luggage cover and net
=(Y page 319).
X Route Top Tether belt B under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
Problems with child seat recognition
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 4 PASSENGER A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with a transponder for auto-
AIRBAG OFF indicator matic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger
Safety
lamp on the centre con- seat. The front-passenger front airbag has therefore been disabled
sole is lit. as desired.
The 4 PASSENGER G Risk of injury

AIRBAG OFF indicator
There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. Automatic
lamp on the centre con-
child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
sole is lit.
X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
or
e.g.:
The 6 warning lamp
Rlaptop
lights up and/or the
Rmobile phone
4 PASSENGER AIR-
BAG OFF indicator Rcards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
lamp does not light up If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is still lit:
briefly when you switch
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
the ignition on.
Integrated child seat trapped or damaged. This could happen

when you
- close the doors
G WARNING - adjust the seat
To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal - store the ICS padded play table and the
injury to the child in the event of a sudden side head restraints
change in direction, braking or an accident:
- transport heavy objects
Ryou must follow the manufacturer's instal- Rreplace the integrated child seat, the pad-
lation instructions for the child seat when ded play table and the side head restraints
fitting the integrated child seat (ICS) pad- if these were damaged or subjected to
ded play table and side head restraint and heavy loads during an accident.
when fastening the seat belt.
Rnote: children who weigh less than
Rdo not modify the integrated child seat, the
12.5 kg require a different child restraint
ICS padded play table or the side head system. Information about other child
restraint. Do not use protective covers. restraint systems is available from any
Rmake sure that the ICS padded play table Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
and the side head restraints do not become Rthe vehicle's rear seat backrest must be
locked in position.
The child seats are integrated into the right

and left-hand rear seat cushions. In conjunc-
tion with the components listed in the follow-
ing table, they comply with the legal require-
ments of ECE R 44.04.
Z
Weight Integra- ICS pad- Side

X Pull release handle ? forwards.
catego- ted ded play head X Lift integrated child seat = and press it
ries child table restrain back until it engages.
seat ts
Fastening a child's seat belt
Group I: Folded Manda- Manda-
Safety
9to out tory tory G WARNING

18 kg1 To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
injury to the child in the event of a sudden
Category Folded Not per- Manda- change in direction, braking or an accident:
II: 15 to out missible tory Rthe shoulder section of the seat belt must
25 kg
be routed across the centre of the child's
Group III: Folded Not per- Optional shoulder – never across the child's neck –
22 to out missible and must fit snugly against the child's
36 kg chest. The lap section of the seat belt must
be routed across the child's pelvis – not
across the abdomen – and pulled snug
Mercedes-Benz recommends using the inte-
against the child's body. Retighten the belt
grated child seat for children who weigh
strap if necessary.
between 12.5 and 36 kg.
Rnever secure more than one child at a time
For children weighing between approximately
in the child restraint system.
12.5 kg and 18 kg: an ICS padded play table
Rthe belt strap must not be trapped or twis-
and a side head restraint which have been
specially approved for the integrated child ted, nor rub against any sharp edges.
seat must also be used. Rif you have not fitted the side head restraint,
the head restraint must always be adjusted
Folding out the child seat correctly when driving with a child in the
integrated child seat. If the head restraint
is correctly adjusted, the back of the head
is supported by the centre of the head
restraint at about eye level.
Observe the installation instructions for the
ICS padded play table and the additional
warnings and information about risk of injury.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia

reel.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
Integrated child seat (example: Saloon)
buckle.
: Side head restraints
X If you are using an integrated child seat
; Belt guide without the ICS padded play table, make
= Integrated child seat sure that the seat belt:
? Release handle
1 Recommended: 12.5to 18 kg.

Ris
routed as low as possible across the The ICS padded play table is only suitable for
pelvic area, in front of the hips use together with the folded out integrated
Ris tightened across the lap by pulling child seat.
upwards on the shoulder section of the On the rear seats, only use the ICS padded
seat belt play table which is recommended for
Safety
Ris tight and is routed across the centre of Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
the child's shoulder An incorrectly fitted ICS padded play table
Ris not twisted and does not pass across could come loose and seriously or even fatally
the child's neck or under the child's arm injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
X Adjust the head restraint if necessary; see After fitting the ICS padded play table, make
(Y page 110). sure that it is secured correctly.
Folding in the child seat G WARNING

Do not modify the ICS padded play table, inte-
grated child seat or seat belts. The ICS pad-
ded play table must not be used without a
cover. The cover must not be removed from
the ICS padded play table or replaced with a
cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise,
the official approval is invalidated and the
padded play table's protective function could
be restricted.
G WARNING
X Pull release handle : forwards. Do not modify the ICS padded play table, inte-
X Push the centre of the integrated child seat grated child seat or seat belts. The ICS pad-
forwards and down ; until it engages. ded play table must not be used without a
cover. The cover must not be removed from
the ICS padded play table or replaced with a
ICS padded play table for the integrated cover from another manufacturer. Otherwise,
child seat the official approval is invalidated and the
Important safety notes padded play table's protective function could
be restricted.
G WARNING
If the ICS padded play table is not installed Use the ICS padded play table in accordance
and used correctly on the integrated child with the instructions in table (Y page 61).
seat, it cannot provide the intended protec- You must not use the integrated child seat
tion. It would then not be possible to restrain with padded table as a direct attachment to
the child in the event of an accident, sudden a baby car seat for which a body weight of up
braking or abrupt change in direction and this to 10kg is permissible.
could result in serious or even fatal injury to
the child. For this reason, observe the follow- Fitting the ICS padded play table
ing description when fitting the ICS padded G WARNING
play table: Make sure that:
Rthe belt is routed as described below.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Z
Rthe ICS padded play table is right up against X Guide both sections of the belt to right seat
the child's body. belt guide point = and attach.
Rthe belt strap is not trapped or twisted and X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
does not rub against any sharp edges. buckle.
Otherwise, it may not be possible to restrain X Slide ICS padded play table ; close to the
Safety
the child in the event of an accident, sudden child's body.

braking or abrupt change in direction and this X Pull both parts of the belt tight. Make sure
could result in serious or even fatal injury to that the seat belt is not twisted.
the child. X Adjust the head restraint if necessary; see
(Y page 110).
Side head restraints for the integrated

child seat
G WARNING
If you do not secure the side head restraint at
the anchor points intended, it cannot provide
the intended level of protection. It would then
not be possible to protect the child in the
event of an accident, sudden braking or
abrupt change in direction and this could
result in serious or even fatal injury to the
child.
Only attach the side head restraint to the
intended anchor points on the rear head
ICS padded play table (example: Saloon) restraint.
: Side head restraints For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
; ICS padded play table mends that you only use side head restraints
= Seat belt guide points which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
for your vehicle.
? Left leg
A Integrated child seat
B Right leg
X Fold out integrated child seat
A(Y page 61).
X Place the child on integrated child seat A.
X Fold both legs ? and B down.
X Place ICS padded play table ; over inte-
grated child seat A.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia
reel. Side head restraints (example: Saloon)
X Attach the lower and upper sections of the Use the side head restraints in accordance
belt in left seat belt guide point =. with the instructions in table (Y page 61).
Fitting side head restraints When you are not using the ICS padded play
X Slide head restraint ; upwards and posi- table and the side head restraints, store these
tion it upright. in a suitable place, such as the boot.
X Slide side head restraints B from the front
For example, on vehicles with TIREFIT, you
to the centre of both head restraint bars can store the side head restraints in the stow-
Safety
until they engage. age compartment under the boot/luggage
The right- and left-hand lock verification compartment floor (Y page 325)/
indicators = must be folded in. The red (Y page 325).
surfaces are no longer visible.
X Make sure that side head restraint B is Suitable positioning of the child
engaged in both head restraint bars. restraint systems
X Slide head restraint ; downwards
X To install a child restraint system on
(Y page 110) until it rests on the upper the front-passenger seat: move the front-
edge of side head restraints B. passenger seat to the rearmost and lowest
X Guide the seat belt through seat belt guide position and the belt outlet height to the
A on the door side on side head restraint lowest position.
B. Key to the letters used in the following table:
X Secure the child (Y page 62).
X Seat which is unsuitable for children in
Removing the side head restraints this weight category.
X Take the seat belt out of seat belt guide U Suitable for child restraint systems in the
A. "Universal" category that are approved
for use in this weight category.
X Move head restraint ; upwards.
L Suitable for child restraint systems as rec-
X Press left or right release button ? and pull
ommended, see the following table of
side head restraint B forward to remove "Recommended child restraint systems"
it. (Y page 67).
The left and right lock verification indica-
Front-passenger seat
tors : fold out briefly.
X Adjust head restraint ; (Y page 110). Weight cat- Front- Front-
egories passenger passenger
i Should a side head restraint be required airbag is front air-
for the second integrated child seat, this not disa- bag is disa-
can be ordered at any Mercedes-Benz bled: bled.
Service Centre.
Category 0: X L
Storing the ICS padded play table and up to 10 kg
the side head restraint Category X L
G WARNING 0+: up to
13 kg
Secure the ICS padded play table and the side
head restraints in the vehicle as specified; Category I: L L
otherwise, they may come loose. In the event 9 to 18 kg
of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt
change in direction, they could injure vehicle
occupants or cause damage to the vehicle.
Z
Weight cat- Front- Front-

egories passenger passenger
airbag is front air-
not disa- bag is disa-
bled: bled.
Safety
Category II: L L
15 to 25 kg
Group III: L L
22 to 36 kg
Example: approval label on the child restraint sys-
Vehicles with automatic child seat recog- tem
nition in the front-passenger seat: a "Uni- Suitability of the rear seats for attaching
versal" category child restraint system with a ISOFIX child restraint systems
transponder for automatic child seat recog- Key to the letters used in the following table:
nition must be fitted when the front-
X ISOFIX position that is not suitable for
passenger airbag is disabled. The 4
ISOFIX child restraint systems in this
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
weight category and/or size category.
must be lit.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child
Rear seats
restraint systems that belong to the
Weight cat- Left, right Centre "Universal" category which are approved
egories for use in this weight category.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-
Category 0: U U tems as recommended; see the follow-
up to 10 kg ing table of "Recommended child
Category U U restraint systems" (Y page 67).
0+: up to Carry-cot weight category
13 kg
Size cate- Equipment Rear seat,
Category I: U U gory left and
9 to 18 kg right
Category II: U U F ISO/L1 X
15 to 25 kg
G ISO/L2 X
Group III: U U
22 to 36 kg
Weight category 0: up to 10 kg, up to
approximately 6 months
i Vehicles with a folding bench seat in the
load compartment (Estate): information on Size cate- Equipment Rear seat,
child restraint systems on the folding gory left and
bench seat can be obtained at any right
E ISO/R1 IL
"Universal" category child restraint systems
can be recognised by their orange approval
label.
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg, up to Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg, up to

approximately 15 months approximately 15 months
Size cate- Equipment Rear seat, Manufacturer Britax Römer

gory left and
right Type BABY SAFE PLUS
Safety
E ISO/R1 IL Approval number 03 301146
(E1 ...) 04 301146
D ISO/R2 IL
Order number 970 10 00
C ISO/R3 IL (A 000 ...)
Automatic child Yes
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg, approx-
seat recognition
imately 9 months to 4 years
Size cate- Equipment Rear seat, Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg, approx-

gory left and imately 9 months to 4 years
right
Manufac- Britax Römer Britax Römer
D ISO/R2 IL turer
C ISO/R3 IL Type DUO PLUS DUO PLUS
B ISO/F2 IUF Approval 03 301133 03 301133
B1 ISO/F2X IUF number 04 301133 04 301133
(E1 ...)
A ISO/F3 IUF
Order num- 970 11 00 970 16 00
ber
Recommended child restraint systems (A 000 ...)
When installing a child restraint system on the Automatic Yes No
front-passenger seat: child seat
X Move the front-passenger seat to its lowest recognition
and rearmost position.
Weight category 0: up to 10 kg, up to Weight category II/III: 15 to 36 kg,
approximately 6 months approximately 4 to 12 years
Manufacturer Britax Römer Manufac- Britax Römer Britax Römer

turer
Type BABY SAFE PLUS
Type KID KID
Approval number 03 301146
(E1 ...) 04 301146 Approval 03 301148 03 301148
number 04 301148 04 301148
Order number 970 10 00 (E1 ...)
(A 000 ...)
Automatic child Yes
seat recognition
Z
Order num- 970 12 00 970 17 00 Approval number –

ber (E1 ...)
(A 000 ...)
Order number –
Automatic Yes No
child seat Automatic child –
Safety
recognition seat recognition
Category 0+: up to 13 kg
Manufac- Britax Römer Britax Römer
turer Size catego- E D, C
ries
Type KIDFIX KIDFIX
Manufac- Britax Römer –
Approval 04 301198 04 301198 turer
number
(E1 ...) Type BABY SAFE –
ISOFIX PLUS
Order num- 970 18 00 970 19 00
ber Approval 04 301146 –
(A 000 ...) number
(E1 ...)
Automatic Yes No
child seat Order num- B6 6 86 –
recognition ber 8224
Automatic No –
Suggested "Universal" category ISOFIX child seat
child restraint systems: recognition
Carry-cot weight category
Size categories F, G Category I: 9 to 18 kg
Manufacturer – Size categories D, C, B, A
Type – Manufacturer –
Approval number – Type –

(E1 ...) Approval number –
Order number – (E1 ...)
Automatic child – Order number –

seat recognition Automatic child –
seat recognition
Category 0: up to 10 kg
Size category E Size category B1

Manufacturer – Manufacturer Britax Römer
Type – Type DUO PLUS
Approval number 03 301133 Child-proof locks for the rear doors

(E1 ...) 04 301133
Order number A000 970 11 00
Automatic child Yes
Safety
seat recognition
Child-proof locks
G WARNING Child-proof lock for the rear door (example: Saloon)
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear You secure each door individually with the
doors and the override switch for the rear child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
windows when children are travelling in the secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open opened from inside the vehicle. When the
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
motion and injure themselves or others. from the outside.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
G WARNING lever up in the direction of arrow :.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
working properly.
restraint system. They could injure them-
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro- lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold.
Do not expose the child restraint system to Override feature for the rear side win-
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys- dows
tem could heat up and the child could burn
herself/himself on them.
If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
sons could be injured as a result. They could
get out and injure themselves or be injured by
a passing vehicle.
Also observe the notes on HOLD. Relevant
information can be found in the index.
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.

If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
only possible using the switches in the driv-
er's door. If indicator lamp : is off, oper-
Z
70 Driving safety systems
ation is possible using the switches in the the road surface. Please pay special atten-
rear compartment. tion to the notes on tyres, recommended
minimum tyre tread depths, etc.
(Y page 380).
Driving safety systems In wintry driving conditions, always use
winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, if necessary,
Safety
Driving safety systems overview snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
In this section, you will find information about ing safety systems described in this section
the following driving safety systems: work as effectively as possible.
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 70)
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 71)
RBAS PLUS(Brake Assist System PLUS) Important safety notes
(Y page 71) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 72) tion (Y page 70).
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
G WARNING
(Y page 72)
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
REBD (electronic brake force distribution)
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
(Y page 76) teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76)
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76) tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
Important safety notes diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
Hybrid vehicles: ensure that you read the including driving safety systems, will also
"HYBRID" supplement. You could otherwise become inoperative. Observe the information
fail to recognise dangers. on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 301) and
display messages which may be shown in the
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you instrument cluster (Y page 269).
are inattentive, the driving safety systems can
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
neither reduce the risk of accident nor over-
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys-
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
tems are merely aids designed to assist driv-
cle when braking.
ing. You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h
braking in good time. Always adapt your driv- upwards, regardless of road-surface condi-
ing style to suit the prevailing road and tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
weather conditions and maintain a safe dis- when you only brake gently.
tance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the
fully. instrument cluster lights up when the ignition
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
i The driving safety systems described only
running.
work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tyres and
Driving safety systems 71
Brakes path of your vehicle for an extended period of

time.
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal with force until the braking sit- At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h, BAS
uation is over. PLUS may also detect stationary obstacles,
for example, stopped or parked vehicles.
X To make a full brake application:
Safety
depress the brake pedal with full force. To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS
calculates the brake force necessary if:
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
Ryou approach an obstacle, and
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and func- If you are driving at a speed over
tions as a reminder to take extra care while 30 km/h: if you depress the brake sharply,
driving. BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake
pressure to a value adapted to the traffic sit-
uation.
BAS (Brake Assist System) If you are driving at a speed under
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- 30 km/h: if you depress the brake, BAS PLUS
is activated. Braking will be carried out at the
tion (Y page 70).
last possible moment.
G WARNING If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance ing force, preventative passenger protection
in an emergency braking situation is measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simul-
increased. There is a risk of accident. taneously.
In an emergency braking situation, depress X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents emergency braking situation is over.
the wheels from locking. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS operates in emergency braking situa- BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, tion as usual, if:
BAS automatically boosts the braking force, Ryou release the brake pedal.
thus shortening the stopping distance. Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
The brakes will function as usual once you collision.
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
The radar sensor system is switched off auto-
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) matically in the vicinity of radio telescope
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- facilities in the following vehicles:
tion (Y page 70). Rvehicles with COMAND Online and naviga-
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with tion
DISTRONIC PLUS. Rvehicles with Audio 20 and Becker® MAP
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- PILOT
ardous situations at speeds greater than Becker® MAP PILOT must be connected;
7 km/h and uses radar sensor technology to see the separate operating instructions.
assess the traffic situation.
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
Z
The radar sensor system must be switched off G WARNING

using the on-board computer in the vicinity of BAS PLUS does not react:
radio telescope facilities in the following vehi-
Rto people or animals
cles:
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rvehicles without COMAND Online and nav-
Rto crossing traffic
Safety
igation
Rvehicles without Audio 20 and Becker® Rwhen cornering
MAP PILOT As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all

Rvehicles for Australia critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For information on switching off the radar
sensor system using the on-board computer, Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
see (Y page 262). uation and be ready to brake.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
radar sensor system must: cle, have the configuration and operation of
Rbe switched on (Y page 262) the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-
Rbe operational (Y page 283) cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
sions at slow speeds where there is no visible
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
damage to the front of the vehicle.
BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
system is still available with complete brake
boosting effect and BAS.
Adaptive brake lamps
G WARNING If you brake sharply from a speed of more
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS
objects and complex traffic situations. BAS or BAS PLUS, the brake lamps flash rapidly.
PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There In this way, traffic travelling behind you is
is a risk of an accident. warned in an even more noticeable manner.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- If you brake sharply from a speed of more
uation and be ready to brake. than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn-
ing lamps are activated automatically. If the
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps
be impaired if there is:
light up continuously. The hazard warning
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- lamps switch off automatically if you travel
ing the sensors faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off
Rsnow or heavy rain the hazard warning lamps using the hazard
Rinterference by other radar sources warning button (Y page 129).
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
for example, in multi-storey car parks
Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
motorcycle Important safety notes
Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
line
tion (Y page 70).
G WARNING i Only use wheels with the recommended

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function
stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving properly.
safety systems are switched off. This increa-
ses the risk of skidding and an accident. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Safety
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a Traction control is part of ESP®.
qualified specialist workshop. Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the igni-
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
tion when the parking brake is being tested
example if the road surface is slippery on one
using a dynamometer.
side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more drive
Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth- torque is also transferred to the wheel or
erwise destroy the brake system. wheels with traction.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes Traction control remains active if you deacti-
on ESP® if the vehicle is being towed with the vate ESP®.
rear axle raised (Y page 373).
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp Deactivating/activating ESP® (except
in the instrument cluster lights up continu- AMG vehicles)
ously when the engine is running.
G WARNING
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk
available due to a malfunction.
of skidding and an accident.
Observe the information on warning lamps
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-
(Y page 302) and display messages which
bed in the following.
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 269). X To deactivate: (Y page 256).
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
from the direction desired by the driver, one instrument cluster lights up.
or more wheels are braked to stabilise the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to X To activate: (Y page 256).
keep the vehicle on the desired course within The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when instrument cluster goes out.
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the
can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. engine is started.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning The ECO start/stop function switches the
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. engine off automatically if the vehicle stops
If ESP® intervenes: moving. When pulling away again, the engine
starts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre-
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum- viously selected status. Example: if ESP® was
stances. deactivated before the engine was switched
X When pulling away, only depress the accel-
off, ESP® remains deactivated when the
erator pedal as far as is necessary. engine is switched on again.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
ing road and weather conditions.
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
Z
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- handling mode is designed for driving on
tions, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. designated roads when the vehicle's own
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- oversteering and understeering character-
lowing situations: istics are desired. Driving in SPORT han-
dling mode requires an extremely qualified
Rwhen using snow chains and experienced driver who is able to cope
Safety
Rin deep snow with these critical driving conditions.

Ron sand or gravel X To deactivate: briefly press button :.
If you deactivate ESP®: The M handling mode warning lamp in
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. the instrument cluster goes out.
Rtraction control is still activated. ESP® is activated automatically when the
RESP® still provides support when you engine is started.
brake. It may be best to activate SPORT handling
Rengine torque is not limited and the drive mode in the following situations:
wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the Rwhen using snow chains
wheels results in a cutting action for better Rin deep snow
traction. Ron sand or gravel
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
vehicles) warning lamp in the instrument cluster
Activating/deactivating SPORT handling flashes. ESP® only stabilises the vehicle to a
mode limited degree.
If SPORT handling mode is activated:
G WARNING
RESP® only improves driving stability to a
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- limited degree.
dents. Rtraction control is still activated.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- RESP® still provides support when you
uations described in the following. brake.
Rengine torque is restricted to a limited
degree and the drive wheels are able to
spin. The spinning of the wheels results in
a cutting action for better traction.
Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function:
the ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle
comes to a stop. When pulling away again, the
engine starts automatically. ESP® remains in
its previously selected status. Example: if
ESP® was deactivated before the engine was
X To activate: briefly press button :. switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when
The M SPORT handling mode warning the engine is switched on again.
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The SPORT handling mode message
appears in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating ESP® It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-

G WARNING lowing situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-
bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk Rin deep snow
of skidding and an accident. Ron sand or gravel
Safety
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- If you deactivate ESP®:
bed in the following. RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available; nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-
venes.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available; it
is also not activated if you brake firmly and
ESP® intervenes.
RABS still provides support when you brake.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning
X To deactivate: press button : until the of the wheels results in a cutting action for
å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in better traction.
the instrument cluster. Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the
The ÷OFF message appears in the mul- ECO start/stop function switches the engine
tifunction display. off automatically when the vehicle comes to
Deactivate ESP® when driving on designa- a stop. When pulling away again, the engine
ted roads when the vehicle's own over- starts automatically. ESP® remains in its pre-
steering and understeering characteristics viously selected status. Example: if ESP® was
are desired. Driving without ESP® requires deactivated before the engine was switched
an extremely qualified and experienced off, ESP® remains deactivated when the
driver who is able to cope with these critical engine is switched on again.
driving conditions.
ESP® trailer stabilisation
X To activate: briefly press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the G WARNING
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON If road and weather conditions are poor,
message appears in the multifunction dis- trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent
play. the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-
ESP® is activated automatically when the ing. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can
engine is started. tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is
a risk of an accident.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
ing road and weather conditions.
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
lurch, you can only stabilise the vehicle/
Z
trailer combination by depressing the brake PRE-SAFE® Brake

firmly.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
tion (Y page 70).
detect if the vehicle/trailer combination
begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
Safety
by braking and limiting the engine output until with DISTRONIC PLUS.
the vehicle/trailer combination has stabi- PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimise
lised. the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or
Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-
about 65 km/h. SAFE® Brake detects a risk of collision, you
Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is will be warned visually and acoustically as
deactivated or disabled because of a mal- well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®
function. Brake cannot prevent a collision without your
intervention.
This function will issue a warning if:
EBD (electronic brake force distribu- Rat speeds of around 30 km/h or more, over
tion) several seconds, the distance maintained
i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- to the vehicle travelling in front is insuffi-
tion (Y page 70). cient.
The · distance warning lamp then lights
G WARNING
up in the instrument cluster.
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
Rat a speed of approximately 7 km/h or
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa-
ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
higher, you very quickly approach a vehicle
in front.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
An intermittent warning tone will then
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
sound and the · distance warning lamp
cialist workshop. will light up in the instrument cluster.
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
Observe information regarding indicator and distance from the vehicle in front.
warning lamps (Y page 301) as well as dis- or
play messages (Y page 271). X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- so.
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability while braking. From a speed of approximately 7 km/h, if the
driver and passengers have fastened their
seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the
ADAPTIVE BRAKE vehicle automatically at speeds up to approx-
imately 200 km/h.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety Due to the nature of the system, particularly
and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- complicated driving conditions may cause
tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary
also has the HOLD function (Y page 205) and
intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake.
hill start assist (Y page 164).
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
SAFE® Brake at any time by: take evasive action.
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further
Ractivating kickdown G WARNING
Rreleasing the brake pedal. PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-
Safety
tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
ended automatically if: In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
brake the vehicle
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
collision.
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in There is a risk of an accident.
front of your vehicle. Always pay particular attention to the traffic
With the help of the radar sensor system, situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
are in front of your vehicle for an extended intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
period of time.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
At speeds up to approximately 70 km/h,PRE- be impaired if there is:
SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
obstacles such as stopped or parked vehi-
ing the sensors
cles.
Rsnow or heavy rain
If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®
Rinterference by other radar sources
Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system
will alert you both visually and acoustically. If Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
you do not brake or take evasive action, the for example, in multi-storey car parks
system will warn you by automatically braking Ra narrow vehicle travelling in front, e.g. a
the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk motorcycle
of collision, preventative passenger protec- Ra vehicle travelling in front on a different
tion measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated line
(Y page 50). If, at speeds over 30 km/h, a risk
of collision remains and you do not brake, G WARNING
take evasive action or significantly acceler- PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
ate, automatic braking may be performed up Rto people or animals
to a level of automatic emergency braking. Rto oncoming vehicles
Automatic emergency braking is not per-
Rto crossing traffic
formed until immediately prior to an accident
that can no longer be avoided. Rwhen cornering
As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither

G WARNING
give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- uations. There is a risk of an accident.
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
danger of collision is detected. There may be
uation and be ready to brake.
a collision unless you also brake. Automatic
emergency braking cannot prevent a colli- In order to maintain the appropriate distance
sion. There is a risk of an accident. to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-
lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
Z
78 Anti-theft systems
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- Anti-theft systems

tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board
computer (Y page 256). Immobiliser
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the X To activate with the key: remove the key
Ä symbol appears in multifunction dis- from the ignition lock.
Safety
play, as long as the HOLD function is deac- X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
tivated (Y page 205). On vehicles with the ignition off and open the driver's door.
Active Parking Assist driving system, the X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Ä symbol is displayed when position P
is engaged or you are driving faster than The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from
35 km/h. being started without the correct key.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-
with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can
ing, the radar sensor system must be
start the engine if a valid key has been left
switched on (Y page 262) and be opera-
inside the vehicle.
tional.
The radar sensor system is switched off auto- i The immobiliser is always deactivated
matically in the vicinity of radio telescope when you start the engine.
facilities in the following vehicles:
Rvehicles with COMAND Online and naviga-
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
tion
Rvehicles with Audio 20 and Becker® MAP
PILOT
Becker® MAP PILOT must be connected;
see the separate operating instructions.
The radar sensor system must be switched off
using the on-board computer in the vicinity of
radio telescope facilities in the following vehi-
cles:
Rvehicles without COMAND Online and nav-
igation
Rvehicles without Audio 20 and Becker® X To prime: lock the vehicle with the key or
MAP PILOT KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
Rvehicles for Australia
tem is primed after approximately
For information on switching off the radar 15 seconds.
sensor system using the on-board computer,
X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
see (Y page 262).
key or KEYLESS-GO.
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- alarm system is primed and you open:
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- Ra door
sions at slow speeds where there is no visible Rthe vehicle with the emergency key ele-
damage to the front of the vehicle. ment
Rthe boot lid/tailgate
Rthe bonnet
Anti-theft systems 79
X To turn the alarm off with the key: press Deactivating

the % or & button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Safety
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The key
must be outside the vehicle.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
board. The key must be inside the vehicle. X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up briefly.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
close the open door that has triggered it, for GO.
example. Tow-away protection is deactivated.
Tow-away protection remains deactivated
Tow-away protection until:
Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and
Function
Ra door is opened and closed again and
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your Rthe vehicle is locked again
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the tow-
tow-away protection is primed. This can occur
away protection if you lock your vehicle and
if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for
it:
example.
Ris being transported
Activating Ris being loaded onto a ferry or car trans-
porter, for example
X Make sure that:
Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a
Rthe doors are closed.
split-level garage
Rthe boot lid/tailgate is closed.
Only then is the tow-away protection
primed. Interior motion sensor
X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
GO. Function
Tow-away protection is primed after When the interior motion sensor is primed, a
approximately 30 seconds. visual and audible alarm is triggered if move-
ment is detected in the vehicle interior. This
To deactivate can occur if someone reaches into the vehicle
interior, for example.
X To switch off: unlock the vehicle with the
key or KEYLESS-GO.
Tow-away protection is switched off auto-
matically.
Z
80 Anti-theft systems
Activating X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
X Make sure that:
Rthe side windows are closed. Indicator lamp ; flashes briefly.
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
sunroof is closed. GO.

Safety
Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang-

The interior motion sensor is deactivated.
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-
handles on the roof trim. ted until:
This will prevent false alarms. Rthe vehicle is unlocked again and
X Make sure that: Ra door is opened and closed again and
Rthe doors are closed. Rthe vehicle is locked again
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-
sunroof is closed. rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle
Rthe boot lid/tailgate is closed. and:
Only then is the interior motion sensor Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.
primed.
Rthe side windows remain open.
X Lock the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS-
Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-
GO.
The interior motion sensor is primed after roof remains open.
approximately 30 seconds. i UK only: your vehicle is equipped with a
double lock function. The doors cannot be
To deactivate opened from the inside if the vehicle was
locked with the key or with KEYLESS-GO
X Unlock the vehicle with the key or KEY- (Y page 89). Deactivate the interior
LESS-GO. motion sensor before you lock the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is switched off The doors can then be opened from the
automatically. inside after the vehicle has been locked
from the outside. Observe the "Important
Deactivating safety notes" (Y page 88).
81
Useful information .............................. 82

Key ....................................................... 82
Doors .................................................... 88
Boot/luggage compartment .............. 91
Side windows ...................................... 95
Sliding sunroof .................................... 99
Opening and closing

82 Key
Useful information Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any

time, even if it has been locked
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
els, series and optional equipment for your left in the vehicle
vehicle that were available at the time of Rrelease the parking brake
going to press. National variations are pos-
They could thereby endanger themselves and
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be
others. Never leave children unsupervised in
equipped with all of the functions descri-
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
Opening and closing
bed. This is also the case for systems and

when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only
functions relevant to safety.
leaving it for a short time.
i Read the information on qualified special-
ist workshops: (Y page 25). G WARNING
If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the
weight acting on the key could cause it to turn
Key in the ignition lock or catch on the steering
wheel. This could cause the engine to be
switched off suddenly. You may lose control
G WARNING of the vehicle and cause an accident. Do not
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle attach any heavy or large key rings to the key
has been locked with the key or with KEY- that is inserted in the ignition.
LESS-GO, the double lock function is activa-
RDo not keep the key:
ted as standard. It is then not possible to open
the doors from inside the vehicle. - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another key
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo-
ple or people requiring special assistance. As foil
a result, they may not be able to free them- - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
selves in the event of an emergency. They This can affect the key's functionality.
could be seriously or even fatally injured by Keep the key away from strong magnetic
prolonged exposure to extremely high or low fields. Otherwise, the remote control function
temperatures, for example. In this case, res- could be affected.
cuing people from outside the vehicle is diffi-
cult.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor before
you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be
opened from the inside after the vehicle has
been locked from the outside.
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Key 83
Key functions Locking and unlocking centrally

You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the key with you. When you touch the surface
of the sensors on the vehicle's outside door
handles, KEYLESS-GO establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the key.
When the engine is started and whilst you are
Opening and closing

driving, KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a
valid key is in the vehicle by periodically
establishing radio contact.
You can combine the KEYLESS-GO functions
: & To lock the vehicle with those of a conventional key, e.g. using
; F To unlock the boot lid/tailgate KEYLESS-GO to unlock and pressing the
= % To unlock the vehicle & button to lock.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but- When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
ton. the distance between the key and the corre-
sponding door handle must not be greater
If you do not open the vehicle within
than 1 m.
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe anti-theft system is primed again.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The key centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe doors
Rthe boot lid/tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.

When locking, they flash three times. X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
You can also set an audible signal to confirm surface of the door handle.
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
signal can be activated and deactivated using
face :.
the on-board computer (Y page 262).
X Convenience closing feature: touch
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 260). ded period.
X To unlock the boot lid/tailgate: pull the
handle on the boot lid/tailgate.
KEYLESS-GO Further information on the convenience clos-
General notes ing feature (Y page 97).
Bear in mind that the engine can be started

by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Z
84 Key
Changing the settings of the locking Emergency key element

system
General notes
You can change the settings of the locking
system. This means that only the driver's door If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the unlocked with the key, use the emergency
vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre- key element.
quently travel on your own. If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door or the boot
Opening and closing
X To change the setting: press and hold

down the % and & buttons on the lid/tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system will
be triggered (Y page 78).
key simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
flashes twice (Y page 85). X To turn the alarm off with the key: press
i If the setting of the locking system is the % or & button on the key.
changed within the signal range of the vehi- or
cle, pressing the & or % button: X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
Rlocksor or
Runlocks the vehicle X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
The key now functions as follows: GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-
tion lock. The key must be in the vehicle.
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once. or
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO. The key must be outside the vehicle.
ton twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. If you unlock the vehicle using the emergency
key element, the fuel filler flap will not be
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- unlocked automatically.
lows:
X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the key into the ignition lock.
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
Removing the emergency key element
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six sec-
onds until the battery check lamp flashes
twice (Y page 85).
: Release catch
; Emergency key element
Key 85
X Push release catch : in the direction of Checking the battery

the arrow and at the same time, remove
emergency key element ; from the key.
Battery of the key

Opening and closing

G WARNING
Batteries are toxic and contain caustic sub-
stances. For this reason, keep batteries out of
the reach of children.
X Press the & or % button.
If a battery has been swallowed, visit a doctor
The battery is working properly if battery
immediately.
check lamp : lights up briefly.
H Environmental note The battery is discharged if battery check
Batteries contain pollutants.
lamp : does not light up briefly.
It is illegal to dispose of them X Change the battery (Y page 85).
with the household rubbish. i If the key battery is checked within the
They must be collected sep- signal reception range of the vehicle, press-
arately and disposed of in an ing the & or % button:
environmentally responsible Rlocks or
recycling system.
Runlocks the vehicle
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible i You can get a battery in any qualified spe-
manner. Take discharged cialist workshop.
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col- Replacing the battery
lection point for used batter-
ies. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the emergency key element out of the
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have key (Y page 84).
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
: Battery compartment cover

; Emergency key element
Z
86 Key
X Press emergency key element ; into the

opening in the key in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. When doing so, do not hold battery
compartment cover : shut.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
Opening and closing
= Battery
X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm
until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth
to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-
ment cover : into the housing and then
press to close it.
X Insert emergency key element ; into the
key (Y page 84).
X Check the function of all key buttons on the
vehicle.
Key 87
Problems with the key

You cannot lock or The key battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the key. function of the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
Opening and closing

If this does not work:
X Check the key battery (Y page 85) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 85).
X Lock (Y page 90) or unlock (Y page 90) the vehicle using
the emergency key element.
The key is faulty.

X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been
or unlock the vehicle unlocked for an extended period.
using KEYLESS-GO. X Pull the door handle and then turn the key to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.
There is a fault with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the % / & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check the key battery (Y page 85) and replace it if necessary
(Y page 85).
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
88 Doors

You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot be the on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
Opening and closing

X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 369).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 370).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Only vehicles without a The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

DIRECT SELECT lever: X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While doing
The engine cannot be this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
started using the key.
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily.
started using KEYLESS- X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
GO. The key is in the
vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the key in the ignition lock.
Doors cuing people from outside the vehicle is diffi-

cult.
G WARNING you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be
Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle opened from the inside after the vehicle has
has been locked with the key or with KEY- been locked from the outside.
ted as standard. It is then not possible to open G WARNING
the doors from inside the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
Therefore, do not leave any people behind in they could:
the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo- Ropen a door from inside the vehicle at any
ple or people requiring special assistance. As time, even if it has been locked
a result, they may not be able to free them- Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been
selves in the event of an emergency. They left in the vehicle
could be seriously or even fatally injured by Rrelease the parking brake
prolonged exposure to extremely high or low
temperatures, for example. In this case, res-
Doors 89
They could thereby endanger themselves and Centrally locking and unlocking the
others. Never leave children unsupervised in vehicle from the inside
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only
from the inside.
leaving it for a short time.
Unlocking and opening the doors
Opening and closing

from the inside
For all countries except the United King-
dom: you can open a door from inside the
vehicle even if it has been locked. If the vehi-
cle has previously been locked with the key
or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 78). X To unlock: press button :.
United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has X To lock: press button ;.
been locked with the key or with KEYLESS- If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
GO, the double lock function is activated as
standard. It is then not possible to open the You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
interior motion sensor (Y page 79) before you the key or KEYLESS-GO.
lock the vehicle. The doors can then be The central locking/unlocking button does
opened from the inside after the vehicle has not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
been locked from the outside. The anti-theft For all countries except the United King-
alarm system is triggered if the door is dom: you can open a front door from inside
opened from the inside. Switch off the alarm the vehicle even if it has been locked.
(Y page 78). United Kingdom only: if the vehicle has
You can only open the rear doors from inside been locked with the key or with KEYLESS-
the vehicle if they are not secured by the GO, the double lock function is activated as
child-proof locks (Y page 69). standard. It is then not possible to open the
doors from inside the vehicle. Deactivate the
interior motion sensor (Y page 79) before you
lock the vehicle. The doors can then be
If the vehicle has been locked using the lock-
ing button for the central locking, or has been
locked automatically, and a door is opened
from the inside:
Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked.
X Pull door handle ;. Ronly the door which has been opened from
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
up. The door is unlocked and can be door had been previously unlocked.
opened.
Z
90 Doors
Automatic locking feature

Opening and closing
1 To unlock
X To deactivate: press and hold button :

XTurn the emergency key element anti-
clockwise to position 1.
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
The door is unlocked.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
emergency key element clockwise.
i If you press one of the two buttons and X Turn the emergency key element back and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has remove it.
already been selected. X Insert the emergency key element into the
The vehicle is locked automatically when the key.
ignition is switched on and the wheels are If you use the emergency key element to
turning. unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
You could therefore be locked out if: theft alarm system will be triggered
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. (Y page 78).
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamom-
Locking the vehicle (emergency key
eter.
element)
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board com- If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
puter (Y page 261). key, use the emergency key element.
X Open the driver's door.
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
Unlocking the driver's door (emer- doors and the boot lid/tailgate.
gency key element) X Press the locking button (Y page 89).
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with X Check whether the locking knobs on the
the key, use the emergency key element. front-passenger door and the rear doors
X Take the emergency key element out of the are still visible. Press down the locking
key (Y page 84). knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 89).
X Insert the emergency key element into the X Close the driver's door.
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 84).
X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
Boot/luggage compartment 91
Saloon without the boot lid remote clos-

ing feature: the boot lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
Runlocked with the emergency key element
Saloon with the boot lid remote closing
Opening and closing

feature: the boot lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
1 Locking Ropened and closed automatically from out-
side
X Turn the emergency key element clockwise
Ropened and closed automatically from
as far as it will go to position 1.
inside
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
Runlocked with the emergency key element
emergency key element anti-clockwise.
On the Estate, you can:
X Turn the emergency key element back and
Ropen and close the tailgate manually from
remove it.
X Make sure that the doors and the boot lid/
outside
Ropen the tailgate manually from inside
tailgate are locked.
(Estate with a folding bench seat)
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
key.
from outside
Ropen and close the tailgate automatically
Boot/luggage compartment from inside

Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
Important safety notes Runlock the tailgate using the emergency
G WARNING key element

Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior
if the engine is running and the boot lid/tail-
gate is open. This could poison you. There- Opening/closing from the outside
fore, you should make sure that the boot lid/ To open
tailgate is always closed when the engine is
running.
! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and

to the rear when opened. Therefore, make
sure that there is sufficient clearance
above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.
i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail-
gate (Y page 444).
Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage
compartment. You could otherwise lock your-
self out. Example: Saloon, handle
Z
92 Boot/luggage compartment
X Press the % button on the key. Opening/closing automatically from

X Saloon: pull handle :. the outside
X Raise the boot lid.
Estate: if you pull handle : and keep it in
this position, you can open the tailgate man- G WARNING
ually. If you release the handle, the tailgate Only for the United Kingdom: if the vehicle
opens automatically. has been locked with the key or with KEY-
Opening and closing
To close ted as standard. It is then not possible to open

the doors from inside the vehicle.
G WARNING Therefore, do not leave any people behind in
Make sure that nobody can become trapped the vehicle, particularly children, elderly peo-
as you close the tailgate. ple or people requiring special assistance. As
a result, they may not be able to free them-
selves in the event of an emergency. They
could be seriously or even fatally injured by
prolonged exposure to extremely high or low
temperatures, for example. In this case, res-
cuing people from outside the vehicle is diffi-
cult.
you lock the vehicle. The doors can then be
Example: Saloon, recess
G WARNING
X Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using
Monitor the boot lid/tailgate opening and
recess :.
closing procedures to make sure that nobody
X Estate: let the tailgate drop and engage in can become trapped. To stop the opening or
the lock. closing procedure, press the closing button
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with on the boot lid/tailgate again or pull the han-
the & button on the key (Y page 83) or dle on the outside of the boot lid/tailgate.
with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 83).
! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the to the rear when opened. Therefore, make
boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/ sure that there is sufficient clearance
tailgate will not lock. above and behind the boot lid/tailgate.
Saloon: the boot lid then opens again. i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail-
gate (Y page 444).
To open
You can open the boot lid/tailgate automati-
cally with the key or the handle in the boot
lid/tailgate.
Boot/luggage compartment 93
X Press and hold the F button on the key Opening/closing automatically from
until the boot lid/tailgate opens. the inside
or
X If the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked, pull the
handle of the boot lid/tailgate and let it go G WARNING
again immediately (Y page 91). Monitor the boot lid/tailgate closing proce-
dure to make sure that nobody can become
To close trapped. Release the boot lid/tailgate remote
Opening and closing

operating switch to stop the closing proce-
dure.
i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail-

gate (Y page 444).
Opening and closing
Example: Saloon, closing button and locking but-

ton
: Closing button
; Locking button
Saloon: on vehicles with the boot lid remote
closing feature, you can close the boot lid
automatically. Vehicles with the boot lid
remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO, you
X To open: pull remote operating switch for
can simultaneously close and lock the boot boot lid/tailgate : until the boot lid/tail-
lid. gate opens.
X To close (Saloon): press remote operating
Estate: on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, you
can simultaneously close and lock the tail- switch for boot lid : until the boot lid is
gate. closed.
X To close: press closing button : on the X To close (Estate): turn the key to position
boot lid/tailgate. 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press remote operating switch for tail-
X To close and lock simultaneously:
gate : until the tailgate is closed.
Press closing button ; on the boot lid/
tailgate. You can open and close the boot lid/tailgate
from the driver's seat when the vehicle is sta-
i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the tionary and unlocked.
boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/
tailgate will not lock.
Z
94 Boot/luggage compartment
Limiting the opening angle of the tail- Opening

gate (Estate)
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
Opening and closing
outside.
To activate
You can limit the opening angle of the tail- Inside of tailgate
gate. This is possible in the top half of its
X To unlock the tailgate: slide locking
opening range, up to approximately 20 cm
before the stop. catch ; to the right.
X To open: pull the top of handle :.
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate. X Lift the tailgate upwards.
X To stop the opening procedure at the X To lock the tailgate: slide locking
desired position: press the closing button catch ; to the left.
(Y page 92) in the tailgate or pull the handle
on the outside of the tailgate again.
X To store the position: press and hold the Unlocking the boot (Saloon)
closing button in the tailgate until you hear ! The boot lid swings upwards when
a short tone. opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
The opening angle limiter is activated. The sufficient clearance above the boot lid.
tailgate then stops in the stored position
when opened. If the boot cannot be unlocked with the key
or KEYLESS-GO, use the emergency key ele-
ment.
To deactivate
If you use the emergency key element to
X Press and hold the closing button unlock and open the boot lid, the anti-theft
(Y page 92) in the tailgate until you hear alarm system will be triggered (Y page 78).
two short tones. X Take the emergency key element out of the
key (Y page 84).
Opening the tailgate from inside the boot lid lock as far as the stop.
vehicle (Estate with a folding bench
seat)
General notes
i Boot lid/tailgate opening dimensions
(Y page 444).
Side windows 95
To open
Opening and closing

1 Neutral position
2 To unlock
X Take the emergency key element out of the
X Turn the emergency key element anti- key (Y page 84).
clockwise from position 1 as far as it will X Insert emergency key element ; into the
go to position 2. opening in trim :.
The boot is unlocked. X Turn emergency key element ; 90° clock-
X Turn the emergency key element back to
wise.
position 1 and remove it.
X Push emergency key element ; in the
direction of the arrow and open the tail-
key. gate.
Tailgate emergency release (Estate) Side windows

Important safety notes Important safety notes
! When opening, the tailgate swings up and
G WARNING
out. Therefore, make sure that there is suf-
ficient clearance above and behind the tail- Make sure that nobody can become trapped
gate. between the side window and the door frame
when a side window is opened. Do not touch
i Opening dimensions of the boot lid/tail- or lean against the side window during the
gate (Y page 444). opening procedure. You could become trap-
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from ped between the side window and the door
outside the vehicle, use the emergency frame as the side window moves down. If
release on the inside of the tailgate. there is a risk of becoming trapped, release
the switch or pull the switch upwards to close
On vehicles with a folding bench seat, you can
the side window again.
use the handle to open the tailgate from
inside the vehicle (Y page 91).
G WARNING
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you close a side window. If there is a risk
of becoming trapped, release the switch or
press it again to open the side window again.
Z
96 Side windows
G WARNING
Children may injure themselves if they open
or close the side windows.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
a short time.
Opening and closing
G WARNING
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child : Front left
restraint system. The children could: ; Front right
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts = Rear right
of the vehicle ? Rear left
Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
longed exposure to extremely high or
lock.
extremely low temperatures
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
If children open a door, they could:
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
Rseriously or even fatally injure other people
i If you press the switch beyond the point
Rget out of the vehicle and injure them-
of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
selves, or be seriously or even fatally
ing process is started in the corresponding
injured by a passing vehicle
direction. You can stop automatic opera-
Activate the child-proof locks/override fea- tion by pressing again.
ture if children are travelling in the vehicle.
They could otherwise open doors or side win- i You can continue to operate the side win-
dows while the vehicle is in motion and dows after switching off the engine or
thereby injure themselves or others. removing the key. This function remains
active for five minutes or until the driver's
or front-passenger door is opened.
Opening and closing the side win- i The side windows cannot be operated
dows from the rear when the override feature for
The switches for all side windows are located the side windows is activated (Y page 69).
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
Convenience opening feature
The switches on the driver's door take prec-
edence. General notes
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out
the following functions simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Side windows 97
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama The side windows and the sliding sunroof
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds or the panorama sliding sunroof open.
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-
er's seat When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
neously:
i The convenience opening feature can
Rclose the side windows
only be operated using the key. The key
must be close to the driver's door handle. Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
sliding sunroof
Opening and closing

Convenience opening feature On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof,
you can then close the roller sunblinds.
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
handle.
Using the key
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the The key must be close to the driver's door
panorama sliding sunroof are in the desired handle.
position. X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama slid- handle.
ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds X Press and hold the & button until the
are opened first. side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
X Press and hold the % button again until panorama sliding sunroof are fully closed.
the panorama sliding sunroof is in the X Make sure that all the side windows and the
desired position. sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof
X To interrupt convenience opening: are closed.
release the % button.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:
X Press and hold the & button again until
Convenience closing feature the roller sunblinds of the panorama sliding
sunroof close.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
G WARNING release the & button.
When using the convenience closing feature,
make sure that nobody can become trapped. Using KEYLESS-GO
Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrap-
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
ment:
vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
With the key:
Rrelease the & button.
Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama sliding sunroof open again.
With KEYLESS-GO:
Rrelease the sensor surface on the door han-
dle.
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold
it.
Z
98 Side windows
XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the

door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof or the panorama sliding
sunroof are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-
sor surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Opening and closing
sliding sunroof or panorama sliding sunroof

are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof:
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle again until the roller sunblinds
of the panorama sliding sunroof close.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all doors.
lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed. (Y page 96)
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed (Y page 96).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Sliding sunroof 99
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead
to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side
windows.
Opening and closing

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you can- slightly:
not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof G WARNING

Children could injure themselves if they oper-
ate the sliding sunroof.
G WARNING Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
Make sure that nobody can become trapped cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
when opening and closing the sliding sunroof. the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
If there is a risk of entrapment, release the a short time.
switch immediately. During automatic opera-
tion, push the switch briefly in any direction
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
to stop the sliding sunroof. if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal-
functions may occur.
G WARNING Do not allow anything to protrude from the
The glass in the panorama sunroof could sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
break in an accident. If you are not wearing a be damaged.
seat belt, there is a risk that you could be i Resonance noises can occur in addition
thrown through the opening in the event of the to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Z
100 Sliding sunroof
Change the position of the sliding sunroof Rain-closing feature

or open a side window slightly to reduce or
If the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock
eliminate these noises.
or if it is removed, the sliding sunroof closes
Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sun- automatically:
roof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In this Rif it starts to rain
section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to
Rat extreme outside temperatures
both types of sliding sunroof.
Rafter six hours
Opening and closing
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply

Operating the sliding sunroof The rear of the sliding sunroof is then raised
Opening and closing in order to ventilate the vehicle interior.
i If the sliding sunroof is obstructed while
being closed by the rain-closing feature, it
opens again slightly. The rain-closing fea-
ture is then deactivated.
The sliding sunroof does not close if:
Ritis raised at the rear.
Ritis blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor,
e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge
Overhead control panel or in a carport.
: To raise
; To open Resetting
= To close/lower ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition opened or closed fully after resetting, con-
lock. tact a qualified specialist workshop.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre- Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
sponding direction. smoothly.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
point of resistance, an automatic opening/ lock.

closing process is started in the corre- X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
sponding direction. You can stop automatic (Y page 100).
operation by pressing again. X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
The sun protection cover automatically opens second.
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
or close the sun protection cover manually fully opened and closed again
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. (Y page 100).
i You can continue to operate the sliding X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
sunroof after switching off the engine or above again.
removing the key. This function remains
active for five minutes or until you open a
front door.
Sliding sunroof 101
Operating the panorama sliding sun- The panorama sliding sunroof does not close
roof if:
Ritis raised at the rear.
Opening and closing
Ritis blocked.
Rno rain is falling on the area of the wind-
screen being monitored by the rain sensor,
e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge
or in a carport.
Opening and closing

Operating the panorama sliding sun-
roof roller sunblinds
Overhead control panel G WARNING
: To raise Make sure that nobody can become trapped
; To open as you open or close the roller sunblinds.
= To close/lower
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
lock. only be opened and closed together when the
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre- panorama sliding sunroof is closed.
sponding direction.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the Opening and closing
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the corre-
sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing again.
Rain-closing feature
If the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock
or if it is removed, the panorama sliding sun-
roof closes automatically:
Rif it starts to rain
Rat extreme outside temperatures Overhead control panel
Rafter six hours : To open
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply ; To open
The panorama sliding sunroof remains raised = To close

at the rear in order to allow ventilation of the X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
vehicle interior. lock.
i If the panorama sliding sunroof is obstruc- X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
ted while being closed by the rain-closing sponding direction.
feature, it opens again slightly. The rain- i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
closing feature is then deactivated. point of resistance, an automatic opening/
Z
102 Sliding sunroof
closing process is started in the corre-

sponding direction. You can stop automatic
operation by pressing again.
Resetting the panorama sliding sun-

roof and the roller sunblinds
! If the panorama sliding sunroof and the
Opening and closing
roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or

closed after resetting, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sun-
roof or the roller sunblinds do not move
smoothly.
lock.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the panorama sliding sunroof is fully
closed (Y page 101).
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an addi-
tional second.
X Make sure that the panorama sliding sun-
roof (Y page 101) and the roller sunblinds
(Y page 101) can be fully opened again.
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Sliding sunroof 103
Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING
You could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increased
closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can become
trapped when closing the sliding sunroof.
Your vehicle may be fitted with a sliding sunroof or a panorama sliding sunroof. In this section,
Opening and closing

the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof can- If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
not be closed and you again slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and
reopens again slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-
ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-
ture.
Z
104
105
Useful information ............................ 106

Correct driver's seat position .......... 106
Seats .................................................. 107
Steering wheel .................................. 117
Mirrors ............................................... 119
Memory function .............................. 121
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

106 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- vertical position.
els, series and optional equipment for your Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
vehicle that were available at the time of thighs are gently supported.
going to press. National variations are pos- Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is adjus-
ted properly.
functions relevant to safety. When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
i Read the information on qualified special- of your head is supported at eye level by
ist workshops: (Y page 25). the centre of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 117).
Correct driver's seat position
X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
(Y page 117)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 117)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 51).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 52).
The seat belt should:
X Observe the safety guidelines on seat Rfit snugly across your body
adjustment (Y page 107). Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul-
X Make sure that seat = is adjusted prop- der
erly. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip
Manual and electrical seat adjustment joints
(Y page 108) X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir-
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 108) ror and the exterior mirrors in such a way
When adjusting the seat, make sure that: that you have a good view of road and traf-
Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag fic conditions (Y page 119).
as possible. X Vehicles with a memory function: save
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
Seats 107
settings with the memory function head restraint. If your head is not supported
(Y page 121). correctly by the head restraint, you could suf-
fer a severe neck injury in the event of an
accident. Never drive if the head restraints are
Seats not engaged and set correctly.
Important safety notes G WARNING
G WARNING A seat belt can only offer its intended degree
The seats can still be adjusted when there is of protection when the backrest is almost ver-
no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, tical and the occupant is sitting upright. Avoid

children should never be left unsupervised in seat positions that do not allow the seat belt
the vehicle. They could adjust the seats and to be routed correctly. Adjust the backrest so
become trapped. that it is as upright as possible. Never travel
with the backrest reclined too far backwards.
G WARNING You could otherwise be seriously or even
fatally injured in the event of an accident or
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
sudden braking.
is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted
from the road and traffic conditions and you ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of
heating, observe the following information:
the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
dent.
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
G WARNING soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
others could be trapped and thereby injured. switch on the seat heating. The seat
Children in particular could unintentionally heating should also not be used to dry
press the buttons to electrically adjust the the seats.
seats and become trapped. Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
Take care that: see the "Interior care" section.

Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
Rwhile moving the seats, your hands do not
get under the lever assembly of the seat seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
adjustment system. seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
Rchildren in the vehicle do not slide their
passengers, if possible.
hands under the levers.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate-
G WARNING
rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
when adjusting the seats.
Observe the notes on airbags. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Secure children as recommended; see the
"Children in the vehicle" section. Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
G WARNING soon as possible.
Make sure that the back of your head is sup- Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
ported at eye level by the central area of the switch on the seat heating. The seat
Z
108 Seats
heating should also not be used to dry Adjusting the seats manually and
the seats. electrically
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care".
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating mate-

rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when moving
the seat back. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
i The head restraints in the front seats are : Seat cushion angle
fitted with the NECK-PRO system ; Seat height
(Y page 48). For this reason, it is not pos- = Backrest angle
sible to remove the head restraints from
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
the front seats.
Vehicles without the through-loading fea- Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
ture: the head restraints cannot be X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards
removed from the rear compartment seats. or backwards.
For more information, contact a qualified X Release lever ? again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
i Further related subjects: position.
RThrough-loading feature in the rear
bench seat (Saloon) (Y page 315)
REASY-PACK through-loading feature in
Adjusting the seats electrically
the rear bench seat (Estate)
(Y page 317)
: Head restraint height

; Seat cushion angle
Seats 109
= Seat height Adjusting the head restraints

? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Adjusting the head restraints manually
A Backrest angle
Adjusting the head restraint height
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-
SAFE® has been triggered, the front-
passenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an unfavour-
able position.
i You can store the seat settings using the

memory function (Y page 121).
i Vehicles with the through-loading feature
and memory function: if you fold down a
rear seat backrest, the respective front
seat is moved forwards slightly if neces-
Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment System
sary.
i Vehicles with memory function: when the
seat is moved forwards or backwards, the
headrest is moved up or down automati-
cally.
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment System

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints
Example: Saloon
Z
110 Seats
X Push or pull the lower edge of the head Rear seat head restraints
restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Lowering the rear seat head restraints
from the front
Adjusting the head restraints electri-
cally
X Make sure the key is in position 2 in the

X To adjust the head restraint height: slide ignition lock.
switch for head restraint adjustment : up X Press the : button.
or down in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
G WARNING
When folding back the head restraint side bol-
sters, do not put your hands between the side
bolster and the cushion holder. There is a
danger of becoming trapped.
Example: Saloon
Only the outer head restraints are height-
adjustable (only for certain vehicles).
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
X To adjust the side bolsters of the head the head restraint down until it is in the
restraint: push or pull right and/or left- desired position.
hand side bolster : into the desired posi-
tion.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
Seats 111
Removing and fitting the rear seat head

restraints (only for vehicles with the
through-loading feature)
G WARNING
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
that have the head restraints fitted. This
reduces the risk of injury to the occupant in
the event of an accident.

Luxury head restraints (vehicles with luxury indi-
vidual rear seats)
Only the outer head restraints are height-
adjustable (only for certain vehicles).
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Example: Saloon
i If you pull the head restraint forward X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it
slightly, the effort required to adjust it is slightly forwards (Y page 316).
reduced. X To remove: pull the head restraint up as
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint far as it will go.
angle X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
engages.
Example: Saloon
X Pull or push the top of the head restraint
until it is in the desired position.
Z
112 Seats
Adjusting the multicontour seat ? To switch the massage function on or off

A To adjust the contour of the backrest to
increase/decrease support
B To adjust the height/depth of the back-
rest contour
The active multicontour seat automatically
adapts the sides of the backrest to your cur-
rent driving style.
Dynamic function
The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions

: To adjust the thigh cushion in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to
; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum- ensure ideal lateral support at all times.
bar region X To switch on: press button ; once or
= To adjust the backrest contour in the twice until the desired level is set.
upper back region One or two indicator lamps in button ;
? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat light up.
backrest X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly
You can adjust the contour of the front seats until all indicator lamps in button ; go out.
individually so as to provide optimum support
You can choose between two different levels.
for your back and sides.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in Level 1 (one indica- Standard setting:
the ignition lock. tor lamp) slightly increased
lateral support and
slow build-up of air
Adjusting the active multicontour pressure in the side
seat bolsters of the seat
backrest.
Overview
Level 2 (two indica- Sport setting:
tor lamps) increased lateral
support and fast
build-up of pressure
in the side bolsters
of the seat backrest.
Massage function (PULSE)

The massage function helps you to prevent
muscle tension on long journeys. You can
choose between two levels.
: To adjust the seat cushion length
; To switch the dynamic function on or off
= To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest
Seats 113
X To switch on: press button ? once or You can adjust the contour of the front seat
twice until the desired level is set. backrests individually to provide optimum
One or two indicator lamps in button ? support for your back.
light up. The air cushions in the lumbar
region vibrate for approximately
20 minutes. Folding bench seat in the luggage
compartment (Estate)
Adjusting the lumbar support
G WARNING

The rear seat backrests must be locked in the
upright position if you are using the folding
bench seat in the luggage compartment.
Do not pull away unless the head restraint in
the folding bench seat is fitted correctly.
Make sure that the centre of the head
restraint supports the seat occupant's head
at about eye level. This can reduce the risk of
injury to a child in the event of an accident.
Make sure that the seat belt is routed cor-
You can adjust the contour of the driver's seat rectly across the body and the seat belt
so as to provide optimum support for your buckle is engaged.
back. Do not leave children unsupervised in the
X Move adjustment lever : in the direction vehicle. This applies even if they are secured
of the arrow until the desired backrest con- in a child restraint system.
tour is achieved. Secure children as recommended; see the
section "Children in the vehicle".
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support G WARNING

Only replace damaged covers with genuine
covers.
Make sure that items of luggage and other
objects in the luggage compartment are well
secured.
Otherwise, the load could cause injury in the
event of sharp braking, a sudden change in
direction or an accident.
The folding bench seat in the luggage com-

partment is only suitable for persons no more
: To raise the backrest contour than 1.40 m tall and weighing a maximum of
; To soften the backrest contour 50 kg.
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
Z
114 Seats
The maximum permissible weight may be X Push down the seat cushion until the back-
reduced by: rest engages fully.
Rextensive optional extras X Fold the head restraints upwards.
Rvehicle load
Rtowing a trailer Fitting and removing the seat cushion
The combined luggage cover and net must be
fitted if you are using the folding bench seat
(Y page 320).
Folding out the folding bench seat

You must remove the seat cushion if you wish

to lift the luggage compartment floor, e.g. if
the vehicle has a flat tyre.
X To remove: fold seat cushion ; upwards
and remove it from seat cushion
X Make sure that the backrests of the rear guides :.
bench seat are locked in the upright posi-
tion.
X Move the handle for the combined luggage
cover and net upwards (Y page 320).
X Pull release handle : and fold the back-
rest of the folding bench seat upwards.
X To fit: push seat cushion ; into seat cush-

ion guides : at a slight angle from the rear
=.
X Fold seat cushion ; back into its original
position ? until it engages.
X Hook the seat belts into retainers =.

X Pull release handle ; and fold the folding
bench seat cushion into the sitting posi-
tion.
Seats 115
Folding back the folding bench seat X Press release catch : and push the head
restraints in fully.
X Fold backrest ; of the folding bench seat
into its original position until it engages.
Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off
G WARNING

Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level
3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.
X Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab :
The health of passengers that have limited
and fold it back into its original position
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
until it engages.
react to excessively high temperatures may
be affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating
level 3 repeatedly.
X Press release button : and fold the head

restraints down.
! In order to avoid causing damage, push
the head restraints completely into their Driver's and front-passenger seat
guides and click the seat belt buckles into
their guides.
Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
Z
116 Seats
The system automatically switches down Switching the seat ventilation on/off
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes. Switching on/off
Driver's and front-passenger seat: the sys-
tem automatically switches down from level
3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
Rear seat: the system automatically
switches down from level 3 to level 2 after
approximately five minutes.
The system automatically switches down

from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
indicate the ventilation level you have selec-
level 1.
ted.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
ventilation may switch off.
Problems with the seat heating i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
The seat heating has switched off prema- opening" feature (Y page 96). The seat ven-
turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's tilation of the driver's seat automatically
electrical system voltage is too low because switches to the highest level.
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
Problems with the seat ventilation
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window heating The seat ventilation has switched off prema-
or interior lighting. turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window heating
or interior lighting.
Steering wheel 117
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electri-

cally
G WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment fea-

ture can be operated at any time. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
: To adjust the steering wheel height
child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious personal ; To adjust the steering wheel position
injury. (fore-and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Adjusting the steering wheel man-
(Y page 118)
ually
RStoring settings (Y page 121)
Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off
: Release lever
; To adjust the steering wheel height
= To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
X Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
position.
X Push release lever : up completely.
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
When doing so, try to push the steering remove the key from the ignition lock, the
wheel up or down or try to move it in the steering wheel heating is switched off.
fore-and-aft direction.
Z
118 Steering wheel
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch thereby unintentionally activate the EASY-
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the ENTRY feature and become trapped.
steering wheel heating is switched off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
i The steering wheel heating does not
in and out of your vehicle easier.
switch off automatically.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
Problems with the steering wheel heat- ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-
ing puter (Y page 263).
If steering wheel heating indicator lamp = is Position of the steering wheel when the
flashing, the steering wheel heating has EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
switched off automatically. The vehicle's

electrical system voltage is too low because The steering wheel tilts upwards if you:
too many electrical consumers are switched Rremove the key from the ignition lock
on. Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is
X Switch off electrical consumers that you do in position 1
not need, such as the rear window heating Ropen the driver's door and the key is in
or interior lighting. position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
steering wheel heating will switch back on
it has not already reached the upper end
automatically.
stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ing
Important safety notes The steering wheel is moved to the previously
set position if:
G WARNING
Rthe driver's door is closed and
when you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- Ryou insert the key into the ignition lock
ture. or
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap- Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
ped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
the procedure: If you close the driver's door with the key
Rpress the steering column adjustment but- inserted into the ignition lock, the steering
ton. wheel is automatically moved to the previ-
Rbriefly press one of the memory function ously set position.
position buttons. The last position of the steering wheel is
The steering column stops moving immedi- stored when you switch off the ignition or
ately. when you store the setting with the memory
Do not keep the memory function position
function (Y page 121).
button pressed down, otherwise the memory
function will start and the steering wheel and Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
seat will begin to move. If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi- triggered in an accident, the steering column
cle. They could open the driver's door and will move upwards when the driver's door is
Mirrors 119
opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-

tion of the key in the ignition lock. This makes
it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the
occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-
ture is activated in the on-board computer.
Mirrors

Rear-view mirror X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte-
rior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle
switch : forwards or back. to the left or right until you have adjusted
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
Exterior mirrors
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
Adjusting the exterior mirrors field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
G WARNING
if the rear window heating is switched on and
The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
the outside temperature is low.
image. Objects are actually closer than they
appear. You could misjudge the distance from
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
vehicles driving behind and cause an acci-
electrically
dent, e.g. when changing lane. For this rea-
son, make sure of the actual distance from the
vehicle driving behind by glancing over your
shoulder.
Z
120 Mirrors
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or the mirrors engage in position
2 in the ignition lock. (Y page 119).
X Briefly press button :. The mirror housing is engaged again and
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 119).
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors
Setting the exterior mirrors G WARNING
If the battery has been disconnected or com- If incident light from headlamps is prevented
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must from striking the sensor in the rear-view mir-
be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise ror, for instance, by luggage piled too high in
not fold in when you select the "Fold in mir- the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-dazzle
rors when locking" function in the on-board function will not operate.
computer (Y page 264). Incident light could then blind you. This may
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in distract you from the traffic conditions and,
the ignition lock. as a result, you may cause an accident.
X Briefly press button :.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out dazzle mode if the following conditions are
automatically met simultaneously:
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function Rthe ignition is switched on and
is activated in the on-board computer Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
(Y page 264): sensor in the rear-view mirror.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
side. ing is switched on.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger Parking position for the exterior mir-
door. ror on the front-passenger side
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in Setting and storing the parking position
manually, they do not fold out.
Using reverse gear
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding
button : until you hear a click and then
Memory function 121
You can set the front-passenger side exterior Calling up a stored parking position set-
mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on ting
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
You can store this position.
lock.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
passenger side using button ;.
lock.
X Engage reverse gear.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
the front-passenger side. side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:
side moves to the preset parking position.
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
15 km/h
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
Rif you press button : for the exterior mir-
to see the rear wheel and the kerb.
The parking position is stored. ror on the driver's side
i If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi-
Memory function
tion. Storing settings
Using the memory button G WARNING
You can set the front-passenger side exterior Only use the memory function on the driver's
mirror so that you can see the rear wheel on side when the vehicle is stationary. You could
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. otherwise be distracted from the traffic con-
This setting can be stored using memory but- ditions by the steering wheel and seat moving
ton M ?. of their own accord, and as a result, cause an
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in accident.
the ignition lock.
X With the exterior mirror on the front- G WARNING
passenger side activated, use adjustment The memory function can still be used when
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the key has been removed. For this reason,
the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the children should never be left unsupervised in
kerb should be visible. the vehicle. They could otherwise become
X Press memory button M ? and one of the
trapped when adjusting the seat or the steer-
ing wheel.
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds. With the memory function, you can store up
The parking position is stored if the exterior to three different settings, e.g. for three dif-
mirror does not move. ferent people.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat The following settings are stored as a single
the steps. memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Ractive multicontour seat: dynamic function
level
Z
122 Memory function
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position

Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
X Adjust the seat (Y page 108).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 117) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 119).
X Press the M memory button and then press
storage position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
tings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

XPress and hold the relevant storage posi-
tion button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
123

Exterior lighting ................................ 124
Interior lighting ................................. 133
Replacing bulbs ................................. 135
Windscreen wipers ........................... 137
Lights and windscreen wipers

124 Exterior lighting
Useful information Vehicles with halogen headlamps
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-

els, series and optional equipment for your
vehicle that were available at the time of
ist workshops: (Y page 25).
X Switch off the lights.
X Open the bonnet.

Exterior lighting X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
Important safety notes pull it out.

X Push switchover lever ; down.
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
X Insert housing cover : and turn it clock-
mends that you drive with the lights switched
on even during the daytime. In some coun- wise.
tries, operation of the headlamps varies due Convert the headlamps back to asymmetrical
to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- dipped beam as soon as possible after return-
gations. ing across the border.
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System

Driving abroad
X Before crossing the border, set the head-
General notes lamps to symmetrical dipped beam and
when returning to asymmetrical dipped-
If your journey takes you to countries where
beam using the "Dipped-beam headlamps
vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the
for driving on the right or left" function on
road to the country in which the vehicle is
the on-board computer (Y page 260).
registered, your headlamps must be switched
to symmetrical dipped beam as soon as pos- If the headlamps are converted to symmetri-
sible after crossing the border. This prevents cal dipped beam, the "motorway mode" and
oncoming traffic from being dazzled. Sym- "extended range foglamps" functions are not
metrical lights do not illuminate as large an available.
area of the edge of the carriageway.
Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using the:
Rlight switch
Rbeam control (only vehicles with halogen
headlamps) (Y page 128)
Exterior lighting 125
Rcombination switch (Y page 128) cally. This could endanger you and others. In
Ron-board computer (Y page 259) such situations turn the light switch to L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
Light switch aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
Operation

1W Left-hand parking lamps 1W Left-hand parking lamps
2X Right-hand parking lamps 2X Right-hand parking lamps
3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru- 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
ment cluster lighting ment cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor led by the light sensor
5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- 5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
lamps lamps
BR Rear foglamp BR Rear foglamp
CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front
foglamps). foglamps).
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the Ã is the preferred light switch setting. The
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. light setting is automatically selected accord-
ing to the brightness of the ambient light
X Turn the light switch to Ã.
(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-
The exterior lighting (except the side lamps/ ditions such as fog, snow or spray):
parking lamps) switches off automatically if RKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
you:
side lamps are switched on or off automat-
Rremove the key from the ignition lock ically depending on the brightness of the
Ropen the driver's door with the key in posi- ambient light.
tion 0 RWith the engine running: if you have acti-
vated the daytime driving lights function via
Automatic headlamp mode
the on-board computer, the daytime driving
G WARNING lights or the dipped-beam headlamps and
If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy, side lamps are switched on or off automat-
snowing or there is poor visibility, the dipped- ically depending on the brightness of the
beam headlamps will not come on automati- ambient light.
Z
X To switch on automatic headlamp Even if the light sensor does not detect that
mode: turn the light switch to Ã. is dark, the side lamps and dipped-beam
The daytime driving lights improve the visibil- headlamps switch on when the key is inserted
ity of your vehicle during the day. Here, the into the ignition lock and the light switch is
daytime driving lights function must be set to the L position. This is a particularly
switched on via the on-board computer useful function in the event of rain and fog.
(Y page 259). X To switch on the dipped-beam head-
When the dipped-beam headlamps are lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to
switched on, the green L indicator lamp position 2 or start the engine.
in the instrument cluster lights up and the X Turn the light switch to L.
daytime driving lights go out or are dimmed. The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Dipped-beam headlamps
G WARNING Foglamps
If the light switch is set to Ã and it is foggy,
snowing or there is poor visibility, the dipped-
beam headlamps will not come on automati-
cally. This could endanger you and others. In
such situations turn the light switch to L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
1W Left-hand parking lamps

2X Right-hand parking lamps
3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
ment cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
led by the light sensor
5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
lamps
1W Left-hand parking lamps BR Rear foglamp
2X Right-hand parking lamps CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front
foglamps).
ment cluster lighting In conditions where visibility is poor due to
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- fog, snow or rain, the foglamps improve visi-
led by the light sensor bility as well as making it easier for other road
5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- users to see you. They can be operated
lamps together with the side lamps or together with
the side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps.
BR Rear foglamp
CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front
foglamps).
X To switch on the foglamps: turn the key X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the
in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start
engine. the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the N button. X Press the R button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru- The yellow R indicator lamp in the
ment cluster lights up. instrument cluster lights up.
X To switch off the front foglamps: press X To switch off the rear foglamp: press the
the N button. R button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru- The yellow R indicator lamp in the
ment cluster goes out. instrument cluster goes out.
Only vehicles with front foglamps are equip-
side lamps

ped with the "Foglamp" function; for how to
operate the foglamps on vehicles with the ! If the battery has been excessively dis-
Intelligent Light System (Y page 131). charged, the side lamps or parking lamps
are automatically switched off to enable
Rear foglamp the next engine start. Always park your
vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according
to legal standards. Avoid the continuous
use of the T side lamps for several
hours. If possible, switch on the X right
or the W left parking lamp.

5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- 2X Right-hand parking lamps
lamps 3T Side lamps, licence plate and instru-
BR Rear foglamp ment cluster lighting
CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-
foglamps). led by the light sensor
5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head-
The rear foglamp improves visibility of your
lamps
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
BR Rear foglamp
heavy fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog- CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front
lamps. foglamps).
X To switch on: turn light switch to T.
Z
Parking lamps
g Driver's seat and front-passenger seat

1W Left-hand parking lamps occupied
1 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and

rear seats occupied
2 Driver's seat, front-passenger seat and
rear seats occupied, boot laden
3 Driver's and front-passenger seats occu-
pied and maximum permissible rear axle
5L Dipped-beam/main-beam head- load utilised, e.g. when towing a trailer
lamps
BR Rear foglamp
X Start the engine.
X Turn the headlamp range control to the
CN Foglamp (only vehicles with front
position which corresponds to the load in
foglamps).
your vehicle.
Switching on the parking lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
ted. Combination switch
X To switch on the parking lamps: the key
is not in the ignition lock or it is in posi- Turn signals
tion 0.
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
Adjusting the headlamp range (halogen

headlamps)
The headlamp range control allows you to
adjust the cone of light from the headlamps
to suit the vehicle load.
: Main-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
switch briefly to the pressure point in the when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
direction of arrow ; or ?. it controls activation of the main-beam
The corresponding turn signal flashes three headlamps (Y page 131).
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch Headlamp flasher
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
Main-beam headlamps

= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal, left
X To switch on: turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.
= Headlamp flasher X Pull the combination switch in the direction
? Turn signal, left of arrow =.
X To switch on the main-beam head-
lamps: turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine. Hazard warning lamps
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the Ã position, the main-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
and the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the main-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the main-beam head-
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
lamps: move the combination switch back press button :.
to its normal position.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
a turn signal using the combination switch,
ment cluster goes out.
Z
only the turn signal lamp on the corre- Active light function
sponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran airbag is deployed.
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to
a standstill.
The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-
matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of The active light function is a system that
over 10 km/h again after a full brake appli- moves the headlamps according to the steer-
cation. ing movements of the front wheels. In this
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
the ignition is switched off. driving. This allows you to recognise pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Headlamp cleaning system
Cornering light function
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-
ated five times (Y page 137) while the lights
are on and the engine is running. When you
switch off the ignition, the automatic head-
lamp cleaning system is reset and counting is
resumed from 0.
Intelligent Light System

General notes
The Intelligent Light System is a system that The cornering light function improves the illu-
adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit mination of the road over a wide angle in the
the prevailing driving and weather conditions. direction you are turning, enabling better vis-
It offers advanced functions for improved illu- ibility in tight bends, for example. It can only
mination of the road surface, e.g. depending be activated when the dipped-beam head-
on the vehicle speed or weather conditions. lamps are switched on.
The system includes the active light function, Active: if you are driving at speeds below
cornering light function, motorway mode and 40 km/h and switch on the turn signal or turn
extended range foglamps. The system is only the steering wheel.
active when it is dark. Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent 40 km/h or switch off the turn signal or turn
Light System" using the on-board computer the steering wheel to the straight-ahead posi-
(Y page 259). tion.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short Adaptive Highbeam Assist
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Motorway mode
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid
designed to assist driving. The driver is
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, vision and traffic con-
ditions.
The system may be impaired or deactivated:
Rif there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray

Rif the area of the windscreen around the
optical sensor is dirty, misted up or covered
up, e.g. by a sticker
Active: if you are driving at a speed above The system may not recognise the following
110 km/h and do not make any large steering road users:
movements for at least 1000 m or if you are Rroad users that have no lighting, e.g. pedes-
driving at a speed above 130 km/h. trians
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below Rroad users that have poor lighting, e.g.
80 km/h following activation. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is not clearly visi-
Extended range foglamps
ble, e.g. road users behind a crash barrier
Ron rare occasions: road users that have
lights that may be recognised too late or not
at all
The automatic main-beam headlamps will not
be deactivated, or they may be activated
despite road users travelling in front of or
approaching the vehicle.
Thus, you could cause an accident and injure
yourself and others. Always observe traffic
conditions and, if necessary, dip the lights
manually.
The extended range foglamps reduce the
glare experienced by the driver and improve
the illumination of the edge of the carriage-
way.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
70 km/h and you switch on the rear foglamp.
Not active: if, following activation, you are
driving at speeds above 100 km/h or if you
switch off the rear foglamp.
Z
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist

on/off
= Headlamp flasher
? Turn signal, left
You can use this function to set the head- X To activate: activate the Adaptive High-
lamps to change between dipped beam and beam Assist function using the on-board
main beam automatically. The system recog- computer (Y page 260).
nises vehicles with their lights on, either X Turn the light switch to Ã.
approaching from the opposite direction or X Press the combination switch beyond the
travelling in front of your vehicle, and conse- pressure point in the direction of
quently switches the headlamps from main arrow : .
beam to dipped beam. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-
The system automatically adapts the dipped- tion display lights up if it is dark and the
beam headlamp range depending on the dis- light sensor activates the dipped-beam
tance to the other vehicle. Once the system headlamps.
no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- If you are driving at speeds above
tivates the main-beam headlamps. 45 km/h:
The system's optical sensor is located behind the headlamp range is set automatically
the windscreen near the overhead control depending on the distance between the
panel. vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above
55 km/h and no other road users are rec-
ognised:
the main-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below
45 km/h or other road users are recog-
nised or the roads are adequately lit:
the main-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
Interior lighting 133
indicator lamp in the multifunction display ? c Switches the front interior lighting
remains lit. on/off
X To deactivate: move the combination A p Switches the left-hand front reading
switch back to its normal position. lamp on/off
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Headlamps misted up on the inside

The headlamps may mist up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Switch on the lights and drive off.

The level of moisture diminishes, depend-
ing on the length of the journey and the
weather conditions (humidity and temper- Rear-compartment overhead control panel
ature). : p Switches the right-hand reading
If the level of moisture does not diminish: lamp on/off
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified ; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
specialist workshop. on/off
Interior lighting Interior lighting control
Overview of interior lighting General notes

In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except for when the key is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The colour and brightness of the ambient
lighting may be set using the on-board com-
puter (Y page 260).
Front overhead control panel

: u Switches the rear interior lighting
on/off
; | Switches the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p Switches the right-hand front read-
ing lamp on/off
Z
134 Interior lighting
Automatic interior lighting control Manual interior lighting control
Front overhead control panel Front overhead control panel

: u To switch the rear interior lighting : u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off on/off.
; | To switch the automatic interior ; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand reading = p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting ? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off on/off
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off on/off
X To activate/deactivate: press the | X To switch the front interior lighting on/
button. off: press the c button.
When the automatic interior lighting con- X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
trol is activated, the button is flush with the off: press the u button.
overhead control panel. X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
The interior lighting automatically switches press the p button.
on if you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door Crash-responsive emergency lighting
Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting is activated automatically
The interior lighting is activated for a short if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
time when the key is removed from the igni- X To switch off the crash-responsive
tion lock. You can activate this delayed emergency lighting: press the hazard
switch-off using the on-board computer warning lamp button.
(Y page 261). or
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
key.
Replacing bulbs 135
Replacing bulbs bulbs listed (Y page 135). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
Important safety notes qualified specialist workshop.
Xenon bulbs If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
G DANGER Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. If you your bare hands. Even minor contamination
touch the electrical contacts of a xenon bulb, can burn into the glass surface and reduce
you could suffer an electric shock and be seri- the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-
ously or even fatally injured. For this reason, free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
do not remove the cover of xenon bulbs. when fitting.
Do not change the xenon bulbs yourself, but Only use bulbs of the correct type.
have them replaced at a qualified workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult

a qualified specialist workshop.
If your vehicle is equipped with xenon bulbs,
you can recognise this by the following: the Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
cone of light from the xenon bulbs moves vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
from the top to the bottom and back again that these function correctly at all times.
when you start the engine. For this to be Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine.
Overview of bulb replacement – bulbs
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure You can replace the following bulbs. The
that these function correctly at all times. details for the bulb type can be found in the
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. legend.
Other bulbs
G WARNING
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should
therefore allow them to cool down before you
change them. Otherwise, you could be burned
if you touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth-
erwise, they could damage the bulbs, for
example, and injure themselves.
Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Halogen headlamps
Such a bulb may break or even explode and : Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
injure you. ; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Halogen bulbs are pressurised and can = Side lamps/parking lamp: W 5 W
explode when you change them, particularly ? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
if they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are
changing them.
There are bulbs other than the xenon bulbs

that you cannot replace. Replace only the
Z
136 Replacing bulbs
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.

X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
Main-beam headlamps (halogen head-

lamps)/cornering lamps (Intelligent
Light System)
Bi-xenon headlamps
: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
; Infrared light (Night View Assist Plus):

H11 55 W
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
Replacing the front bulbs

Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen
X Open the bonnet.
headlamps)
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
X Open the bonnet.
pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and pull
it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Windscreen wipers 137
Side lamps/parking lamps (halogen X Insert new bulb ; and turn it clockwise.
headlamps) X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
Turn signal lamp (halogen headlamps)

X Open the bonnet.
pull it out. Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
X Pull out bulb holder ;. left-hand headlamp changed at a qualified
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. specialist workshop
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Switch off the lights.
X Insert bulb holder ;. X Open the bonnet.
X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and pull
wise until it engages. it out.
X Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying
slight pressure, and remove it from bulb
Infrared light (Night View Assist Plus)
holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder : and
turn it clockwise.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off
X Switch off the lights. G WARNING
X Open the bonnet. The windscreen will not longer be wiped prop-
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could
pull it out. prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
X Turn bulb ; anti-clockwise and pull it out. tions, thereby causing an accident. Replace
the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring
and autumn.
Z
138 Windscreen wipers
! Do not operate the windscreen wipers X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
when the windscreen is dry, as this could lock.
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
that has collected on the windscreen can sponding position.
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
the windscreen is dry.
wiping frequency is set automatically accord-
If it is necessary to switch on the winding to the intensity of the rain. In the Å
screen wipers in dry weather conditions,
position, the rain sensor is more sensitive
always operate them using washer fluid.
than in the Ä position, causing the wind-
! If the windscreen wipers leave smears on screen wipers to wipe more frequently.
the windscreen after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, this may
be due to wax or other residue. Clean the Switching the rear window wiper on/
windscreen with washer fluid after an auto- off

matic car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windscreen
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windscreen wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could damage the wind-
screen wiper blades or scratch the wind-
screen.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
Combination switch
: è Switch
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
lock.
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
Combination switch to the corresponding position.
1 $ Windscreen wipers off When the rear window wiper is switched on,
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
set to low sensitivity)
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the
windscreen using washer fluid
Windscreen wipers 139
Replacing the wiper blades

G WARNING
The wiper arms could start moving and cause
an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
switched on.
Remove the key from the ignition lock before
replacing the wiper blades.
! Never open the bonnet if a windscreen X Firmly press release knob : and pull the
wiper arm has been folded away from the wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
windscreen.

the direction of the arrow.
Never fold a windscreen wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windscreen/ Fitting the wiper blades
rear window. X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer
Hold the windscreen wiper arm firmly when on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
you change the wiper blade. If you release the opposite direction to the arrow.
the windscreen wiper arm without a wiper The wiper blade audibly engages.
blade and it falls onto the windscreen, the X Make sure that wiper blade is seated cor-
windscreen may be damaged by the force rectly.
of the impact. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have screen.
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop. Replacing the rear window wiper blade
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper
blades, make sure that you touch only the Removing a wiper blade
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. G WARNING
The wiper arm could be set in motion and
Replacing the wiper blades injure you if the windscreen wipers are
switched on.
Removing the wiper blades
Remove the key from the ignition lock before
X Remove the key from the ignition lock or
replacing the wiper blade.
turn the key to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
screen until it engages.
Z
140 Windscreen wipers
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
dow until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
Fitting a wiper blade

X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
dow.
Problems with the windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers are obstructed
X For safety reasons, you should remove the
key from the ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers are inoperative

The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combi-
nation switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
141

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 142
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ..................................................... 145
Adjusting the air vents ..................... 155
Climate control
142 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information interval for replacing the filter, which is

specified in the Service Booklet. As it
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
els, series and optional equipment for your heavy air pollution, the interval may be
vehicle that were available at the time of shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
going to press. National variations are pos- i It is possible that the residual heat func-
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be tion may be activated automatically an hour
equipped with all of the functions descri- after the key has been removed. The vehi-
bed. This is also the case for systems and cle is then ventilated for 30minutes to dry
functions relevant to safety. the air-conditioning system.
Overview of climate control systems

Climate control

G WARNING
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could other-
wise mist up. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
ing an accident.
Climate control regulates the temperature

and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control is only operational when the
engine is running. The system only works
optimally if the side windows and the roof are
closed.
The residual heat function can only be acti-
vated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 150).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the con-
venience opening feature (Y page 96). This
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust and completely filters out
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
this reason, you should always observe the
Overview of climate control systems 143
Control panel for THERMATIC automatic climate control (2-zone)
: Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 149)

; Demists the windscreen (Y page 148)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148)
Climate control
? Display
A Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 146)
B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 145)
C Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 149)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 145)
E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 147)
F Sets the air distribution (Y page 147)
G Sets the airflow (Y page 148)
H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 147)
Information about using THERMATIC otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn

automatic climate control into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
The following contains notes and recommen-
perature settings on the driver's side for
dations on optimum use of THERMATIC auto-
the front-passenger side as well. The indi-
matic climate control.
cator lamp above the á button goes
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
out.
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
ROnly use the demisting function briefly until
the windscreen is clear again.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly,
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours
or when in a tunnel. The windows could
Z
144 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control (3-zone)

Climate control
Front control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic mode (Y page 146)
; Demists the windscreen (Y page 148)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148)
? Display
A Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 149)
B Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 150)
C Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 145)
D Switches the rear window heating on/off (Y page 149)
E Switches climate control on/off (Y page 145)
F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 147)
G Sets climate control to automatic (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE) (Y page 146)
H Sets the airflow (Y page 148)
I Sets the air distribution (Y page 147)
J Sets the temperature, left (Y page 147)
Rear control panel

K To increase the temperature (Y page 147)
L Display
M Increases the airflow (Y page 148)
Operating the climate control system 145
N Reduces the airflow (Y page 148)

O To reduce the temperature (Y page 147)
Information about using off. Only use this setting for a brief period.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate The windows could otherwise mist up.
control i Switch on climate control primarily using
The following contains instructions and rec- the Ã button (Y page 146).
ommendations to enable you to get the most
out of your THERMOTRONIC automatic cli- Switching on/off
mate control.
RActivate climate control using the Ã and
lock.
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above X To switch on: press the Ã button.
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up.
The indicator lamp above the Ã button
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
Climate control
lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set
ñ button to set a climate mode to automatic mode.
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The
or
MEDIUM level is recommended.
X Press the ^ button.
RSet the temperature to 22 †.
The indicator lamp above the ^ button
ROnly use the demisting function briefly until
goes out. The previous settings are reacti-
the windscreen is clear again. vated.
ROnly use the air-recirculation mode briefly,
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odours
The indicator lamp above the ^ button
or when in a tunnel. The windows could
lights up.
otherwise mist up as no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-
Activating/deactivating the cooling
perature settings on the driver's side for
with air dehumidification function
the front-passenger side and the rear com-
partment as well. The indicator lamp above Points to observe before use
the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want G WARNING
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior If the "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
when the ignition is switched off. The resid- tion is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle
ual heat function can only be activated or will not be cooled (during warm weather) or
deactivated with the ignition switched off. dehumidified. The windows could mist up
more quickly. This may prevent you from
observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
Operating the climate control system ing an accident.
Switching climate control on/off The cooling with air dehumidification function
is only available when the engine is running.
Points to observe before use The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
i If climate control is switched off, the air midified according to the temperature selec-
supply and air circulation are also switched ted.
Z
146 Operating the climate control system
Condensation may drip from the underside of X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This lock.
is normal and not a sign that there is a mal- X Set the desired temperature.
function. X To activate: press the Ã button.
i The cooling with air dehumidification The indicator lamp above the Ã button
function uses refrigerant R134a. This lights up. Automatic air distribution and air-
refrigerant does not contain chlorofluoro- flow are activated.
carbons, and therefore does not damage i THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
the ozone layer. trol: when automatic mode is activated, you
can select a climate mode (Y page 146).
Switching on/off X To deactivate: press the air distribution
X To activate: press the ¿ button. button.
The indicator lamp above the ¿ button THERMATIC automatic climate control:
lights up. press button F(Y page 143).
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
Climate control
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-

The indicator lamp above the ¿ button trol: press button I(Y page 144).
goes out. The cooling with air dehumidifi- The indicator lamp above the Ã button
cation function has a delayed switch-off goes out.
feature. or
X Press the airflow button.
Problems with the cooling with air
THERMATIC automatic climate control:
dehumidification function
press button G(Y page 143).
When you press the ¿ button, the indica- THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
tor lamp in the button flashes three times or trol: press button H(Y page 144).
remains off. You can no longer switch on the The indicator lamp above the Ã button
cooling with air dehumidification function. goes out.
Setting the climate mode

Setting climate control to automatic In automatic mode you can select the follow-
mode ing climate modes:
In automatic mode, the set temperature is FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
maintained automatically at a constant level. cooler
The system automatically regulates the tem-
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution. DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less of a draught
Automatic mode will achieve optimal opera-
tion if cooling with air dehumidification is also X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
activated. If desired, cooling with air dehu- lock.
midification can be deactivated. X Press the Ã button.
X Press button G up or down and select the
desired level (Y page 144)
Setting the temperature Only change the temperature setting in

small increments. Start at 22 †.
THERMATIC automatic climate control X To increase/reduce the temperature in
Different temperatures can be set for the the rear compartment using the rear
driver's and front-passenger sides. control panel: press button K or
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition O(Y page 144).
lock. Only change the temperature setting in
X To increase/reduce: press switch E or small increments. Start at 22 †.
H up or down (Y page 143).
Only change the temperature setting in
Setting the air distribution
small increments. Start at 22 †.
Air distribution settings
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate P Directs the airflow through the centre
control and side air vents
Climate control
O Directs the airflow through the foot-
well air vents
S Directs airflow through the centre,
side and footwell air vents (only for
certain countries).
¯ Directs the airflow through the demis-
ter vents
b Directs the airflow through the demis-
ter, centre and side air vents (only for
certain countries).
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control zones a Directs the airflow through the foot-
You can select different temperature settings well and demister vents
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
well as for the rear compartment. airflow is always directed through the side
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition air vents. The side air vents can only be
lock. closed when the controls on the side air
X To increase/reduce the temperature in vents are turned downwards.
the front compartment: press switch F
or J up or down (Y page 144). THERMATIC automatic climate control
Only change the temperature setting in X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
small increments. Start at 22 †. lock.
X To increase/reduce the temperature in X Press switch F up or down repeatedly until
the rear compartment using the front the desired symbol appears in the display
control panel: press the á button. (Y page 143).
The indicator lamp above the á button
goes out.
X Press switch F or J up or down
(Y page 144).
Z
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate THERMATIC automatic climate control: the

control temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side.
lock. THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's
X Press switch I up or down repeatedly until
side is adopted for the front-passenger side
the desired symbol appears in the display and the rear compartment.
(Y page 144).
Demisting the windscreen

Setting the airflow
You can use this function to demist the wind-
THERMATIC automatic climate control screen or to demist the inside of the wind-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition screen and the side windows.
lock. Switch off the "demisting" function as soon
X To increase/reduce: press switch G up as the windscreen is clear again.
Climate control
or down (Y page 143). X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate X To activate: press the ¬ button.
control The indicator lamp above the ¬ button

lights up.
The climate control system switches to the
lock.
following functions:
X To increase/reduce the front-compart-
Rheating with dehumidification on
ment airflow: press switch H up or down
Rhigh airflow (depending on the outside
(Y page 144).
X To increase/reduce the rear airflow:
temperature)
Rhigh temperature (depending on the out-
press switch M or N(Y page 144).
side temperature)
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
Switching the ZONE function on/off front side windows

Rair-recirculation mode off
X To switch on: press the á button.
The indicator lamp above the á button X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
lights up. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
THERMATIC automatic climate control: the goes out. The previous settings are reacti-
temperature setting for the driver's side is vated. The heating with air dehumidifica-
not adopted for the front-passenger side. tion function remains on. Air-recirculation
mode remains deactivated.
trol: the temperature setting for the driver's or
side is not adopted for the front-passenger X Press the Ã button.
side and the rear compartment. The indicator lamp above the ¬ button
X To switch off: press the á button. goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set
The indicator lamp above the á button to automatic mode.
goes out. or
X THERMATIC automatic climate control: Rear window heating

press temperature button E or H up or
down (Y page 143). Switching on/off
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate G WARNING
control: press temperature button F or Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting
J up or down (Y page 144). off. Otherwise, impaired visibility could
or endanger you and others.
X THERMATIC automatic climate control:
press switch G up or down (Y page 143). The rear window heating has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
soon as the window is clear. It otherwise
control: press button H up or down
switches off automatically after several
(Y page 144). minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow heating may switch off.
Demisting the windows
Climate control
Windows misted up on the inside lock.
X Press the ¤ button.
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehu-
midification function. The indicator lamp above the ¤ button
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
lights up or goes out.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
the demisting function (Y page 148).
Problems with the rear window heating
i You should only select this setting until The rear window heating has switched off
the windscreen is clear again. prematurely or cannot be activated.
X Switch off any consumers that are not
Windows misted up on the outside required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
lighting.
X THERMATIC automatic climate control:
When the battery is sufficiently charged,
press switch F up or down (Y page 143)
the rear window heating is activated again
until the P or O symbol appears in automatically.
the display.
X THERMOTRONIC automatic climate
control: press button I up or down Activating/deactivating air-recircula-
(Y page 144) until the P or O symbol tion mode
appears in the display.
i You should only select this setting until G WARNING
the windscreen is clear again. Only switch over to air-recirculation mode
briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
wise, the windows could mist up, thus impair-
ing visibility and endangering yourself and
others. This may prevent you from observing
the traffic conditions, thereby causing an
accident.
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if

unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
Z
from outside. The air already inside the vehi- window and the door frame as the window
cle will then be recirculated. moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, oper-
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the ate the W switch to move the side window
same for all control panels. in the opposite direction.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Make sure that nobody can become trapped
lock. as the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sun-
X To activate: press the g button. roof is opened and closed. If there is a risk of
The indicator lamp above the g button entrapment, operate the 3 switch to move
lights up. the sliding sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof
in the opposite direction.
i In the event of high pollution levels2 or at
high outside temperatures, air-recircula- X Convenience closing feature: press and
tion mode is automatically activated. When hold the g button until the side win-
air-recirculation mode is activated auto- dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
matically, the indicator lamp above the sliding sunroof are closed.
g button does not light up. The indicator lamp above the g button
Climate control
Outside air is added after about lights up. Air-recirculation mode is activa-
30 minutes. ted.
XTo deactivate: press the g button. X Convenience opening feature: press and
The indicator lamp above the g button hold the g button until the side win-
goes out. dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- sliding sunroof are opened. The side win-
matically: dows and the sliding sunroof/panorama
sliding sunroof move back to their original
Rafter approximately five minutes at out- position.
side temperatures below approximately The indicator lamp above the g button
5† goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deacti-
Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-
vated.
ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-
ted i If you open the side windows or the sliding
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out- sunroof/panorama sliding sunroof man-
side temperatures above approximately ually after closing them with the conveni-
5† ence closing feature, they will remain in this
position when opened using the conveni-
ence opening feature.
Convenience opening/closing using
the air-recirculation button
Activating/deactivating the residual
G WARNING heat function
Make sure that nobody can become trapped The residual heat function is only available
between the side window and the door frame with THERMOTRONIC automatic climate con-
as the side windows are opened and closed. trol.
Make sure that all objects and body parts are
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
clear of the side windows when they are being
of the engine to continue heating the station-
opened or closed. You or the objects could be
ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
drawn in or become trapped between the side
2 THERMOTRONIC automatic climate control only.
engine has been switched off. The heating The material could otherwise ignite and set
time depends on the temperature that has the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot
been set for the vehicle interior. accordingly.
X To activate: press the Ì button. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus pro-
The indicator lamp above the Ì button hibited at filling stations or when your vehicle
lights up. is being refuelled. You must therefore switch
i The blower will run at a low speed regard- off the auxiliary heating at filling stations.
less of the airflow setting.
! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-
i If you activate the residual heat function tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you
at high temperatures, only the ventilation have heated or ventilated the vehicle a
will be activated. The blower runs at maximum of two times, drive for a longer
medium speed. distance.
X To deactivate: press the Ì button. i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly
The indicator lamp above the Ì button once a month for about ten minutes.
Climate control
goes out.
The auxiliary heating heats the air in the
i It is possible that the residual heat func- passenger compartment to the selected tem-
tion may be activated automatically an hour perature. It does not use the heat of the run-
after the key has been removed. The vehi- ning engine to do this. The auxiliary heating
cle is then ventilated for 30minutes to dry is operated directly using the vehicle's fuel.
the air-conditioning system. For this reason, the tank content must be at
least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
auxiliary heating functions.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati-
Rwhen the ignition is switched on cally adjusts to changes in temperature and
Rif the battery voltage drops weather conditions. For this reason, the aux-
iliary heating could switch from ventilation
mode to heating mode or from heating mode
Auxiliary heating to ventilation mode.
The auxiliary heating switches off automati-
cally after 50 minutes. This time limit can be
G WARNING altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist
Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili- workshop.
ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should cool the vehicle interior to a temperature
therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in lower than the outside temperature.
confined spaces without an extraction sys-
tem, e.g. a garage. Before switching on
G WARNING lock.
When operating the auxiliary heating parts of X Set the temperature.
the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that
the exhaust system does not under any cir- The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
cumstances come into contact with easily vated even when climate control is set to
ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels. manual. Optimum comfort can be attained
Z
when the system is set to automatic mode. Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-
Set the temperature to 22 †. lation on/off using the remote control
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
vated or deactivated using the remote control Points to observe before use
or the button on the centre console. Your vehicle comes with one remote control.
The on-board computer can be used to spec- You may use two additional remote controls
ify up to three departure times, one of which for your vehicle. For more information, please
may be preselected (Y page 262). contact a qualified specialist workshop.
The remote control has a maximum range of
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti- approximately 300 metres. This range is
lation on/off using the centre console reduced by:
button Rsources of radio interference
Rsolid objects between the remote control
The colours of the indicator lamps on the but-
ton have the following meanings: and the vehicle
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura-
Blue Auxiliary ventilation switched on
Climate control
ble position in relation to the vehicle

Red Auxiliary heating switched on Rtransmitting from an enclosed space
Yellow Departure time preselected
(Y page 262) i The optimum range can be achieved if you
hold the remote control vertically, pointing
upwards when you press one of the but-
tons.
i A battery symbol appears in the display
when the battery in the remote control is
low. Replace the remote control battery
(Y page 154).
Switching the auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion on/off
Switch in the centre console

X To switch the auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion on: press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : lights up.
X To switch the auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion off: press button :.
The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : goes out.
Auxiliary heating remote control
: Display
; . To check the status/set the depar-
ture time
= ^ To switch off the auxiliary heating/
ventilation
? u To switch on the auxiliary heating/ A departure time has

ventilation been activated. The aux-
A , To check the status/set the depar- iliary ventilation is cur-
ture time rently selected. The
X To switch on: press the u button. departure time appears
in the display.
ON is shown in the remote control display.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button. A departure time has
OFF is shown in the remote control display. been activated. The aux-
iliary heating is currently
Checking the status of the auxiliary heat- selected. The departure
ing/ventilation time appears in the dis-
X Press the , or . button. play.
The following messages may appear in the Setting the departure time
display: X Press the , or . button repeatedly
Climate control
Display Meaning until the time to be changed appears in the
display.
The auxiliary heating/ X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
ventilation is switched neously.
off. The Î symbol in the remote control dis-
The auxiliary ventilation play flashes.
is switched on. The num- X Press the , or . button to set the
ber in the display shows desired departure time.
the remaining time (in i The longer you press the , or .
minutes) for the auxiliary button, the faster the time changes.
ventilation.
X Press the u and ^ buttons simulta-
The auxiliary heating is neously.
switched on. The number The new departure time is stored.
in the display shows the
remaining time (in Activating the set departure time
minutes) for the auxiliary X Press the , or . button repeatedly
heating. until the desired departure time appears in
A departure time has the display.
been activated. The X Press the u button.
departure time appears The Í symbol and the departure time
in the display. appear in the display.
Z
Deactivating a set departure time

X Press the , or . button.
The status of the auxiliary heating is shown
in the display.
X Press the . button.
The first departure time stored appears in
the display.
X Press the ^ button.
The display message OFF appears in the
display.
One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is
Replacing the remote control battery required.
X Prise apart the side arms of battery
G WARNING cover ; and pull off battery cover ;.
Batteries contain poisonous substances.
X Remove old battery :.
Climate control
Swallowing/ingesting batteries can result in

X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity
serious personal injury or death.
signs on the back of the remote control
Always keep batteries away from children. If
when doing so.
a battery is swallowed, seek immediate med-
X Slide battery cover ; back onto the
ical attention.
remote control.
H Environmental note X Use the remote control to check the vehi-
Batteries contain pollutants. cle's auxiliary heating functions.

It is illegal to dispose of them
with the household rubbish.
They must be collected sep-
arately and disposed of in an
environmentally responsible
recycling system.
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or to a col-
ies.
Adjusting the air vents 155
Problems with the auxiliary heating/ventilation
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is

faulty.
X Charge the starter battery.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
$ The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle

is faulty.
FAIL
X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if
necessary.
Climate control
X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off
using the remote control.
© There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heating
is faulty.
FAIL
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating using
the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Adjusting the air vents In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Important safety notes please observe the following notes:
G WARNING Rkeep the air inlet between the windscreen
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air and the bonnet free of blockages, such as
vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to ice, snow or leaves.
bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the Rnever cover the vents or ventilation grilles
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air in the vehicle interior.
outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away
to a different area of the vehicle interior.
Z
156 Adjusting the air vents
Setting the centre air vents midification" function. Otherwise, temper-

ature-sensitive items stored in the glove
compartment could be damaged.
: Centre air vent, left

; Centre air vent, right
: Air vent thumbwheel
= Centre vent thumbwheel, right
; Air vent
Climate control
? Centre vent thumbwheel, left

When automatic climate control is activated,
X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = the glove compartment can be ventilated, for
and ? up or down. instance to cool its contents. The level of air-
flow depends on the airflow and air distribu-
tion settings.
Setting the side air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or anti-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the centre vents in the rear com-
partment
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or

down.
i Side window demister vent : is only
open when side air vent ; is open.
Setting the glove compartment air

vent : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
! Close the air vent when heating the vehi- ; Rear-compartment air vent, right
cle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
Adjusting the air vents 157
= Rear control unit, only with

trol
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
Setting the rear-compartment side air

vents
Climate control
: Rear-compartment side air vent
; Thumbwheel for rear-compartment side
air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; to the
left or right.
Z
158
159

Running-in notes ............................... 160
Driving ............................................... 160
Manual transmission ........................ 169
Driving and parking

Automatic transmission ................... 170
Refuelling ........................................... 179
Parking ............................................... 183
Driving tips ........................................ 185
Driving systems ................................ 189
Towing a trailer ................................. 234
160 Driving
Useful information After 1500 km, you may gradually accelerate

the vehicle to full road and engine speeds.
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Additional running-in notes for AMG vehicles:
els, series and optional equipment for your RDo not drive at speeds above 140 km/h for
vehicle that were available at the time of the first 1500 km.
Driving and parking
going to press. National variations are pos- ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.
bed. This is also the case for systems and i You should also observe these notes on
functions relevant to safety. running in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
AMG vehicles with rear axle differen-
tial lock
Running-in notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
Important safety notes differential on the rear axle. Change the oil
New and replaced brake pads and discs only after a running-in period of 3000 km to
reach their optimum braking effect after sev- improve protection of the rear axle differen-
eral hundred kilometres of driving. Compen- tial. This oil change will lengthen the service
sate for this by applying greater force to the life of the differential. Have the oil change
brake pedal. carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
The first 1,500 km Driving

If you treat the engine with sufficient care Important safety notes
from the very start, you will be rewarded with
excellent performance for the remainder of G WARNING
the engine's life. Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
RDrive
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
at varying vehicle speeds and engine
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
speeds for the first 1,500 km.
is jeopardised. There is a risk of an accident.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
RChange gear in good time, before the rev
the driver's footwell. Fit the floormats
counter needle is Ô of the way to the red securely and as specified in order to ensure
area of the rev counter. sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order loose floormats.
to brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: G WARNING
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- of the pedals, e.g.:
down). Rshoes with thick soles
RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be Rshoes with high heels
engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when Rslippers
driving in mountainous terrain.
Driving 161
There is a risk of an accident. Key positions

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
Key
usage of the pedals.
G WARNING
Driving and parking

If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
g To remove the key
G WARNING
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
If the parking brake has not been fully as the windscreen wipers
released when driving, the parking brake can:
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
Roverheat and cause a fire and drive position
Rlose its hold function. 3 To start the engine
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
i If the key does not belong to the vehicle,
the parking brake fully before driving off.
it can still be turned in the ignition lock.
However, the ignition will not be switched
G WARNING
on. The engine cannot be started.
Vehicles with HYBRID: ensure that you read
the "HYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise
KEYLESS-GO
fail to recognise dangers.
General notes
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together
the engine's full performance until it has
with:
reached operating temperature.
- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
Only set the automatic transmission to the
or another key
respective drive positions when the vehicle
- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film
is stationary.
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery in metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the This can affect the functionality of KEY-
drive train. LESS-GO.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a key featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO
atures (below +20 †), the maximum
start function and a detachable Start/Stop
engine speed is restricted in order to pro-
button.
tect the engine. To protect the engine and
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
driving at full throttle when the engine is ignition lock and the key must be in the vehi-
cold. cle.
Z
162 Driving
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times Removing the Start/Stop button
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
Driving and parking
If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition

lock ;.
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-
mal using the key.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle.
Switching on the power supply
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
into ignition lock ;, the system needs
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
approximately two seconds recognition
key being removed from the ignition.
time. You can then use Start/Stop but-
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
ton :.
The power supply is switched on. You can
now activate the windscreen wipers, for
example. Starting the engine
i If you then open the driver's door when in
this position, the power supply is deactiva- Important safety notes
ted. G WARNING
Switching on the ignition Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
XPosition 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop but- gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
ton : twice. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
The ignition is switched on. is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
i The ignition is switched off if: the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Rthe driver's door is open and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when in this position. when starting the engine.
General notes
i Vehicles with a petrol engine: the cat-
alytic converter is preheated for up to
Driving 163
30seconds after a cold start. The sound of Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
the engine may change during this time.
G WARNING
Manual transmission Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEY-
LESS-GO key. For this reason, children should
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Driving and parking

never be left unsupervised in the vehicle.
depressed. Always take the key with you when leaving the
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a
X Shift to neutral N. short time.
i You can only start the engine when the i The Start/Stop button can be used to
clutch pedal is fully depressed. start the vehicle manually without inserting
the key into the ignition lock. The key must
Automatic transmission be in the vehicle and the Start/Stop button
must be inserted in the ignition lock. This
X Shift the transmission to position P.
mode for starting the engine operates inde-
The transmission position display in the
pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic
multifunction display shows P.
engine start function.
i You can also start the engine when the X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
transmission is in position N. depressed.
X To start a petrol engine: press the Start/
Starting procedure with the key Stop button (Y page 161) once.
i To start the engine using the key instead The engine starts.
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/
out of the ignition lock. Stop button (Y page 161) once.
Preglow is activated and the engine starts.
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to
position 3 in the ignition lock
(Y page 161) and release it as soon as the
engine is running. Pulling away
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to Manual transmission
position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 161). ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin-
The % preglow indicator lamp in the ning the wheels. Otherwise, you could dam-
instrument cluster lights up. age the vehicle.
X When the % erlischt, den Schlüssel auf X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Stellung 3(Y page 161) and release it as depressed.
soon as the engine is running. X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.
i You can start the engine without preglow
X Release the parking brake (Y page 184).
if the engine is warm.
X Release the brake pedal.
i Vehicles with automatic transmis- X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently
sion: you can also use the touch-start func- depress the accelerator pedal.
tion. To do this, turn the key to position
3(Y page 161) and release it immediately. i Follow the shift recommendations in the
The engine then starts automatically. multifunction display for an economical
driving style (Y page 170).
Z
164 Driving
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Hill start assist
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down. G WARNING
You can open the doors from the inside at After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
any time. ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
Driving and parking
There is a risk of an accident and injury.

You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
ing feature (Y page 261). Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
Automatic transmission
assist.
G WARNING
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
and you engage transmission position D or
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
is a risk of an accident.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
When engaging transmission position D or R, from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do and depress it before the vehicle begins to
not simultaneously accelerate. roll.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed. The vehicle is then held for about a second.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Pull away.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 184). Hill start assist will not function if:
X Release the brake pedal. Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. downhill gradient.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
the transmission is in position N.
from position P to the desired position if
Rthe parking brake is applied.
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
RESP® is malfunctioning.
the selector lever lock/parking lock
released
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have ECO start/stop function
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down. Important safety notes
You can open the doors from the inside at
G WARNING
any time.
If the engine is switched off automatically and
You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
ing feature (Y page 261).
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine There is a risk of accident and injury.
speeds after a cold start. This helps the If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
catalytic converter to reach its operating the ignition and secure the vehicle against
temperature more quickly. rolling away.
Driving 165
General notes Deactivating/activating the ECO start/

stop function
i Hybrid vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function cannot be deactivated.
The ECO start/stop function switches the
Driving and parking

engine off automatically if the vehicle stops
moving.
When pulling away again, the engine starts
automatically. The ECO start/stop function
thereby helps you to reduce the fuel con-
sumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Every time you switch on the engine using the
key or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/
stop function is activated. ECO button
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function X To switch off (except AMG vehicles):
is only available in drive program C. press button :.
The system is operational when the ¤ Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
symbol is shown in green in the multifunction ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
display. out.
AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi- X To switch on (except AMG vehicles):
function display additionally shows the Stop/ press button :.
Start active message. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
If all conditions for automatic engine switch- for automatic engine switch-off
off have not been met (Y page 166), the (Y page 166) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
¤ symbol is shown in yellow. is shown in green in the multifunction dis-
AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi- play.
function display additionally shows the Stop/ If not all conditions for automatic engine
Start inactive message. switch-off (Y page 166) are fulfilled, the
If the ECO start/stop function has been man- ¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the mul-
ually deactivated (Y page 165) or a malfunc- tifunction display. If this is the case, the
tion has caused the system to be deactivated, ECO start/stop function is not available.
the ¤ symbol is not displayed. X To switch off (AMG vehicles): press but-
AMG vehicles: in the AMG menu on the mul- ton : in drive program C.
tifunction display, the Stop/Start active or
or Stop/Start inactive display message X Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
disappears.
(Y page 175).
If the engine is switched off and the ¤ Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
symbol is shown in green in the multifunction ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
display, the engine has been switched off out.
automatically. However, all vehicle systems
remain active. The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start
inactive message in the AMG menu in the
multifunction display goes out.
Z
166 Driving
X To switch on (AMG vehicles): press but- Rthe system detects that the windscreen is
ton :. not misted up when the air-conditioning
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive pro- system is switched on.
gram S, S+ or M is active, the automatic Rthe bonnet is closed.
transmission switches to drive program C. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
Driving and parking
If all conditions for automatic engine seat belt is fastened.

switch-off (Y page 166) are fulfilled, the If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
¤ symbol is shown in green in the mul- have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
tifunction display. In addition, the Stop/ be shown in yellow.
Start active message is shown in the AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the multi-
AMG menu in the multifunction display. function display additionally shows the Stop/
If conditions for automatic engine switch- Start inactive message.
off have not been fulfilled, the (Y page 166)
¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
is the case, the ECO start/stop function is the ECO start/stop function is available
not available. In addition, the Stop/Start again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
inactive message is shown in the AMG green in the multifunction display.
menu in the multifunction display. i All vehicles (apart from AMG vehi-
cles): Automatic engine switch-off can
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
take place a maximum of four times con-
stop function has been deactivated man- secutively (initial stop then repeated three
ually or as the result of a malfunction. The times). The ¤ symbol is shown in yellow
engine will then not be switched off auto-
in the multifunction display after the engine
matically when the vehicle stops.
has been started automatically for the
i Every time you switch on the engine using fourth time. The automatic engine stop is
the key or the Start/Stop button, the ECO available again once when the ¤ symbol
start/stop function is activated. is shown in green in the multifunction dis-
play.
Automatic engine switch-off i AMG vehicles: times which the engine
Method of operation can be automatically switched off.
The ECO start/stop function is operational i During automatic engine switch-off, the
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in climate control system only operates at a
the multifunction display, if: reduced capacity. If you require full climate
Rthe
control capacity, the ECO start/stop func-
indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
tion can be deactivated by pressing the
green.
ECO button (Y page 165).
Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Rthe outside temperature is within the com-
fort range.
Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-
ature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Driving 167
Vehicles with manual transmission The engine is started automatically if:

Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
Ryou fully depress the clutch pedal.
Driving and parking

Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(AMG vehicles).
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
driver's door.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Rthe brake system requires this.
The ECO start/stop function switches off the Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
engine automatically at low speeds. ates from the set range.
X Brake the vehicle until it comes to a stand- Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
still. screen when the air-conditioning system is
X Engage neutral N(Y page 170) (follow switched on.
gearshift instruction : to engage neutral Rthe battery's charge status is too low.
N, if necessary).
Vehicles with automatic transmission
X Release the clutch pedal.
The engine is switched off automatically. The engine is started automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
Vehicles with automatic transmission by pressing the ECO button.
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in trans- Ryou release the brakes when in transmis-
mission position D or N and the brake sion position D or N, when the HOLD func-
remains depressed, the ECO start/stop function is not active.
tion switches off the engine automatically. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
i You can also activate the HOLD function Ryou engage reverse gear R.
when the vehicle is stationary if the engine Ryou move the transmission out of position
has been switched off automatically. It is P.
then not necessary to continue applying Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M
the brakes during the automatic stop
(AMG vehicles).
phase. When you depress the accelerator
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
pedal, the engine starts automatically and
the braking effect of the HOLD function is driver's door.
deactivated. Depress the accelerator pedal Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
gently, as the engine must be started first. Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
Automatic engine start ates from the set range.
Rthe system detects moisture on the wind-
Vehicles with manual transmission
screen when the air-conditioning system is
! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal switched on.
is depressed. Rthe battery's charge status is too low.
i Shifting the transmission to position P

does not start the engine.
Z
168 Driving
Problems with the engine

The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
start.
Driving and parking
X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 205) or DISTRONIC

PLUS (Y page 203).
X Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.

start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the key in the
ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 162). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank is empty.

start. The starter motor X Refuel the vehicle.
can be heard. The
reserve fuel warning
lamp is lit and the fuel
gauge display shows 0.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 370).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

Manual transmission 169

Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
engine: component of the engine management system.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Driving and parking

ning smoothly and is Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
misfiring. verter and damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture display is showing is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
more than 120 †. The X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
coolant warning lamp to cool down.
may also be lit and a X Check the coolant level (Y page 348). Observe the warning
warning tone may
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
sound.
If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
X If the coolant temperature is below 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
Manual transmission to lose control of your vehicle and cause an

accident.
G WARNING
The movement of the pedals must not be Gear lever
impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal
in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor- is depressed.
mats or carpets are correctly secured and
that there is sufficient clearance for the ped- ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,
als. you should always push the gear lever all
Do not place several floormats on top of one
the way to the right. Otherwise, you could
another.
shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear
and damage the transmission.
G WARNING If you shift down at too high a speed (trans-
Do not change down for additional engine
mission braking), this can cause the engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
to overrev, leading to engine damage.
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and Do not use the clutch bite point to keep the
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you vehicle stationary on uphill gradients.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
clutch.
Z
170 Automatic transmission
! On long and steep downhill gradients, Engaging reverse gear

especially if the vehicle is laden or towing
a trailer, you must shift into gear 1, 2 or 3 ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the
in good time. This uses the engine's braking vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could
effect. This relieves the load on the brake damage the transmission.
Driving and parking
system and prevents the brakes from over- X Move the gear lever firmly to the left
heating and wearing too quickly. beyond the point of resistance and then
forwards.
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-
able when reverse gear is engaged.
Further information on the ECO start/stop
function (Y page 165).
Gearshift recommendation
Gear lever
Shifting to neutral (N)
X Shift gear according to gearshift recom-

mendation : shown in the multifunction
display of the instrument cluster.
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
X Depress the clutch pedal fully. display.
X Move the gear lever to position N :.
Automatic transmission
Neutral N with ECO start/stop func-
tion activated
The engine is switched off, if: G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Rin neutral N, the vehicle speed is below a
and you engage transmission position D or
certain threshold and
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
Rthe clutch pedal is not depressed.
For further information on the ECO start/stop
function, see (Y page 165).
Automatic transmission 171
When engaging transmission position D or R, Transmission position and drive pro-

always firmly depress the brake pedal and do gram display
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
Driving and parking

Vehicles with HYBRID: ensure that you read
the "HYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise
Example: transmission position display and drive

Selector lever program display
: Transmission position display
Overview of transmission positions ; Drive program display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions
Selector lever in standard vehicles

j Park position with selector lever lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
P Park position with parking lock

R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current trans-
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button mission position P, R, N or D appears in the
j Park position with parking lock transmission position display
(Y page 171) in the multifunction display.
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Z
Transmission position and drive pro- i Depress the brake and push the DIRECT
gram display SELECT lever up or down to disengage the
parking lock. The transmission is in neutral
! If the transmission position display in the
N.
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether If you want to shift from park position P
Driving and parking
the desired transmission position is directly to R or D:

engaged. Ideally, you should select trans- Rdepress the brake and
mission position D and drive program E or Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
S. Do not restrict the shift range. down past the first point of resistance.
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
: Transmission position display
i The ECO start/stop function is not avail-
; Drive program display
able when reverse gear is engaged.
The current transmission position and drive For further information on the ECO start/
program appear in the multifunction display. stop function, see (Y page 165).
i The arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which transmis- Neutral N with ECO start/stop function
sion positions you can change using the activated
DIRECT SELECT lever. The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle is
Engaging park position P stationary if the vehicle is braked to a stand-
! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift still in neutral N.
the automatic transmission directly from For further information on the ECO start/stop
D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Other- function, see (Y page 164).
wise, the automatic transmission could be
damaged. Shifting to neutral (N)
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc- X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
tion of arrow P. to the first point of resistance.
i The automatic transmission shifts auto-
matically into park position P if you: Drive position D with ECO start/stop
function activated
Ropen the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary with the transmission in The ECO start/stop function switches the
position D or R engine off automatically when the vehicle is
Ropen the driver's door when driving at braked to a standstill in transmission posi-
very low speed with the transmission in tion D.
position D or R For further information on the ECO start/stop
This function depends on the date of man- function, see (Y page 164).
ufacture of your vehicle.
Engaging drive position D A Neutral

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past Do not shift the transmission to N
the first point of resistance. while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
Driving and parking

Transmission positions Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
B Park position push it or tow it.
This prevents the vehicle from roll- If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
ing away when stopped. Do not only shift the transmission to posi-
shift the transmission into position tion N if the vehicle is in danger of
P(Y page 183) unless the vehicle skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
is stationary.
Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT
Standard vehicles with a selec- lever: if you switch off the engine
tor lever: you can only remove the using the key or the Start/Stop
key if the transmission is in posi- button, the automatic transmission
tion P. If the key is removed from shifts to neutral N automatically.
the ignition lock, the selector lever
is locked. ! Rolling in neutral N can lead to
Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT damage to the transmission.
lever: the automatic transmission 7 Drive
shifts to P automatically if you: The automatic transmission
Rremove the key changes gear automatically. All
Rswitch off the engine when in R forward gears are available.
or D and open one of the front
doors
Changing gear
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
when the vehicle is stationary. vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. Gearshifting is deter-
mined by:
Ra shift range restriction, if selected
Rthe selected drive program
E/S, E/S/M or, on AMG vehicles,
C/S/S+/M (Y page 174)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Z
Driving tips Program selector button

Accelerator pedal position General notes
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Driving and parking
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts

Rmore throttle: late upshifts
AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch func-
tion is active regardless of the currently selec-
ted drive program. The double-clutch function
reduces load change reactions and is condu-
Example: program selector button
cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-
erated by the double-clutch function depends X Press program selector button : repeat-
on the drive program selected. edly until the letter for the desired gearshift
program appears in the multifunction dis-
Kickdown play.
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving character-
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the istics.
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear E Economy Comfortable, economical
depending on the engine speed. driving
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
S Sport Sporty driving style
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up. M Manual Manual gearshifting
Towing a trailer i For further information on the automatic

drive program, see (Y page 175).
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed
range on uphill gradients. i The automatic transmission switches to
X Shift down to shift range 3 or automatic drive program E each time the
2(Y page 176) depending on the uphill or engine is started.
downhill gradient, even if cruise control,
DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC is acti-
vated.
AMG vehicles Steering wheel gearshift paddles
Driving and parking

Drive program selector with manual drive program : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle
X Turn drive program selector : until the ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
desired drive program appears in the mul- dle
tifunction display in the speedometer. In the automatic drive program, you can
The drive program indicator on drive pro- restrict or derestrict the shift range by using
gram selector : lights up in red. the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the
selector lever (Y page 176).
C Controlled Comfortable, economical
Efficiency driving In the manual drive program, you can change
gear using the steering wheel gearshift pad-
S Sport Sporty driving style dles or the selector lever (Y page 177).
S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving i You can only change gear with the steer-
style ing wheel gearshift paddles when the trans-
mission is in position D.
M Manual Manual gearshifting
RS RACE Optimal vehicle accelera-
START tion from a standstill Automatic drive program
Drive program E (drive program C on AMG
i For further information on the automatic vehicles) is characterised by the following:
drive program, see (Y page 175). Rcomfort-oriented engine settings
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
i The automatic transmission switches to
automatic drive program C each time the the automatic transmission shifting up
engine is started. sooner
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-
forward and reverse gears, unless the
ing. For further information on RACE accelerator pedal is depressed fully
START, see (Y page 207).
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin
Z
Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehi- Restricting the shift range
cles, drive programs S and S+) is character-
X Press the selector lever to the left towards
ised by the following:
D–.
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission or
settings
Driving and parking
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift

Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
paddle.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up The automatic transmission shifts down
later one gear and restricts the shift range to the
Ras a result of the later automatic transmis- relevant gear.
sion shift points, the fuel consumption pos-
sibly being higher. i If the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
Shift ranges damage by not shifting down.
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
Introduction
range is reached and you continue to accel-
i On AMG vehicles and vehicles with erate, the automatic transmission shifts up,
steering wheel gearshift paddles, you even if the shift range is restricted. This
can restrict or derestrict the shift range prevents the engine from overrevving.
using the steering wheel gearshift paddles.
On standard vehicles with a selector Extending the shift range
lever, you can also restrict or derestrict the
X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
shift range using the selector lever.
towards D+.
When the automatic transmission is in posi- or
tion D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
the shift range (Y page 176).
paddle.
The shift range selected is shown in the mul- The shift range is derestricted.
tifunction display. The automatic transmis-
sion shifts only as far as the selected gear.
Clearing the shift range restriction
Shift range:
X Press and hold the selector lever towards
= To use the engine's braking effect D+ until D is shown once more in the mul-
5 To use the braking effect of the tifunction display.
engine on downhill gradients and or
for driving: X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
Ron steep mountain roads gearshift paddle until D is shown again in
the multifunction display.
Rin mountainous terrain The automatic transmission shifts from the
Rin arduous conditions
current shift range directly to D.
4 To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
gradients and on long downhill
stretches
Selecting the ideal shift range the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine
from overrevving. You must make sure that
X Press the selector lever to the left towards
the engine speed does not reach the red
D– and hold it in position.
area of the rev counter. Otherwise, there is
or a risk of engine damage.
Driving and parking

X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
paddle and hold it in position.
towards D+.
The automatic transmission shifts to the
gear which allows optimum acceleration or
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
transmission shifts down one or more paddle.
gears. The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
AMG vehicles
Manual drive program X If the colour in the multifunction display in
Activating the manual drive program the speedometer changes to red and the
UP display message is shown, shift up a
X Press the program selector button gear.
(Y page 174) repeatedly until M appears in
the multifunction display. Downshifting
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program X Briefly press the selector lever to the left
selector (Y page 175) until M appears in the
towards D–.
multifunction display.
The indicator M on the drive program selec- or
tor lights up in red. X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle.
AMG vehicles and vehicles with a DIRECT
The automatic transmission shifts down to
SELECT lever: you can select manual drive
the next gear.
program M using the program selector or the
drive program selector button. In manual i If you desire maximum acceleration, push
drive program M, you can change gear using the selector lever to the left or pull and hold
the steering wheel gearshift paddles if the the left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
transmission is in position D. dle until the transmission shifts to the opti-
Standard vehicles with a selector lever: mal gear for the current speed.
you can select manual drive program M using
the program selector button. If the transmis- Kickdown
sion is in position D, you can change gear
You can also use kickdown for maximum
using the steering wheel gearshift paddles or
acceleration in manual drive program M.
the selector lever in manual drive program
M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
Upshifting The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
! In manual gearshift program M, the auto-
matic transmission does not shift up auto- i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use
matically even when the engine limiting kickdown in manual drive program M.
speed for the current gear is reached.
When the engine limiting speed is reached,
Z
Switching off the manual drive program

X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) with
a selector lever and vehicles with a
DIRECT SELECT lever: press the program
selector button (Y page 174) repeatedly
Driving and parking
until E or S appears in the multifunction

display.
X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
selector (Y page 175) until C, S or S+
Refuelling 179
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
Driving and parking

shop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Releasing the parking lock manually cloth) from the right-hand edge. Pull selec-
tor lever gaiter : up and out.
X Press release button ; down and simul-
taneously move the selector lever out of
position P.
The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible
to release the selector lever lock manually to
move it out of position P. This occurs if the
vehicle is towed away, for example.
i The following description does not apply

to vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever and Refuelling
AMG vehicles.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Prise out selector lever gaiter : with a flat, G WARNING
blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are therefore prohibited when
handling fuels.
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating
before refuelling.
Z
180 Refuelling
G WARNING Refuelling
Avoid contact with fuels.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
It is hazardous to your health if your skin
comes into direct contact with fuels or you
breathe in fuel vapours.
Driving and parking
G WARNING
Do not use petrol to refuel a diesel tank. Never
mix diesel with petrol. Doing so could damage
the fuel system and the engine. The vehicle
could also catch fire.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a

diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
: To open the fuel filler flap
vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage ; To insert the fuel filler cap
to the fuel system and the engine. = Tyre pressure table
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci- ? Fuel type to be refuelled

dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other- The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify matically when you open or close the vehicle
a qualified specialist workshop and have with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com- The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
pletely. 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the next to the filling pump indicates the side of
fuel system. the vehicle.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted Opening
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork. X Switch off the engine.
! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
can. The fuel lines and/or the diesel injec- X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
tion system could otherwise be blocked by This corresponds to key position 0: "key
particles from the fuel can. removed".
Further information on fuel and on fuel grades The driver's door can be closed again.
can be found in the "Fuel" section X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
(Y page 436). arrow :.

The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
Refuelling 181
X Saloon: insert the fuel filler cap into the X Pull the emergency release in the direction
bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. of arrow ;.
or The fuel filler flap is released.
X Estate: insert the fuel filler cap into the X Open the fuel filler flap.
recesses in the fuel filler flap hinge arm X Estate: open the tailgate.
Driving and parking

horizontally from above.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Closing
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Press the fuel filler flap closed until it
X Fold down the trim.
X Pull emergency release : in the direction
engages audibly.
of the arrow.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the The fuel filler flap is released.
vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the X Open the fuel filler flap.
central locking prevents the fuel filler flap
from closing.
Fuel filler flap emergency release

X Saloon: open the boot lid.
X Slide the luggage net down.

X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 360).
X Detach the emergency release from
retainer :.
Z
182 Refuelling
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.
Driving and parking
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and
remove it (Y page 161).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run com-
start. pletely dry.
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5 litres of diesel.
X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 161).
X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs
smoothly.
or
X Start the engine using the touch-start function. To do this, turn
the key to position 3 in the ignition lock and then release it
immediately (Y page 161).
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds
(Y page 161).
X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until
it runs smoothly.
or
X Start the engine again via the touch-start function.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:

Parking 183

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
not be opened. or
The key battery is discharged.
Driving and parking

X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 84).
X Open the boot lid or the tailgate.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 181).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
Parking G WARNING
If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by,
G WARNING for example:
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass Rreleasing the parking brake
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to Rshifting an automatic transmission out of
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they parking position P
could ignite. There is a risk of fire. Rshifting a manual transmission into neutral
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Rstarting the engine
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to They could also operate vehicle equipment.
park on dry grassland or harvested grain There is a risk of an accident and injury.
fields. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave
G WARNING children unattended in the vehicle.
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to
the vehicle or damage to the drive train.
for example, the power steering and the brake To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
boosting effect. You will require considerably rolling away unintentionally:
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Rthe parking brake must be applied.
of an accident. Ron vehicles with manual transmission,
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. engage first gear or reverse gear.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission must be in position P and
the key must be removed from the ignition
lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the kerb.
Z
184 Parking
Switching off the engine matic transmission remains in N even if a

door is opened.
Vehicles with manual transmission Using KEYLESS-GO
X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 161).
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition The engine stops and all the indicator
Driving and parking
lock and remove it. lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

The immobiliser is activated. X Firmly depress the parking brake.
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
i Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever
and AMG vehicles: if you switch off the
Vehicles with automatic transmission engine using the Start/Stop button, the
automatic transmission shifts to N auto-
X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift
matically. If you then open one of the front
the transmission to position P.
doors, the automatic transmission shifts to
P.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for about three sec-
onds. This function operates independently
of the ECO start/stop automatic engine
switch-off function.
Parking brake
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button
G WARNING
X AMG vehicles: press P button :. If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
Using the key brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. This increa-
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition ses the risk of skidding and an accident.
lock and remove it.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
The immobiliser is activated.
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles) wheels lock, release the parking brake until
with a selector lever: you can only remove the wheels begin turning again.
the key if the transmission is in position P.
i Vehicles with a DIRECT SELECT lever G WARNING
and AMG vehicles: if you switch off the If you leave children unattended in the vehi-
engine with the transmission in position R cle, they could set the vehicle in motion by,
or D, the automatic transmission shifts to for example:
N automatically. Rreleasing the parking brake
If you then open one of the front doors or Rshifting an automatic transmission out of
remove the key from the ignition, the auto- parking position P
matic transmission shifts to P. Rshifting a manual transmission into neutral
If you shift the automatic transmission to Rstarting the engine
N before switching off the engine, the auto-
Driving tips 185
They could also operate vehicle equipment. Driving tips

There is a risk of an accident and injury.
General notes
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key
with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave G WARNING
children unattended in the vehicle. If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Driving and parking

for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
ECO display
When you apply the parking brake to brake

the vehicle, the brake lamps do not light up.
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
The J indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
ECO display (example)
keep it depressed.
X Pull release handle :. The ECO display gives you information on how
The J indicator lamp in the instrument economical your driving style is. The ECO dis-
cluster goes out. play assists you in achieving the optimum
driving style in terms of consumption, taking
the actual and selected conditions into con-
sideration. Your driving style can significantly
Parking up the vehicle influence the vehicle's consumption.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer The ECO display consists of three bars:
than four weeks, the battery may be damaged
RAcceleration
by exhaustive discharging.
RConstant
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
RCoasting
than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer dam-
age as a result of lack of use. The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the average
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and
value commence with a value of 50%. A higher
seek advice.
percentage indicates a more economical driv-
i You can obtain information about trickle ing style.
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
The ECO display provides no information on
shop.
the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percent-
age value of the ECO display does not corre-
spond to a fixed consumption figure in
l/100km.
Z
186 Driving tips
Apart from driving style, consumption is i An economical driving style depends in

dependent on many factors such as: particular on driving at moderate speeds.
Rload Achieving a higher value in the categories
Rtyre pressure "Acceleration" and "Constant":
Rcold start Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Driving and parking
Rselected route Rdrive in drive program E (vehicles with

Rnumber of consumers that are switched on automatic transmission).
These variable are not included in the ECO i On long journeys at constant speed, such
display. as on the motorway, only the "Constant"
Your driving style is evaluated on the basis of category bar changes.
the following three categories: i The ECO display sums up the driving
Acceleration (evaluation of all accelera- behaviour from the start to the end of the
tion processes) journey. As a result, the bars change
dynamically at the start of the journey. Dur-
The bar fills up: The bar depletes: ing long journeys there are fewer changes.
Moderate accelera- Sporty acceleration For more dynamic changes, perform a man-
tion, espeically at ual reset.
higher speeds For further information on ECO display, see
(Y page 250).
Constant (evaluation of the driving style
at any point in time)
Short journeys
The bar fills up: The bar depletes:
! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: if
Constant speed and Fluctuations in the vehicle is mostly driven for short dis-
avoidance of unnec- speed tances, it is possible that malfunctions may
essary acceleration occur during the automatic cleaning of the
and deceleration diesel particle filter. This may lead to fuel
processes collecting in the engine oil and cause
engine failure. Therefore, if you frequently
Coasting (evaluation of total decelera- drive short distances, you should take a 20
tion) minute trip on a motorway or rural road at
least every 500km.
The bar fills up: The bar depletes:
Drive with care, Frequent braking
Brakes
keep your distance
from the vehicle Important safety notes
ahead and remove
your foot from the G WARNING
accelerator pedal in If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
good time: the vehi- an attempt to increase the engine's braking
cle can coast with- effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
out braking This increases the risk of skidding and having
an accident.
Driving tips 187
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- Wet road surfaces
ing on a slippery road surface. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
Downhill gradients tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
Driving and parking

On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
been washed or driven through deep water.
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
you must shift to a lower gear in good time or You have to depress the brake pedal more
select shift range 1, 2 or 3 on vehicles with firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
automatic transmission. vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-
i This also applies if you have activated cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-
cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS- tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm
TRONIC PLUS. up the brake discs, thereby drying them more
This will use the braking effect of the engine, quickly and protecting them against corro-
so less braking will be required to prevent the sion.
vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the Limited braking performance on salt-
brakes from overheating and wearing too treated roads
quickly.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
Heavy and light loads
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
G WARNING longer braking distance.
The braking system can overheat if you leave RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
your foot on the brake pedal while driving. salt residue. Make sure that you do not
This increases the braking distance and could endanger other road users when doing so.
even cause the braking system to fail. There RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
is a risk of an accident. beginning and end of a journey.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
not simultaneously depress both the brake ahead.
pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving.
New brake pads/linings
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to New and replaced brake pads and discs only
the brake pads. reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometres of driving. Compen-
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy sate for this by applying greater force to the
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but brake pedal.
drive on for a short while. This allows the air-
flow to cool the brakes more quickly. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
If the brakes have been used only moderately, fitted to your vehicle which have been
you should occasionally test their effective- approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a which correspond to an equivalent quality
higher speed. This improves the grip of the standard. Brake pads/linings which have not
brakes. been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which are not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Z
188 Driving tips
AMG high-performance and ceramic For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts and
brakes brake carefully.
The AMG brake systems are designed for
heavy loads. This may lead to noise when Driving on flooded roads
braking. This is dependent on: ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
Driving and parking
Rspeed front or in the opposite direction create

Rbraking force waves. This may cause the maximum per-
missible water depth to be exceeded.
Renvironmental conditions, such as temper-
ature and humidity These notes must be observed under all
circumstances. You could otherwise dam-
The wear of individual components of the age the engine, the electronics or the trans-
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings mission.
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
ing style and operating conditions. If you have to drive on stretches of road on
For this reason, it is impossible to state a which water has collected, please bear in
mileage lifetime that will be valid under all mind that:
circumstances. An aggressive driving style Rthe maximum permissible still water depth
will lead to high wear. You can obtain further is 25 cm.
information about this from your Mercedes- Ryou should drive no faster than at walking
Benz Service Centre. pace.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometres of driving. Compen- Winter driving
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Do not forget this, and adapt Important safety notes
your driving and braking accordingly during G WARNING
this run-in period.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Excessively heavy braking results in corre- an attempt to increase the engine's braking
spondingly high brake wear. Observe the effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
brake system warning lamp in the instrument This increases the risk of skidding and having
cluster and note any brake status messages an accident.
in the multifunction display. For high-per-
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
formance driving in particular, it is important
ing on a slippery road surface.
to maintain and have the brake system
checked regularly.
G DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
Driving on wet roads ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
Aquaplaning vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
fatal injury.
on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua-
planing occurring, even if: If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
Ryou are driving at low speeds. around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth. ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
Driving systems 189
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
facing into the wind. the vehicle could skid.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified G WARNING

specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Cruise control cannot take account of road
Driving and parking

and traffic conditions.
Driving with summer tyres Always pay attention to traffic conditions
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" even when cruise control is activated.
section (Y page 382). Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
Slippery road surfaces speed and for braking in good time.
G WARNING G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Do not use cruise control
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you to
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
This increases the risk of skidding and having drive at a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic
an accident. or winding roads). You may otherwise
cause an accident.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
Ron slippery roads. The drive wheels may
ing on a slippery road surface.
lose their grip when braking or accelerating
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be and the vehicle may skid.
stopped when moving at low speed: Rwhen there is low visibility, e.g. due to fog,
X Vehicles with manual transmission: heavy rain or snow.

shift to neutral.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: General notes
shift the transmission to position N. Cruise control maintains a constant road
X Try to bring the vehicle under control by speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
using corrective steering. to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must
You should drive particularly carefully on slip- select a low gear in good time on long and
pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera- steep downhill gradients, especially if the
tion, steering and braking manoeuvres. vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. On vehicles
with automatic transmission, select shift
i For more information on driving with range 1, 2 or 3. By doing so, you will make
snow chains, see (Y page 383). use of the braking effect of the engine. This
relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and
Driving systems wearing too quickly.
Cruise control Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
Important safety notes steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h.
G WARNING
Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
Z
190 Driving systems
Cruise control lever Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Rthe cruise control function must be selec-
ted (Y page 190).
Selecting cruise control

Driving and parking
: To activate or increase speed

; LIM indicator lamp
= To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
? To activate or reduce speed X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off.
A To switch between cruise control and var- If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
iable SPEEDTRONIC If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
B To deactivate cruise control the direction of arrow ;.
You can operate cruise control and variable LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control
SPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever. lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
lever indicates which system you have selec- Storing and maintaining the current
ted: speed
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is
selected.
RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-
TRONIC is selected.
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
the segments between the stored speed and
the maximum speed light up.
Activation conditions
You can accept the current speed if you are
To activate cruise control, all of the following driving faster than 30 km/h.
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe parking brake must be released.
Ryou must be driving faster than 30 km/h.
RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-
vening.
Driving systems 191
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
speed. you :.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever X Remove your foot from the accelerator
up : or down ;. pedal.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator The first time cruise control is activated, it
Driving and parking

pedal. stores the current speed or regulates the
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle speed of the vehicle to the previously
automatically maintains the stored speed. stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain

Setting a speed
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
Ralways drive at adequate, but not exces-
sive, engine speeds.
Rchange gear in good time.
Rif possible, do not change down several
gears at a time.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
Storing the current speed and calling up higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
the last stored speed X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
the desired speed is reached.
G WARNING X Release the cruise control lever.
Only call up a stored speed if you know what The new speed is stored.
that speed is and if it is suitable for the current X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
traffic and driving situation. You can other- ments: briefly press the cruise control
wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
lever up : or down ; to the pressure
tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
point.
braking.
The last stored speed increases or decrea-
ses in 1 km/h increments.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h
increments: press the cruise control lever
briefly up : or down ; beyond the pres-
sure point.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the last speed stored after you have fin-
ished overtaking.
Z
192 Driving systems
Deactivating cruise control SPEEDTRONIC

G WARNING
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
Driving and parking
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause

the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
G WARNING
There are several ways to deactivate cruise Do not change down for additional engine
control: braking on a slippery road surface. This could
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
wards =. the vehicle could skid.
or
X Brake G WARNING
SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid designed to
or
assist driving. You are responsible for the
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time.
direction of arrow ;.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM SPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that
indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever you do not exceed the set speed. On long and
lights up. steep downhill gradients, especially if the
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must
select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By
Ryou depress the parking brake. doing so, you will make use of the braking
Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h. effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. the brake system and prevents the brakes
Ryou shift into neutral in a vehicle with man- from overheating and wearing too quickly. If
ual transmission while driving or depress you need additional braking, depress the
the clutch pedal for longer than six sec- brake pedal repeatedly rather than continu-
onds. ously.
Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you You can set a variable or permanent limit
shift to a gear that is too high, and as a speed:
result the engine speed is too low. Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, areas
you shift into position N while driving. Rpermanent for long-term speed restric-
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear tions, e.g. when driving with winter tyres
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise fitted (Y page 195)
control off message in the multifunction i The speed indicated in the speedometer
display for approximately five seconds. may differ slightly from the limit speed
i The last speed stored is cleared when you stored.
switch off the engine.
Driving systems 193
Variable SPEEDTRONIC You can only exceed the limit speed stored if
you deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC:
General notes
Rusing the cruise control lever
Rby depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
Driving and parking

It is not possible to deactivate variable
SPEEDTRONIC by braking.
: To store the current speed or a higher

speed
; LIM indicator lamp
= To store the current speed and call up the
last stored speed
? To store the current speed or a lower X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is on.
speed
If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is already
A To switch between cruise control or DIS-
selected.
TRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
B To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC
the direction of arrow ;.
With the cruise control lever, you can operate LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control
cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS and vari- lever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
able SPEEDTRONIC. selected.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
lever indicates which system you have selec- Storing the current speed
ted:
RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
TRONIC is selected.
Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC
G WARNING
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the limit speed stored.
Only use variable SPEEDTRONIC if you will not X Briefly press the cruise control lever
have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above up : or down ;.
that stored as the limit speed. You could oth- The current speed is stored and shown in
erwise cause an accident. the multifunction display.
Z
194 Driving systems
The segments in the multifunction display a higher speed, or down ; for a lower
light up from the start of the scale up to the speed.
stored speed. or
You can use the cruise control lever to limit X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while beyond the pressure point until the desired
Driving and parking
the engine is running. speed is set. Press the cruise control lever
up : for a higher speed or down ; for a
Storing the current speed and calling up
lower speed.
the last stored speed
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
G WARNING ments: briefly press the cruise control
Only select a stored speed if you know what lever up : to the pressure point for a
that speed is and whether it is suitable for the higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
current driving and traffic situation. Other-
wise, sudden braking could endanger you or
or
others. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
pressure point until the desired speed is
set. Press the cruise control lever up : for
a higher speed or down ; for a lower
speed.
Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC

G WARNING
It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
tronic by braking.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you :.
Setting a speed
There are several ways to deactivate variable

SPEEDTRONIC:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
increments: briefly press the cruise con- direction of arrow =.
trol lever up : past the pressure point for LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC is
deactivated.
Driving systems 195
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is selec- G WARNING

ted. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid designed to
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is automatically assist driving. The driver remains fully respon-
deactivated if: sible for the vehicle's distance from other
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal beyond vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for braking
Driving and parking

the pressure point (kickdown), but only if in good time.
your current speed does not differ by more DISTRONIC PLUS does not react in particular
than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You to:
will hear a warning tone if this is the case. Rpedestrians
Ron vehicles with manual transmission, if Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
you shift to a higher gear and as a result, ped or parked vehicles
the engine speed is too low. Roncoming and crossing traffic
i The last speed stored is cleared when you DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-
switch off the engine. cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-
cles driving on a different line. Therefore,
Permanent SPEEDTRONIC always pay attention to traffic conditions even
when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Other-
You can use the on-board computer to limit wise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
the speed permanently to a value between time, cause an accident and injure yourself
160 km/h(e.g. for driving on winter tyres) and and others.
the maximum speed (Y page 261).
Shortly before the stored speed is reached, it G WARNING
appears in the multifunction display. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road
Permanent SPEEDTRONIC remains active, and traffic conditions. If DISTRONIC does not
even if variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivated. recognise or no longer recognises the vehicle
You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, in front, do not activate DISTRONIC or, if it is
even if you depress the accelerator pedal already active, deactivate it. This is especially
beyond the pressure point (kickdown). the case:
Rbefore corners
Ron filter lanes
DISTRONIC PLUS
Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving
Important safety notes traffic
Rin complex driving situations or where lanes
G WARNING
are diverted, e.g. at roadworks on a motor-
Hybrid vehicles: ensure that you read the
way
"HYBRID" supplement. You could otherwise
fail to recognise dangers. DISTRONIC PLUS otherwise maintains the
current speed set by you or accelerates up to
G WARNING the set speed.
Do not change down for additional engine DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of
braking on a slippery road surface. This could weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and activate, DISTRONIC PLUS:
the vehicle could skid. Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or
icy. The wheels could lose their grip when
Z
196 Driving systems
braking or accelerating. The vehicle could The radar sensor system is switched off auto-
start to skid. matically in the vicinity of radio telescope
Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor vis- facilities (Y page 451).
ibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Dis- If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
tance control may be impaired. PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
Driving and parking
Always pay attention to traffic conditions control in the speed range between
even when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle is driving
Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in front of you, DISTRONIC operates in the
in time, cause an accident and injure yourself speed range between 0 km/h and
and others. 200 km/h.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS on roads with
G WARNING steep gradients.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle up to a
maximum of 4 m/s2 depending on its speed. Cruise control lever
This corresponds to approximately 40% of
your vehicle's maximum braking power. You
must also apply the brakes yourself if this
braking power is not sufficient.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collision
with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning
tone sounds. In addition, the · distance
warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up. Brake to avoid a collision.
General notes : To store the current speed or a higher

DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and speed
automatically helps you maintain the dis- ; To set the specified minimum distance
tance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS- = LIM indicator lamp
TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that ? To store the current speed and call up the
the set speed is not exceeded.
last stored speed
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe- A To store the current speed or a lower
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, speed
you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good
B To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and
time. By doing so, you will make use of the
variable SPEEDTRONIC
braking effect of the engine. This relieves the
load on the brake system and prevents the C To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
brakes from overheating and wearing too With the cruise control lever, you can operate
quickly. DISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEED-
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving TRONIC.
vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order
to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle
in front.
If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,
the radar sensor system must be activated
(Y page 262) and operational.
Driving systems 197
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control Activating while driving
lever indicates which system you have selec-
ted:
RLIM indicator lamp off: DISTRONIC PLUS
is selected.
Driving and parking

TRONIC is selected.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNING X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC you ;, or press it up : or down =.
PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or
by towing). up : or down = until the desired speed
is set.
Activation conditions X Remove your foot from the accelerator
To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following pedal.
conditions must be fulfilled: Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
Rthe engine must be running. It may take up
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
to two minutes of driving before DIS-
TRONIC PLUS is ready for use. When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you
Rthe parking brake must be released. can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehi-
RESP® must be switched on, but not inter-
cle in front has been detected and is shown
in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in
vening. front is no longer detected and displayed,
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and you will
Rthe bonnet must be closed. hear a tone.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS suspended
fastened. message appears in the multifunction dis-
Rthe front-passenger door and the rear play. The set distance to a slower moving
doors must be closed. vehicle in front will then not be maintained.
Rthe vehicle must not be skidding. You will be driving at the speed you deter-
mine by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Activating when driving towards a sta-
tionary vehicle
you ;, or press it up : or down =.
Z
198 Driving systems
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
up : or down = until the desired speed in front is driving faster, it accelerates your
is set. vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
stored.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your Changing lanes
Driving and parking
vehicle is stationary as well.

G WARNING
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist
under 30 km/h if a vehicle in front has been are only an aid designed to assist driving.
detected. Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS They do not relieve you of the responsibility
distance display in the instrument cluster of paying attention. The driver remains fully
should be activated (Y page 256). responsible for the vehicle's distance from
i You can use the cruise control lever to set other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for
the stored speed and the control on the braking in good time. Always pay attention to
cruise control lever to set the specified traffic conditions and your surroundings. Oth-
minimum distance (Y page 201). erwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
time, cause an accident and injure yourself
Pulling away and driving and others.
G WARNING
If you change to the overtaking lane, DIS-
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
TRONIC PLUS supports you if:
deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your Ryou are driving faster than 60 km/h.
vehicle. In such cases, control the distance RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-
from vehicles travelling in front with the brake tance to a vehicle in front.
alone. You could otherwise cause an accident Ryou switch on the respective turn signals.
and thereby injure yourself and others. The RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
driver remains fully responsible for the vehi-
of collision.
cle's distance from other vehicles, the speed
being driven and for braking in good time. If these conditions are met, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
your foot from the brake pedal. tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front becomes too small.
you ;, or press it up : or down =. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
or monitors the left lane for left-hand-drive
vehicles and the right lane for right-hand-
X Accelerate briefly. drive vehicles.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehi-
cle. In this way, the distance you have selec-
ted is maintained.
Driving systems 199
Vehicles with COMAND APS/ DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information

Audio 50 APS from your navigation system so that it can
react appropriately to certain traffic situa-
tions. This is the case if, while following a
vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you:
Driving and parking

Rapproach or drive around a roundabout
Rapproach a T-junction
Rturn off at a motorway exit
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detec-

tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily
maintains the current driving speed and does
not accelerate. This is based on the current
Example: roundabout map data in the navigation system.
i The following function is not operational
in all countries.
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information
from your navigation system so that it can
adapt to certain traffic situations. This is the
case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC
PLUS is active and you:
Rapproach or drive around a roundabout
Rapproach a T-junction
Rturn off at a motorway exit
Example: roundabout
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the detec-
The current speed is maintained:
tion range, DISTRONIC PLUS temporarily
maintains the current driving speed and does Rapproximately ten seconds before the
not accelerate. This is based on the current roundabout/T-junction and for approx-
map data in the navigation system. imately 1.5seconds when driving on the
The current speed is maintained: roundabout
Rapproximately twelve seconds before
Rapproximately 10 seconds before the
reaching a motorway exit and approx-
roundabout/T-junction and approximately
imately four seconds after the motorway
1.5 seconds when driving on a roundabout
exit
Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to
a motorway exit and approximately
the set speed you specified.
4 seconds after the motorway exit
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to Stopping
the set speed you specified. G WARNING
Vehicles with COMAND Online Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC
i The following function is not operational PLUS is activated.
in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be oper-
ated, activated or deactivated by a passenger
or from outside the vehicle.
Z
200 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the park- You will see a warning message in the multi-
ing brake and must not be used for parking. function display if DISTRONIC PLUS is acti-
The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is can- vated and:
celled and the vehicle can start moving if: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the seat belt is unfastened.
Driving and parking
cruise control lever. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
Ryou accelerate. matically switched off by the ECO start/

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
stop function.
Rthe bonnet is opened.
interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat-
tery failure. The horn will also sound at regular intervals if
Rthe electrical system in the engine com- DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
pered with. door and take off your seat belt
Rthe battery is disconnected. Ropen the bonnet
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the that the vehicle has been parked while DIS-
vehicle against rolling away. TRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound
becomes louder if you attempt to lock the
G WARNING vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DIS-
Hybrid vehicles: ensure that you read the TRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
"HYBRID" supplement. You could otherwise i If the engine has been switched off, it
fail to recognise dangers. cannot be started again until DISTRONIC
PLUS has been deactivated.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a fault
it is stationary. occurs in the system or if there is a disruption
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains in the power supply, the Brake immedi‐
stationary and you do not need to depress the ately message is shown in the multifunction
brake. display. Immediately depress the brake firmly
until the warning message in the multifunc-
i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tion display goes out or shift the transmission
tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill to position P. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactiva-
at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle ted.
in front. The specified minimum distance is
set using the control on the cruise control Vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
lever. sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
Vehicles featuring automatic transmis- transmission is shifted automatically to posi-
sion with a selector lever tion P if:
Select Park (P)
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-
seat belt is unfastened.
vent the vehicle from rolling away. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warn-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
ing message in the multifunction display
stop function.
disappears.
Driving systems 201
Ra system fault occurs. Storing the current speed or calling up

Rthe power supply is not sufficient. the stored speed
G WARNING
Setting a speed
Only call up a stored speed if you know what
Driving and parking

that speed is and if it is suitable for the current
traffic and driving situation. You can other-
wise endanger yourself or others by uninten-
tionally triggering sudden acceleration or
braking.
X Press the cruise control lever up : for a

higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
the desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed you :.
to the new speed stored.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
X To adjust the set speed in 1 km/h incre-
pedal.
ments: briefly press the cruise control
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
lever up : or down ; to the pressure
time it is activated, the current speed is
point. stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
The last stored speed increases or decrea- speed to the previously stored value.
X To adjust the set speed in 10 km/h
Setting the specified minimum distance
increments: press the cruise control lever
briefly up : or down ; beyond the pres-
sure point.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
Z
202 Driving systems
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the mul-
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can tifunction display
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 202). General notes
X To increase: turn control ; in direction In the Assistance menu (Y page 256) of the
Driving and parking
=. on-board computer, you can select the dis-

tance display.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
vehicle in front. vated
X To decrease: turn control ; in direc-
tion :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
and safe distance from the vehicle in front.
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if
necessary.
Displaying DISTRONIC PLUS in the Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-

speedometer sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator: current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
X Select the Distance display function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 256).
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-

sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Driving systems 203
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
ted or
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow =.
Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM
Driving and parking

indicator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
lights up.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- you switch off the engine.
: DISTRONIC PLUS activated DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-
; Own vehicle
ted if:
Ryou engage the parking brake.
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-
cle in front; adjustable Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and
? Vehicle in front, if detected there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle
in front is no longer detected.
X Select the Distance display function RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.
using the on-board computer
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position.
(Y page 256).
Rthe vehicle is near a radio telescope facility
i You will see the stored speed for about (Y page 451).
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC Ryou switch off the radar sensor system
PLUS.
(Y page 262).
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
you in order to pull away, and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open.
Rthe vehicle has skidded.
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐
TRONIC PLUS off message in the multifunc-
tion display for approximately five seconds.
Vehicles with automatic transmission with
selector lever: if the vehicle has been stopped
by DISTRONIC PLUS and a fault occurs in the
There are several ways to deactivate DIS- system, the Brake immediately message
TRONIC PLUS: appears in the multifunction display. Depress
the brake pedal immediately so that the vehi-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- cle does not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is
wards :. then deactivated, and the message disap-
or pears.
Z
204 Driving systems
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Other vehicles changing lane
General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
Driving and parking
be particularly attentive. In such situations,

brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the

vehicle cutting in. The distance to this vehicle
will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-

cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle
may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles travelling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the

vehicle in front on the edge of the carriage-
way, because of its narrow width. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles

travelling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-

cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
Driving systems 205
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals Rthe driver's door is closed or if your seat
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC belt is fastened.
PLUS will not brake for these. Rthe parking brake is released.
Rthe bonnet is closed.
Crossing vehicles
Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on
Driving and parking

vehicles with automatic transmission.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
The vehicle's brakes are applied when the
HOLD function is activated. For this reason,
deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is
to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect car wash or by towing).
vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-
ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
X Make sure that the activation conditions
crossing traffic, for example, could cause are met.
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. X Depress the brake pedal.
X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until ë appears in the multifunction dis-
HOLD function play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
General notes release the brake pedal.
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
following situations:
time does not activate the HOLD function,
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep wait briefly and then try again.
slopes
Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Deactivating the HOLD function
Rwhen waiting in traffic
G WARNING
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
function is activated.
The braking effect is cancelled and the HOLD
The HOLD function must never be operated
function is deactivated when you depress the
or deactivated by a passenger or from outside
accelerator pedal to pull away.
the vehicle.
Activation conditions The HOLD function does not replace the park-
ing brake and must not be used for parking.
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto-
stop function.
Z
206 Driving systems
The braking effect of the HOLD function is In vehicles with manual transmission or auto-
cancelled and the vehicle could roll away if: matic transmission with a selector lever, you
Rthe
see a warning message in the multifunction
HOLD function is deactivated by
display if the HOLD function is activated and:
depressing the accelerator pedal or the
brake pedal. Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
Driving and parking
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an seat belt is unfastened.

interruption in the power supply, e.g. bat- Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
tery failure. matically switched off by the ECO start/

Rthe electrical system in the engine com- stop function.
partment, the battery or the fuses are tam- Rthe bonnet is opened.
pered with. For vehicles with manual transmission:

Rthe battery is disconnected. Brake immediately
If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle until the warning message in the multifunc-
against rolling away. tion display goes out. This deactivates the
HOLD function.
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
In vehicles featuring automatic transmission
cally if:
with a gear selector lever: Select Park (P)
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
X Shift the transmission to position P to pre-
transmission: only when the transmission vent the vehicle from rolling away.
is in position D or R. The HOLD function is deactivated. The
Ryou shift the transmission to position P on
warning message in the multifunction dis-
vehicles with automatic transmission. play disappears.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
A horn will also sound at regular intervals if
certain amount of pressure until ë dis- the HOLD function is activated and you:
appears from the multifunction display.
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
door and take off your seat belt
On vehicles with automatic transmission and Ropen the bonnet
a DIRECT SELECT lever, the transmission is
automatically shifted to P if the HOLD func- The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact
tion is activated and: that the vehicle has been parked while the
HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
seat belt is unfastened. The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func-
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- tion is deactivated.
stop function.
i If the engine has been switched off, it
cannot be started again until the HOLD
function has been deactivated.
Ra system fault occurs.
If there is a fault in the system or power supply
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
while the HOLD function is activated, the
Brake immediatelyBrake immediately
message is shown in the multifunction dis-
play. Immediately depress the brake firmly
until the warning message in the multifunc-
tion display goes out.
Driving systems 207
On vehicles with automatic transmission, you Activating RACE START

can also shift into position P. This deactivates
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
the HOLD function.
and keep it depressed.
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
(Y page 174) until the RS lamp lights up.
Driving and parking

RACE START
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Important safety notes Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears
in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
i If the activation conditions are no longer
RACE START is only available when SPORT
fulfilled, RACE START is cancelled. The
handling mode is activated. SPORT handling
RACE START cancelled message appears
mode will only be able to stabilise the vehicle
to a limited degree if the vehicle starts to skid
or a wheel starts to spin. The vehicle is there- X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift
fore harder to control at the threshold range. paddle (Y page 175).
You could lose control of the vehicle and or
cause an accident. XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel
RACE START should only be used on closed shift paddle (Y page 175).
off circuits. Always adapt your driving style to The RACE START available Depress
suit the prevailing road and weather condi- accelerator message appears in the mul-
tions. tifunction display.
i If you do not depress the accelerator
i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi- pedal fully within two seconds, RACE
cles. START is cancelled. The RACE START not
RACE START enables optimum acceleration possible See Owner's Manual message
from a standing start. The precondition for appears in the multifunction display.
this is a suitable high-grip road surface. XFully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed rises to approximately
Activation conditions 3500 rpm.
You can activate RACE START if: The RACE START Release brake to
Rthe doors are closed. start message appears in the multifunc-
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
tion display.
operating temperature of approximately i If you do not release the brake pedal
80 †. This is the case when the engine oil within five seconds, RACE START is cancel-
temperature in the multifunction display led. The RACE START cancelled message
stops flashing. appears in the multifunction display.
RSPORT handling mode is activated X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
(Y page 74). accelerator pedal depressed.
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-
position. eration.
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake The RACE START active message appears
pedal is depressed (left foot). in the multifunction display.
Rthe transmission is in position D. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 50 km/h.
Z
208 Driving systems
Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT han- The following vehicle levels are possible:
dling mode remains activated. Rnormal
RACE START is deactivated immediately if Rraised (vehicles without 4MATIC): the vehi-
you release the accelerator pedal during cle is raised by about 25 mm when com-
RACE START or if any of the activation condi- pared with the normal level.
Driving and parking
tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Rraised (vehicles with 4MATIC): the vehicle
not possible See Owner's Manual mes-
is raised by about 35 mm when compared
sage appears in the multifunction display.
with the normal level.
i After using it several times in short suc- Rlowered: the vehicle is lowered by about
cession, RACE START will be unavailable 10 mm when compared with the normal
until a certain distance has been driven. level.
The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can
be set manually.
AIRMATIC
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automati-
Vehicle level cally:
Rat speeds above 140 km/h
Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"
G WARNING (Y page 209)
If you have selected "Comfort tuning", the
vehicle will be lowered if you lock it within Setting the vehicle level
60 seconds of the engine being switched off. G WARNING
Make sure, therefore, that nobody is in the Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
vicinity of the wheel housing or under the wheel housing or under the vehicle while low-
vehicle when you lock the vehicle. Otherwise, ering the vehicle when it is stationary. Other-
limbs could become trapped. wise, limbs could become trapped.
! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning" surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
Ryou switch off the engine and chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock.
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that Setting raised level
it does not make contact with the kerb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer
(Y page 236).
Your vehicle regulates its height automati-
cally. All-round level control ensures the best
possible suspension and constant ground
clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When
you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered auto-
matically to improve driving safety and to
reduce fuel consumption. X Start the engine.
Driving systems 209
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Sports tuning

X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle
height is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle rising message appears in
Driving and parking

the display.
The "Raised level" setting is cancelled if you:
Rdrive at a speed above approximately
120 km/h.
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a
speed above 80 km/h.
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
The "Raised Level" remains saved when you ensures even better contact with the road.
are not driving within these speed ranges. Select this mode when employing a sporty
Setting the normal level driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X Start the engine. X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selec-
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
ted "Sports tuning".
X Press button :. The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is the multifunction display.
adjusted to normal level.
Comfort tuning
Suspension tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. There-
General notes fore, select this mode if you prefer a more
The electronically controlled damping system comfortable driving style. Select comfort
works continuously. This improves driving mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
safety and ride comfort. e.g. on straight stretches of motorway.
The damping is tuned individually to each X Press button :.
wheel and depends on: Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selec-
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty ted "Comfort tuning".
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com- in the multifunction display.
fort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock. AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspen-
sion
General notes
i AMG RIDE CONTROL sports suspension
is available for the E 63 AMG model.
Z
210 Driving systems
Vehicle level Select this mode when employing a sporty

driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
The vehicle automatically sets the vehicle
level at the rear axle. Rear axle level control X Press button : once.
ensures the best possible suspension and Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selec-
that the ground clearance remains constant ted Sport mode.
Driving and parking
even when the vehicle is loaded. This The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
improves driving safety and fuel consump- appears in the multifunction display.
tion.
Sport + mode
Suspension tuning The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
General notes contact with the road. Select this mode only
The electronically controlled damping system when driving on race circuits.
works continuously. This improves driving If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each
X Press button : twice.
wheel and depends on: Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You
have selected Sport + mode.
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport +
or Comfort If indicator lamp ? lights up:
If you select Sport or Sport + mode and X Press button : once.
restart the engine, the suspension setting Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
reverts to Comfort mode. have selected Sport + mode.
Sport mode The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
Comfort mode
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable. There-
fore, select this mode if you prefer a more
comfortable driving style. Select comfort
mode also when driving fast on straight roads,
e.g. on straight stretches of motorway.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps = and ? go out.
: Switch for selecting the mode You have selected Comfort mode.
; Switch for storing, calling up and display- The AMG Ride Control COMFORT mes-
ing the selected mode sage appears in the multifunction display.
= Sport + mode indicator lamp
Storing and calling up settings
? Sport mode indicator lamp
Once the suspension tuning and drive pro-
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode gram have been selected, you can store and
ensures even better contact with the road. call up your settings using AMG button ;.
Driving systems 211
X To store: press AMG button ; until you PARKTRONIC

hear a tone.
X To call up: press AMG button ;.
The stored suspension tuning and drive G WARNING
program are selected. PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not
Driving and parking

X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving.
Your selection appears in the multifunction
display. You are always responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your imme-
diate surroundings when parking and
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel drive)
yourself and others.
G WARNING
4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident G WARNING
if you drive too fast. Make sure that no persons or animals are in
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
could be injured.
necessary when pulling away. PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
Raccelerate less when driving. ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
Radapt your driving style to suit road and audibly the distance between your vehicle
traffic conditions. and an object.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically if
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle you:
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Rswitch on the ignition
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty. All Rshift to position D, R or N on vehicles with
wheels must remain either on the ground automatic transmission
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions Rrelease the parking brake
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
contact with the ground. 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow and four sensors in the rear bumper.
chains if necessary.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per- Range of the sensors
manently driven. Together with ESP®, it General notes
improves the traction of your vehicle when-
! When parking, pay particular attention to
ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient
grip. objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK-
TRONIC does not detect such objects when
they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or
the objects.
Z
212 Driving systems
The sensors may not detect snow and

objects which absorb ultrasonic sources.
Ultrasonic sources, such as an automatic
car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
or a pneumatic drill, could cause PARK-
Driving and parking
TRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Example: top view
Front sensors
Centre Approx. 100 cm
Corners Approx. 60 cm
Rear sensors
Centre Approx. 120 cm
: Example: sensors in the front bumper,
left-hand side Corners Approx. 80 cm
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
Minimum distance
slush. Otherwise, they may not function cor-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking Centre Approx. 20 cm
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 354). Corners Approx. 15 cm
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a warn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below
the minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
Example: side view

Driving systems 213
Warning displays Automatic transmission:
Transmission Warning display

position
D Front area activated
Driving and parking

R or N Rear and front areas
activated
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
Warning display for the front area
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle From the:
; Segments on the right-hand side of the Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
vehicle intermittent warning tone for approx-
= Segments showing operational readiness imately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
The warning displays show the distance
warning tone for approximately two sec-
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
onds. This indicates that you have now
warning display for the front area is located
reached the minimum distance.
on the dashboard above the centre air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is loca-
ted on the roof lining in the rear compart- Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
ment.
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
segments showing operational readiness =
light up.
The gear lever position or the transmission
position of the automatic transmission deter-
mines which warning display is active when
the engine is running.
Manual transmission: : Indicator lamp
Gear lever posi- Warning display ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

tion If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
Forwards gear Front area activated deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti-
vated.
or
Neutral i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the key to position 2 in the
Reverse gear Rear and front areas ignition lock.
activated
Z
214 Driving systems
Towing a trailer
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC meas-
ures the minimum detection range to an
obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou-
Driving and parking
pling.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
Driving systems 215
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds,
and the indicator lamp
in the PARKTRONIC
button lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 354).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
imately 20seconds. ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Parking Guidance You are always responsible for safety and

Important safety notes diate surroundings when parking and
G WARNING manoeuvring.
Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may
G WARNING
recommend parking spaces that are not suit-
able for parking. For example, these might be Objects located above the height range of
spaces where parking is prohibited, drive- Parking Guidance will not be detected when
ways, unsuitable surfaces, etc. the parking space is measured. These are not
taken into account when the parking proce-
Parking Guidance measures the parking
dure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail
space as you drive past it. Any later changes
sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.
to the parking space are not taken into
In some circumstances, Parking Guidance
account. For instance, this may be the case
might therefore issue steering instructions
when the vehicle parked in front of or behind
too soon. This may lead to a collision. For this
the space changes its position or when an
reason, you should avoid using Parking Guid-
obstacle is moved into the parking space.
ance in such situations.
Parking Guidance does not relieve you of the
responsibility for paying attention. If you rely
solely on Parking Guidance, you could cause
an accident and injure yourself and others.
Z
216 Driving systems
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are

G WARNING
Make sure that no persons or animals are in always correct. This has a direct effect on
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they the steering instructions.
could be injured. Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
Driving and parking
! If unavoidable, you should drive over on various factors. These include the posi-
obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at tion and shape of the vehicles parked in
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage front and behind it and the conditions of the
the wheels or tyres. location. In some cases, Parking Guidance
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid may guide you too far or not far enough into
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas- a parking space. In some cases, it may also
ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A lead you across or onto the kerb. If neces-
suitable parking space is indicated by the sary, cancel the parking procedure with
parking symbol. You receive steering instruc- Parking Guidance.
tions when parking. You may also use PARK-
TRONIC (Y page 211). Detecting parking spaces
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking
Guidance is also unavailable.
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.
not on the pavement, for example. Parking Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
Guidance may not detect flat kerbs sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
Parking tips: : Detected parking space on the left
Ron
; Parking symbol
narrow roads, drive as closely as possi-
ble past the parking space. = Detected parking space on the right
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown Parking Guidance is automatically activated
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars when you drive forwards. The system is
might be identified incorrectly or not at all. operational at speeds of up to approximately
Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking 35 km/h. While in operation, the system inde-
space being measured inaccurately. pendently locates and measures parking
Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When
(Y page 213) warning messages during the driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you will see
parking procedure. parking symbol ; as a status indicator in the
Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes instrument cluster.
from your vehicle, you must not use Parking When a parking space has been detected, an
Guidance. arrow towards the right = or the left : also
Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow appears. Parking Guidance only displays
chains or an emergency spare wheel fitted. parking spaces on the front-passenger side
as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's
side are displayed as soon as the turn signal
on the driver's side is activated. To park on
the driver's side, you must leave the driver's
Driving systems 217
side turn signal switched on until you have Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift
engaged reverse gear. into position R.
Parking Guidance will only detect parking The multifunction display shows the
spaces: Check vehicle surroundings Con‐
Rthat
firm with OK message.
are parallel to the direction of travel
Driving and parking

X Press the a button on the multifunction
Rthat are at least 1.5 m wide
steering wheel to confirm.
Rthat are at least 1.3 m longer than your
The multifunction display switches to Park-
vehicle ing Guidance.
A parking space is displayed while you are Depending on your distance from the park-
driving past it and until you are approximately ing space, the Please drive backwards
15 m away from it. message will appear in the multifunction
display.
Parking
X If necessary, reverse towards the parking
Important safety notes space. This is indicated by an arrow point-
ing backwards.
G WARNING
Continue reversing until you hear a tone.
PARKTRONIC and Parking Guidance are
Stop – the parking position has been
merely parking aids and may not detect all
reached. The arrow is white.
obstacles. They do not relieve you of the
responsibility of paying attention. The Please steer to the right or
Please steer to the left message
You are always responsible for safety and
diate surroundings when parking and Reversing the vehicle into a parking space
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
Moving the vehicle to the parking position

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel in the specified direction
sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever until the arrow is white and a warning tone
sounds.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
X To reverse into the parking space: main-
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster. tain the steering wheel angle and reverse
carefully.
X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
reverse gear.
The vehicle has reached the position in
which you need to countersteer.
The Please steer to the left or
Please steer to the right message
Z
218 Driving systems
X Countersteering: while the vehicle is sta- Reversing camera

tionary, turn the steering wheel in the
specified direction until the arrow is white Important safety notes
and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
X To reverse into the parking space: main-
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
Driving and parking
tain the steering wheel angle and reverse

the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
carefully.
could be injured.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone. General notes
The Parking Guidance finished mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display
and a tone sounds. You may be asked to
steer in a different direction and then
change gear. In this case, further displays
in the multifunction display will direct you
to the final position.
X Manoeuvre if necessary.
X Always observe the warning messages dis-
played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 213).
Example: Saloon
Cancelling Parking Guidance
Reversing camera : is an optical parking aid.
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the It shows the area behind your vehicle in the
centre console (Y page 213). COMAND display.
Parking Guidance is cancelled immediately Reversing camera : is located in the handle
and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. strip of the tailgate.
Parking Guidance is cancelled automatically
if it is no longer possible to guide you into the View through the camera
parking space or if a malfunction occurs.
The parking space symbol goes out and a G WARNING
warning tone sounds. The Parking Guid‐ The reversing camera is only an aid and may
ance cancelled message appears in the display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect
multifunction display. manner, or may not even display them at all.
The reversing camera does not relieve you of
Towing a trailer the responsibility to pay attention. The cam-
era cannot show objects:
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the min- Rvery near to the rear bumper
imum length for parking spaces is slightly
Rbelow the rear bumper
increased.
Rthat are located above the tailgate handle
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle,
recess
you should not use Parking Guidance. When
the electrical connection is established You are always responsible for safety and
between your vehicle and the trailer, Parking must continue to pay attention to your imme-
Guidance ceases to be available. PARK- diate surroundings when parking and
TRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. manoeuvring. This applies to the areas
behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You
Driving systems 219
could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- Guide lines in the COMAND display
ers.
G WARNING
G WARNING Using the reversing camera can be dangerous
if you are colour blind or your ability to distin-
Under the following circumstances, the
Driving and parking

guish colours is impaired.
reversing camera will not function, or will
function in a limited manner: Only use the reversing camera if you can see
and distinguish between all the coloured
Rif the tailgate is open guide lines that are displayed by the reversing
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog camera in the COMAND display.
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light G WARNING
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Please note that objects not at ground level
lighting (the display may flicker) may appear to be further away than they
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, actually are. These include:
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in Rthe bumper of a vehicle that is parked
winter behind your vehicle
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Ra trailer drawbar
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
event, have the camera position and setting Rthe tail-end of a lorry
checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Rslanted posts
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
The lines are only guides, not accurate meas-
a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
urements of the distance to an obstacle.
purpose.
Therefore, you should never pass the red line
Do not use the reversing camera in these
when approaching an obstacle. You could oth-
types of situation. You could otherwise injure
erwise cause an accident and injure yourself
others or damage objects and your vehicle
and others.
while you are parking.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a

mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
Activating the reversing camera

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the "Reversing camera"
function is selected in COMAND APS (see
the separate operating instructions for
COMAND APS).
Example: information in the COMAND display
The area behind the vehicle is shown with Guide lines ; and = show the approximate
guide lines in the COMAND display. distance to the rear area. Yellow guide
line ; approximately 1.0 m and red guide
line = approximately 0.25 m. The distances
only apply to objects that are at ground level.
Blue guide lines : depict the width required
Z
220 Driving systems
for the vehicle. They are used to align the Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
vehicle with the edge of the carriageway, e.g. with high cornering speeds or high rates of
the kerb. acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
than 80 km/h or faster than 180 km/h
Driving and parking
ATTENTION ASSIST Rif you are currently using COMAND APS or
Important safety notes making a telephone call with COMAND APS

Rif the time has been set incorrectly
G WARNING Rin active driving situations, such as when
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may you change lanes or change your speed
detect your tiredness or lapses in concentra-
tion too late or not at all. It is not a substitute Warning and display messages in the
for a well rested and attentive driver. multifunction display
Fatigue may cause you to recognise hazard-
ous situations too late, misjudge a situation
or react slower. For this reason, make sure
you feel rested before you begin driving and
during your journey. Always take breaks in
good time and regularly, especially during
long journeys. Otherwise, you may fail to rec-
ognise dangers in time, cause an accident and
injure yourself and others. sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
General notes warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, journey has begun. You then hear an inter-
monotonous journeys such as on motorways mittent warning tone twice and the Atten‐
and trunk roads. It is active in the 80 km/h tion Assist: Drowsiness detected mes-
to 180 km/h range. sage appears in the multifunction display.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica- X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- board computer (Y page 257).
centration on the part of the driver, it sug- Symbol : appears in the multifunction
gests taking a break. display.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of X If necessary, take a break.
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking X Press the a button to confirm the mes-
the following criteria into account: sage.
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
characteristics time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
Rjourney-related parameters, e.g. time of do not take a break, you will be warned again
day, length of journey after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects
restricted, and warnings may be delayed or typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap-
not occur at all: ses in concentration.
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-
face is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Driving systems 221
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset and starts

assessing your tiredness again when you con-
tinue your journey if:
Ryou switch off the engine.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
Driving and parking

driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
Speed Limit Assist

: Speed Limit Assist camera
Speed Limit Assist shows you detected speed
G WARNING limits in the multifunction display. Data from
Speed Limit Assist is only an aid and may the navigation system is also used for this
detect speed limit signs incorrectly or not at purpose. If a traffic sign indicating a speed
all. limit or the end of a speed limit is detected,
The system may be impaired or may not func- it is shown in the multifunction display. If
tion if: Speed Limit Assist does not detect any traffic
Rthere
signs, the speed limit from the digital road
is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
map is taken and shown in the display.
rain, fog or spray.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from the sun or from
Speed Limit Assist detects the traffic signs
with a camera attached behind the top of the
oncoming traffic.
windscreen.
Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
Information in the multifunction display
of the camera.
Rthe traffic signs are covered, for instance
by dirt, snow or trees.
Rthe traffic signs are poorly illuminated.
Rthere are ambiguous traffic signs, for
instance near roadworks or on multi-lane
roads.
Traffic signs always have priority over the
Speed Limit Assist display. Speed Limit Assist
cannot detect road and traffic conditions. It is
not a substitute for attentive driving.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident : Traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the
and injure yourself and others. end of a speed limit (example)
; Speed Limit Assist is available and the
warning function is switched on in the on-
board computer
= Units used in the traffic sign displayed
Z
222 Driving systems
Briefly showing detected traffic signs in could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
the multifunction display ers.
X Activate the Speed Limit Assist warning The system may be impaired or may not func-
function using the on-board computer tion if:
(Y page 255). Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
Driving and parking
Symbol ; appears. rain, fog or spray.

A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
end of a speed limit : appears in the mul- ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
tifunction display for around five seconds of the camera.
as soon as it is detected. Any other infor- Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill
mation in the multifunction display is hid- gradients.
den for this period.
Permanently showing detected traffic G WARNING
signs in the multifunction display Night View Assist Plus does not detect
X Display Speed Limit Assist using the on- objects in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
board computer (Y page 255). cle. Look through the windscreen when
A traffic sign indicating a speed limit or the manoeuvring. Make sure that there are no
end of a speed limit : appears in the mul- people or animals in the area in which you are
tifunction display as soon as it is detected. manoeuvring.
Traffic sign indicating a speed limit : is
generally displayed until:
Ra traffic sign indicating the end of the
speed limit is detected.
Ryou make a turn.
Ryou leave or enter a town.
Rthe road type changes (e.g. motorway,
country road).
Ryou have travelled a certain minimum
distance without the traffic sign being
repeated or detected again. In addition to the illumination provided by the
normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
uses infrared light to illuminate the road.
Night View Assist Plus Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up
the infrared light and displays a monochrome
Important safety notes image in COMAND. The image displayed in
G WARNING COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by
main-beam headlamps. This enables you to
Night View Assist Plus is only an aid designed
see the road's course and any obstacles in
to assist driving and does not relieve you of
good time. When pedestrian recognition is
the responsibility to pay attention. Continue
active, pedestrians recognised by the system
to look through the windscreen instead of
are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus
relying on the Night View Assist Plus display.
display.
You are responsible for safety and must drive
in accordance with traffic conditions. You Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehi-
cles does not affect the Night View Assist Plus
Driving systems 223
display in the multifunction display. This is tionary and cannot check whether Night
also the case if you cannot switch on the View Assist Plus is working.
main-beam headlamps due to oncoming traf-
fic. Pedestrian recognition
i Infrared light is not visible to the human G WARNING
Driving and parking

eye and therefore does not dazzle. Night
Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or
View Assist Plus can therefore remain
inoperative if:
switched on even if there is oncoming traf-
fic. Rpedestrians are partially or entirely
obscured by objects, e.g. by parked vehi-
Activating Night View Assist Plus cles.
Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night
Activation conditions View Assist Plus display is incomplete or
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflec-
if: tions.
Rthe Rpedestrians do not contrast with the sur-
key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rit roundings.
is dark.
Rpedestrians are not in an upright position,
Rthe light switch is in the Ã or L posi-
e.g. sitting, squatting or lying.
tion.
Rreverse gear has not been engaged.
Activating Night View Assist Plus
: Night View Assist Plus display

; Pedestrian recognised
= Framing
X Make sure that COMAND APS is switched
? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
on.
X Press button :. i Animals are not recognised by pedestrian
The Night View Assist Plus display appears recognition.
in the COMAND display. Night View Assist Plus can recognise pedes-
You can read about how to adjust the bright- trians using typical characteristics, e.g. when
ness of the COMAND display in the COMAND there is a silhouette in the shape of a person.
APS operating instructions.
i The infrared headlamps only switch on
when the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of at least 10 km/h. This means that you
do not have the full visual range while sta-
Z
224 Driving systems
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on

automatically if:
RNight View Assist Plus is activated.
Ryou are driving faster than about 10 km/h.
Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when driv-
Driving and parking
ing outside built-up areas without street

lighting.
If pedestrian recognition is active, sym-
bol ? appears. If a pedestrian is now recog-
nised, they are framed = and thereby high-
lighted. If the pedestrian recognition system
has brought a pedestrian to your attention,
look through the windscreen to evaluate the
situation. The actual distance to objects and
pedestrians cannot be gauged accurately by
looking at a screen.
It may be the case that objects are highlighted
as well as pedestrians.
Misted up or dirty windscreen

If the windscreen in front of the camera is
misted up or dirty on the inside or outside, the
Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
X To demist: check the automatic air condi-
tioning settings (Y page 149) and fold down
the camera cover (Y page 355).
X To demist the inside of the wind-
screen: fold down the camera cover
(Y page 355) and clean the windscreen
(Y page 353).
Driving systems 225
Problems with Night View Assist Plus

The picture quality of The windscreen wipers are smearing the windscreen.
Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 139).
Driving and parking

has deteriorated.
The windscreen is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in
a car wash.
X Clean the windscreen (Y page 353).
There is windscreen chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windscreen.
The windscreen is misted up on the inside.

X Demist the windscreen (Y page 149).
The windscreen is iced up.

X De-ice the windscreen (Y page 148).
There is dirt on the inside of the windscreen.

X Clean the inside of the windscreen (Y page 353).
Lane Tracking package Always pay attention to traffic conditions and

your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
General notes recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind and injure yourself and others.
Spot Assist (Y page 225) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 227). General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
Blind Spot Assist to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
Important safety notes 30 km/h. A warning display in the exterior
mirrors draws your attention to vehicles
G WARNING
detected in the monitored area. If you then
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
assist driving. It may fail to detect some vehi-
change lane, you will also receive an optical
cles and is no substitute for attentive driving.
and audible collision warning. For monitoring,
Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and traf- Active Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the
fic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow rear bumper.
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when driv-
only detect them too late.
ing, the radar sensor system must be activa-
Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors, ted (Y page 262) and operational.
strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,
The radar sensor system is automatically
rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles
deactivated near radio telescope facilities
are detected late or not at all.
(Y page 451).
Z
226 Driving systems
Monitoring range of the sensors Due to the nature of the system:

G WARNING Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles lane borders.
that approach and drive past at high speeds Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
Driving and parking
are not detected. There is no display and no alongside long vehicles, for example lor-
warning. ries, for a prolonged time.
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be pos- The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
sible to monitor the complete width of the are integrated into the sides of the rear
neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
the next lane may not be detected, especially dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
if they are driving in a staggered formation in The sensors must not be covered, for exam-
different lanes. This may be the case if vehi- ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-
cles are driving at the edge of their lane that lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-
is furthest away from your vehicle. age to the bumpers, have the function of the
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and sensors checked at a qualified specialist
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident not work properly.
and injure yourself and others.
Indicator and warning display
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the exterior
mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring
range are then not indicated.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
Example: Saloon
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next to
your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator
driving in the middle of their lane. This may lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-
be the case if there are vehicles at the edge low up to a speed of 30 km/h. At speeds
of their lane nearest your vehicle. above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp goes out
and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
Driving systems 227
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above the exterior mirrors.
30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre- To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist if:
sponding side lights up red. This warning Rthe key is in position 2 in the ignition
always occurs when a vehicle enters the blind
lock.
Driving and parking

spot monitoring range from behind or from
Rthe engine is not running.
the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the
warning only occurs if the difference in speed Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
is less than 12 km/h. has been established.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then Lane Keeping Assist
deactivated.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to G WARNING
the ambient light. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-
cle in its lane. It is only an aid and may detect
Collision warning the lane markings on the road incorrectly or
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range not at all.
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the The system may be impaired or may not func-
corresponding turn signal, a double warning tion if:
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles
cient illumination of the road, or due to
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
snow, rain, fog or spray.
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
Switching on Blind Spot Assist the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.
X Make sure that the radar sensor system Rthe windscreen is dirty, misted up or cov-
(Y page 262) and Blind Spot Assist ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity
(Y page 257) are activated in the on-board of the camera
computer. Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition are present.
lock. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
light up red for approximately Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected.
Towing a trailer
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
e.g. near roadworks.
correctly established the electrical connec-
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
tion. This can be accomplished by checking
the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is then lanes branch off, cross one another or
deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yel- merge.
low in the exterior mirrors and the message: Rthe road is narrow and winding.
Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and
able See Owner's Manual appears in the traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
multifunction display. attentive driving. You are responsible for the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and
Z
228 Driving systems
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving Activating Lane Keeping Assist
style to suit the prevailing road and weather
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
you may fail to recognise dangers in time,
Driving and parking
cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-

ers.
General notes Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 257).
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
display.
If you are driving faster than 60 km/h and
lane markings are detected, symbol : is
highlighted. Lane Keeping Assist is ready
for use.
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in Standard
front of your vehicle by means of a cam-
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
era : at the top of the windscreen. Lane
occurs if:
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
road and warns you before you leave your
this case, the warnings are suppressed for
lane unintentionally.
a certain period of time.
If you have selected km as the display unit in Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
the Display unit Speed-/odome‐
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
ter(Y page 258) function in the on-board
computer, Lane Keeping Assist assists you at Adaptive
speeds above 60 km/h. If miles is selected If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration
as the display unit, the assistance range occurs if:
starts at 40 mph.
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
A warning may be given if a front wheel this case, the warnings are suppressed for
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you a certain period of time.
by means of intermittent vibration in the
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lane quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when nec-

essary and in good time if you cross the lane
Driving systems 229
marking, the system recognises certain con- conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
ditions and warns you accordingly. conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
The warning vibration occurs earlier if: you may fail to recognise dangers in time,
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-
bend. ers.
Driving and parking

Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
General notes
way.
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.
system to monitor the area to the sides of
The warning vibration occurs later if: your vehicle which are behind the driver. A
Rthe road has narrow lanes. warning display in the exterior mirrors draws
Ryou
your attention to vehicles detected in the
cut the corner on a bend.
monitored area. If you then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lane, you
will also receive an optical and audible warn-
Active Driving Assistance package
ing. If a risk of lateral collision is detected,
General notes corrective braking may help you avoid a col-
lision. To support the course-correcting brake
The Active Driving Assistance package con- application, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the
sists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 195), Active forward-facing radar sensor system. The free
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229) and Active space in the direction of travel is then evalu-
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 232). ated.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
Active Blind Spot Assist
speed of approximately 30 km/h.
Important safety notes The radar sensor system is switched off auto-
matically in the vicinity of radio telescope
G WARNING
facilities (Y page 451).
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and may
For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or not
when driving, the radar sensor system must
at all.
be activated (Y page 262) and operational.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if: Monitoring range
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, G WARNING
rain, fog or spray. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain
Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty. areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar- Vehicles that approach and drive past at high
row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, speeds are not detected. No visual nor audi-
or only detect them too late. It cannot detect ble warnings are emitted and the system does
vehicles which are overtaken at a small dis- not brake the vehicle to correct your course.
tance and then enter the blind spot area. If the lanes are very wide, it may not be pos-
Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road sible to monitor the complete width of the
and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for neighbouring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
attentive driving. You are responsible for the the next lane may not be detected, especially
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and if they are driving in a staggered formation.
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving This may be the case if vehicles are driving at
style to suit the prevailing road and weather
Z
230 Driving systems
the edge of their lane that is furthest away radiator grille are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
from your vehicle. rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to a severe impact or in the event of damage to
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident the bumpers, have the function of the radar
Driving and parking
and injure yourself and others. sensors checked at a qualified specialist

workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may oth-
erwise no longer work properly.
Indicator and warning display
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
below 30 km/h. The indicator lamps in the
exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles in the
monitoring range are then not indicated.
recognise dangers in time and cause an acci-
dent and injure yourself and others.
Example: Saloon
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up
to 3.0 m behind your vehicle and directly next
to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For
this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses
radar sensors in the rear bumper.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may If Active Blind Spot Assist is switched on,
be the case if there are vehicles at the inner indicator lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
edge of your lane. up yellow up to a speed of 30 km/h. At
Due to the nature of the system: speeds above 30 km/h, the indicator lamp
goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
operational.
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
lane borders.
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
30 km/h, warning lamp : on the corre-
alongside long vehicles, for example lor- sponding side lights up red. This warning
ries, for a prolonged time. always occurs when a vehicle enters the
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are blind-spot monitoring range from behind or
integrated into the front and rear bumpers from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
and behind a cover in the radiator grille. Make the warning only occurs if the difference in
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the speed is less than 12 km/h.
Driving systems 231
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse

gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is
then no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
Driving and parking

the ambient light.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
When you switch on the turn signals to
change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the
side monitoring range, you receive a visual
and acoustic collision warning. You then hear
a double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,
detected vehicles are indicated by the flash-
ing of red warning lamp :. There are no fur-
ther warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-
G WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute lateral collision in the monitoring range, a
for attentive driving. Automatic braking by the course-correcting brake application is carried
system may not always be sufficient to avoid out. This is designed to help you avoid a col-
a collision. In such cases, you need to steer, lision.
brake or accelerate yourself. If a course-correcting brake application
In very rare cases, the system may detect a occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
risk of collision where there is none and brake exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
in error near crash barriers or similar road sounds. The display shown in the illustration
boundaries. Active Blind Spot Assist cannot also appears in the multifunction display.
detect all traffic situations and road users. The course-correcting brake application is
Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat- available in the speed range between
eral distance between you and other road 30 km/h and 200 km/h.
users or obstacles. You can, for example, Either no braking application, or a course-
countersteer gently or depress the accelera- correcting brake application adapted to the
tor pedal at any time to cancel inappropriate driving situation occurs, if:
braking action. Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
You are responsible for the vehicle's speed, barriers, on both sides of your vehicle.
correct steering and for braking in good time. Ra vehicle approaches too closely on the
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
side.
prevailing road and weather conditions.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to high cornering speeds.
Ryou brake or accelerate decisively.
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
and injure yourself and others. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
Z
232 Driving systems
RESP® is deactivated. Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane

Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is are present.
detected. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Activating Active Blind Spot Assist
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Driving and parking
X Make sure that the radar sensor system

small and as a result the lane markings can-
(Y page 262) and Active Blind Spot Assist
not be recognised.
(Y page 257) are activated in the on-board
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,
computer.
e.g. near roadworks.
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors branch off, cross, or merge.
Rthe road is narrow and winding.
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect
road and traffic conditions. It is not a substi-
Towing a trailer tute for attentive driving. You are responsible
If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have for the vehicle's speed, braking in good time,
correctly established the electrical connec- and steering correctly. Always adapt your
tion. This can be accomplished by checking driving style to suit the prevailing road and
the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is weather conditions. Always pay attention to
then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up traffic conditions and your surroundings. Oth-
yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active erwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in
Blind Spot Assist currently unavail‐ time, cause an accident and injure yourself
able See Owner's Manual message and others.
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and
may detect the lane markings on the road
incorrectly or not at all.
The system may be impaired or may not func-
tion if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to inade- Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area
quate illumination of the road surface, in front of your vehicle by means of a cam-
snow, rain, fog or spray. era : at the top of the windscreen. Active
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on
the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. the road and warns you before you leave your
Rthe windscreen is dirty, fogged up or cov- lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
ered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity warning, a lane-correcting application of the
of the camera. brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane.
Driving systems 233
If you have chosen the function Display tly at any time to cancel inappropriate braking
unit Speed-/odometer:(Y page 258) in action, e.g. if you intentionally drive across a
the on-board computer and selected km as solid lane marking.
the unit of measurement, Active Lane Keep- Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
ing Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. weather conditions into account.
Driving and parking

If the Miles display unit is selected, the assis-
You are responsible for the vehicle's speed,
tance range begins at 40 mph.
correct steering and for braking in good time.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel Always adapt your driving style to suit the
A warning may be given if a front wheel prevailing road and weather conditions.
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
by means of intermittent vibration in the your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. recognise dangers in time, cause an accident
In order that you are warned only when nec-
essary and in good time if you cross the lane
marking, the system recognises certain con-
ditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a motor-
way. sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever
Rthe system recognises solid lane markings.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
The warning vibration occurs later if: the display shown in the illustration appears
Rthe road has narrow lanes. in the multifunction display.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend. If you leave your lane under certain circum-
stances, the vehicle will brake briefly on one
Lane-correcting brake application side. This is designed to help you bring the
G WARNING vehicle back into the original lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep This function is available in the range between
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid 60 km/h and 200 km/h.
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute A lane-correcting brake application can only
for attentive driving. Corrective braking may be made after driving over a solid, recognis-
not always be sufficient to return your vehicle able lane marking. Before this, a warning
to its original lane. In such cases, you must must be emitted by means of intermittent
steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a
does not leave the lane. lane with lane markings on both sides must
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect the be recognised. The brake application also
current traffic situation or other road users. slightly reduces driving speed.
Ensure at all times that there is sufficient lat- i A further lane-correcting brake applica-
eral distance between you and other road tion can only occur after your vehicle has
users or obstacles. In rare cases, broken lines returned to the original lane.
or certain structures on the road surface may
be detected by the system as solid lane mark-
ings. You can, for example, countersteer gen-
Z
234 Towing a trailer
No lane-correcting brake application occurs X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
if: the on-board computer; to do so, select
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake, or Standard or Adaptive(Y page 257).
accelerate. Symbol : appears in the multifunction
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. display.
Driving and parking
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. If you are driving faster than 60km/h and
lane markings are detected, symbol : is
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
highlighted. Active Lane Keeping Assist is
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind ready for use.
Spot Assist.
If Standard is selected, no warning vibra-
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
tion occurs if:
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
this case, the warnings are suppressed
Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the
for a certain period of time.
electrical connection to the trailer has been
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
correctly established.
RESP® is deactivated.
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
tion occurs if:
Ra loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
has been detected and displayed. this case, the warnings are suppressed
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect for a certain period of time.
road and traffic conditions. An inappropriate Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
brake application may be interrupted at any
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
time if:
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou steer slightly in the opposite direction. Ryou brake hard.
Ryou use a turn signal. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
an obstacle or change lane quickly.
A lane-correcting brake application is inter- Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
rupted automatically if:
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as Towing a trailer
ESP®, PRE-SAFE®Brake or Active Blind If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
Spot Assist. correctly established the electrical connec-
Rlane markings can no longer be recognised. tion. This can be accomplished by checking
the trailer lighting.
Activating Active Lane Keeping Assist
Towing a trailer
G WARNING
The braking system can overheat if you leave
your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- This increases the braking distance and could
even cause the braking system to fail. There
Towing a trailer 235
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
not simultaneously depress both the brake you do not couple the trailer to the towing
pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
detached.
G WARNING Make sure that the following values are not
Driving and parking

You could lose control of the vehicle/trailer exceeded:
combination if it begins to swerve. The vehi- Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
cle/trailer combination could even overturn. Rthe permissible trailer load
There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
On no account should you attempt to vehicle
straighten out the vehicle/trailer combina-
Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
tion by increasing speed. Decrease your
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
speed and do not countersteer. Brake if nec-
trailer
essary.
You will find the applicable permissible val-
G WARNING ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi-
cle documents.
If you exceed the permissible noseweight
while carrying a load, the carrier system could You will find the values approved by the man-
detach from the vehicle and fall on the road. ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates
There is a risk of an accident and injury. and those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech-
nical data" section (Y page 448).
Always maintain the permissible noseweight
when carrying loads. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
characteristics will be different in comparison
G WARNING to when driving without a trailer.
If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, it The vehicle/trailer combination:
could detach while driving and fall on the road. Ris heavier
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi-
Engage the ball coupling as described. ent-climbing capability
Rhas an increased braking distance
G WARNING Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged, Rdemands more sensitive steering
the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an
Rhas a larger turning circle
accident.
Always engage the ball coupling as described. This could impair the handling characteris-
tics. Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Maintain a safe distance. Drive carefully.
results in excessive and premature wear to When towing a trailer, always adjust your
the brake pads. speed to the current road and weather con-
You can use carrier systems, e.g. bicycle ditions. Do not exceed the maximum permis-
racks or load-bearing implements, on the ball sible speed for your vehicle/trailer combina-
coupling. The maximum noseweight of tion.
75 kg applies when using carrier systems on
the ball coupling.
When reversing the vehicle towards the
trailer, make sure there is nobody between
the trailer and the vehicle.
Z
236 Towing a trailer
Notes on towing a trailer prescribed maximum speed in the relevant

country.
General notes For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the max-
! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as imum permissible rear axle load is increased
possible to the maximum permissible nose- when towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technical
Driving and parking
weight. Do not use a noseweight of less data" section to find out whether this applies
than 50kg, otherwise the trailer may come to your vehicle. If you utilise any of the added
loose. maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer,
Note that the payload and the rear axle load the vehicle/trailer combination may not
are reduced by the actual payload. exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for
reasons concerning the operating permit.
i When towing a trailer, set the tyre pres- This also applies in countries in which the
sure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle permissible maximum speed for vehicle/
for a maximum load; see the tyre pressure trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 383). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
You will find installation dimensions and loads characteristics will be different in comparison
in the "Technical data" section to when driving without a trailer and it will
(Y page 447). consume more fuel.
The maximum noseweight of the trailer draw- Change into a lower gear in good time on long
bar on the ball coupling is 84 kg. The actual and steep downhill gradients.
noseweight may however not be higher than On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
the value which is given on the trailer tow cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer,
hitch or trailer identification plates. The low- you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3.
est weight applies.
i This also applies if you have activated
Missing values for the E 300 model were not
cruise control, SPEEDTRONIC or DIS-
available at the time of going to print.
TRONIC PLUS.
Please note that when towing a trailer, PARK-
TRONIC (Y page 211), Parking Guidance This will use the braking effect of the engine,
(Y page 215) and Blind Spot Assist so less braking will be required to prevent the
(Y page 225) are only available with limita- vehicle from gaining speed. This relieves the
tions, or not at all. load on the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
i On vehicles without level control, the quickly. If you need additional braking,
height of the ball coupling will alter accord- depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather
ing to the load placed on the vehicle. If nec- than continuously.
essary, use a trailer with a height-adjusta-
ble drawbar. Driving tips
Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side:

X Do not accelerate.
i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi-
lisation (Y page 75).
X Do not countersteer.
X Brake if necessary.
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/
trailer combinations depends on the type of
trailer. Before beginning the journey, check
the trailer's documents to see what the max-
imum permitted speed is. Observe the legally
RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-

cle in front than when driving without a
trailer.
RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
Driving and parking

Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
RThe values given for gradient-climbing
capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
level. When driving in mountainous areas,
note that the power output of the engine,
and consequently the vehicle's gradient- Saloon
climbing capability, decrease with increas-
ing altitude. Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,
you must fold out the ball coupling.
The release wheel is located behind the left-
Folding out the ball coupling hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
compartment.
G WARNING To open the cover (Saloon):
If the ball coupling is not correctly engaged,
the trailer can detach. There is a risk of an X Slide luggage net ; down.
accident. X Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold
Always engage the ball coupling as described. down cover =.
G WARNING
If you release the ball coupling or it does not
engage correctly when folding in, it will swing
out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling,
there is an increased risk of an accident and
injury.
Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting
range is unobstructed. Always make sure that
the ball coupling engages when folding in.
G WARNING Estate
Vehicles with HYBRID: ensure that you read Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,
the "HYBRID" supplement. You may otherwise you must fold out the ball coupling.
fail to recognise dangers. The release wheel is located behind the left-
hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
compartment.
To open the cover (Estate):
X Pull handle : in the direction of the arrow
and fold down cover ;.
Z
238
Driving and parking Towing a trailer
Saloon X Pull the ball coupling in the direction of the

arrow until it engages in a vertical position.
To release and fold out the ball coupling
Saloon: indicator lamp ? goes out.
(Saloon):
Estate: indicator lamp = goes out.
X Grip release wheel A so that your thumb
lies on the thumb rest. The multifunction display shows the
Check trailer hitch lock message
X Turn release wheel A anti-clockwise until
until the ball coupling is engaged.
the ball coupling releases and folds out
X Remove the protective covering from the
from under the rear bumper. Indicator
ball coupling and store it in a safe place.
lamp ? flashes.
X Make sure that the ball of the ball coupling
is clean and greased.
The power socket is integrated in the ball
coupling.
Coupling up a trailer
G WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-
run brake, you could trap your hand between
Estate the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses
a risk of injury.
To release and fold out the ball coupling
(Estate): Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged
overrun brake.
X Grip release wheel ? so that your thumb
lies on the thumb rest. X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
X Turn release wheel ? anti-clockwise until tion P.
the ball coupling releases and folds out X Apply the parking brake.
from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
= flashes. X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electrical connection
between the vehicle and the trailer.
X Check that the trailer lighting system is
working.
Uncoupling a trailer X Place the protective covering on the ball

coupling.
G WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with an engaged over-
run brake, you could trap your hand between
Driving and parking

the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. This poses
a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer with an engaged
overrun brake.
G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
If you disconnect the trailer cable, the vehicle
is lowered. This can cause you or others to Saloon
become trapped between the vehicle body The release wheel is located behind the left-
and tyres, or underneath the vehicle. This hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
poses a risk of injury. compartment.
Make sure that no-one is in the immediate To open the cover (Saloon):
vicinity of the wheel arch or underneath the
X Slide luggage net ; down.
vehicle when disconnecting the trailer cable.
X Turn handle : anti-clockwise and fold
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an down cover =.
engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
ing of the overrun brake.
X Make sure that the transmission is in posi-
tion P.
X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
Estate
Folding in the ball coupling
The release wheel is located behind the left-
G WARNING hand side trim panel in the boot/luggage
If you release the ball coupling or it does not compartment.
engage correctly when folding in, it will swing To open the cover (Estate):
out. Within pivoting range of the ball coupling, X Pull handle : in the direction of the arrow
there is an increased risk of an accident and
and fold down cover ;.
injury.
Only release the ball coupling if the pivoting
range is unobstructed. Always make sure that
the ball coupling engages when folding in.
Z
240
Driving and parking Towing a trailer
Saloon X Press the ball coupling in the direction of

To release and lower the ball coupling the arrow until it engages behind the
(Saloon): bumper.
Saloon: indicator lamp ? and the display
X Grasp release wheel A with your hand
in the multifunction display go out.
such that the thumb is in the thumb rest
and turn it anti-clockwise. Estate: indicator lamp = and the display
The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indi- in the multifunction display go out.
cator lamp ? flashes.
i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are
not using the trailer tow hitch.
Trailer power supply

! You can connect accessories with a
power rating of up to 240 W to the perma-
nent power supply and with a power rating
of up to 180 W to the power supply that is
switched on via the ignition lock.
The trailer battery may not be charged from
Estate the power supply.
To release and lower the ball coupling X To switch the connected power supply
(Estate): on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock
to position 2 or 0 respectively
X Grasp release wheel ? with your hand
(Y page 161).
such that the thumb is in the thumb rest
and turn it anti-clockwise. When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's
The ball coupling unlocks and lowers. Indi- trailer socket is equipped with a permanent
cator lamp = flashes. power supply and a power supply that is
switched on via the ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 9.
The power supply that is switched on via the
ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket pin
10.
The trailer's permanent power supply is X Open the socket cover.

switched off in the event of low vehicle supply X Insert connector with lug : into
voltage and after six hours at the latest. groove ; of the socket. Turn the connec-
You can find more information about instal- tor clockwise to the stop.
ling the trailer electrics at a qualified special- X Let the cover engage.
Driving and parking

ist workshop.
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
Bulb failure indicator for LED lamps
i If LED lamps are fitted in the trailer, an
error message may appear in the multi-
function display even if there is no fault. The
reason for the error message could be that
the current has fallen below the minimum
of 50 mA.
To ensure reliable operation of the bulb failure
indicator, each LED chain in the trailer lighting
must be guaranteed a minimum current of
50 mA.
Trailer with 7-pin connector

General notes
Trailers with 7-pin connector: you can
make a connection to the 13-pin connector
on the ball coupling using an adapter plug or,
if necessary, an adapter cable. Both can be
obtained in a qualified specialist workshop.
Fitting the adapter

! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
play so that the cable cannot become
detached when cornering.
Z
242
243
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 245
Menus and submenus ...................... 249
Display messages ............................. 268
Indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 298
244 Important safety notes
Useful information G WARNING

The operating safety of your vehicle could be

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- impaired if maintenance work is carried out
els, series and optional equipment for your incorrectly. This could cause you to lose con-
vehicle that were available at the time of trol of your vehicle and cause an accident.
going to press. National variations are pos- Moreover, the safety systems may no longer
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be be able to protect you or others as they are
equipped with all of the functions descri- designed to do.
bed. This is also the case for systems and Always have service work carried out at a
functions relevant to safety. qualified specialist workshop.
ist workshops: (Y page 25). G WARNING
Important safety notes fail to recognise dangers.
G WARNING For an illustration of the instrument cluster,

see (Y page 32).
Only use the on-board computer when road
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
trate properly on driving, and could cause an
accident.
G WARNING
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such as
speed, outside temperature, warning and indi-
cator lamps, display messages or system fail-
ures. Driving characteristics may be impaired.
Adjust your driving style and vehicle speed
accordingly.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
G WARNING
The on-board computer only records and dis-
plays malfunctions and warnings from certain
systems. For this reason, you should always
make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You
could otherwise cause an accident by driving
an unsafe vehicle.
Displays and operation 245
Displays and operation

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster: kilometres

: Fuel gauge
; Time
= Speedometer with segments (Y page 247)
? Multifunction display (Y page 248)
A Rev counter (Y page 247)
B Coolant temperature (Y page 246)
C Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 246)
Z
246
On-board computer and displays Displays and operation
Instrument cluster: miles

: Fuel gauge
; Time
= Speedometer with segments (Y page 247)
? Multifunction display (Y page 248)
A Rev counter (Y page 247)
B Coolant temperature (Y page 246)
C Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 246)
i You can set the time using the audio system or COMAND Online; see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Instrument cluster lighting i The light sensor in the instrument cluster

automatically controls the brightness of
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the the multifunction display.
displays and the controls in the vehicle inte-
rior can be adjusted using the brightness con- In daylight, the displays in the instrument
trol knob. cluster are not illuminated.
The brightness control knob is on the bottom
left of the instrument cluster (Y page 32). Coolant temperature gauge
X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise
or anti-clockwise. The coolant temperature gauge is in the
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or instrument cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 32).
L, the brightness is dependant upon
the brightness of the ambient light. Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant tem-
perature may rise to 120 †.
Displays and operation 247
At high outside temperatures and when driv- The segments between the speed of the

ing uphill, the coolant temperature may rise vehicle in front and the stored speed light
to the end of the scale. up.
Rev counter Operating the on-board computer

! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Overview
Doing so will damage the engine.
The red band in the rev counter indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

G WARNING
At temperatures just above freezing point, the
street may be icy, especially in wooded areas
or on bridges. If you do not adapt your driving
style to the conditions, the vehicle could skid.
For this reason, adapt your driving style and
speed to the weather conditions.
: Multifunction display
The outside temperature display is in the mul-
; Right control panel
tifunction display (Y page 248).
= To switch on LINGUATRONIC; see the sep-
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay. arate operating instructions
? Back button
A Left control panel
Speedometer with segments X To activate the on-board computer: turn
The segments in the speedometer indicate the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
which speed range is available. You can control the multifunction display and
RCruise control activated (Y page 189): the settings in the on-board computer using
The segments light up from the stored the buttons on the multifunction steering
speed to the maximum speed. wheel.
RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated
(Y page 192):
The segments light up from the start of the
scale to the selected limit speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 195):
One or two segments in the set speed

range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
Z
248 Displays and operation
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute
9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls through lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off LINGUATRONIC;
a video scene see the separate operating
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial
: RIn
memory
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms selection/display mes-
sage
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialling the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel Example: DIRECT SELECT automatic transmission

multifunction display
~ RRejectsor ends a call : Description field
RExits
telephone book/redial ; Menu bar
memory
= Drive program (Y page 172)
6 RMakes or accepts a call ? Transmission position (Y page 171)
RSwitches to the redial memory
A Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 259)
X To show the menu bar ;: press the
= or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menus and submenus 249
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds. RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 254)

Text field : shows the selected menu or RAssist. menu (assistance) (Y page 255)
submenu as well as display messages. RServ. menu (Y page 257)
The following messages can appear in the RSettings menu (Y page 258)
multifunction display: RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 264)
Z Shift recommendation The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly
(Y page 170) in vehicles with an audio system and in vehi-
XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 215) cles with COMAND Online. The examples
¯ Cruise control (Y page 189) given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles
equipped with COMAND Online.
È SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 192)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 132) Trip menu
À ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 220) Standard display
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 164)
Ä Speed Limit Assist
(Y page 221)
Ã Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 227)
Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 232)
X Press and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with
ë HOLD function (Y page 205)
trip meter : and total distance
Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76) recorder ; is shown.
120 km/h! Maximum permissible speed
exceeded (only for certain coun-
Trip computer "From start" or "From
tries)
reset"
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select
a menu.
Example: "From start" trip computer
Operating the on-board computer
: Distance
(Y page 247).
; Time
Depending on the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus: = Average speed
RTrip
? Average fuel consumption
menu (Y page 249)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 251)
RAudio menu (Y page 252)
Z
250 Menus and submenus
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Displaying the range and current fuel
ing wheel to select the Trip menu. consumption

X Press the 9 or : button to select
From start or From reset.
The values in the From start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, whilst
the values in the From reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 251).
The From start trip computer is automati- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
cally reset if: ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more X Press the 9 or : button to select the
than four hours. current fuel consumption (not for AMG

R999 hours have been exceeded. vehicles) and the approximate range.
R9,999 kilometres have been exceeded. The approximate range which can be covered
The From reset trip computer is automati- depends on the fuel level and your current
cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours driving style. If there is only a small amount
or 99,999 kilometres. of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refuelled C instead of the
ECO display range.
Digital speedometer
Example: ECO display

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- : Shift recommendation (Y page 170)
ing wheel to select the Trip menu.
; Digital speedometer
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ECO DISPLAY. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
When the ignition is switched off for more
than four hours, the ECO display is automat-
ically reset. digital speedometer.
For further information on the ECO display, i If the gearshift recommendation is shown
see (Y page 185). in the multifunction display, it is not shown
in the status bar.
Resetting values Route guidance not active

Example: resetting the trip computer "From start" : Direction of travel
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ; Current street
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Activated route guidance
function that you wish to reset.
No change of direction announced
X Press the a button.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
Rtrip meter
Rtrip computer "From start" : Distance to the destination
Rtrip computer "From reset"
; Distance to the next change of direction
RECO display
= Current street
i If you reset the values in the ECO display, ? Symbol indicating "follow the road's
the values in the "From start" trip computer course"
will also be reset. If you reset the values in
the "From start" trip computer, the values Change of direction announced without a
in the ECO display will also be reset. lane recommendation
Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information on the navigation system, see the : Road to which the change of direction
separate operating instructions. leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
X Switch on the audio system with Becker®
distance display
MAP PILOT or COMAND Online; see the
separate operating instructions. = Change-of-direction symbol
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- When a change of direction has been
ing wheel to select the Navi menu. announced, you will see visual distance dis-
play ; next to the symbol for change of
direction =. This shortens from the bottom
Z
to the top of the display as you approach the Audio menu

point of the announced change of direction.

Selecting a radio station
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Waveband
; Station frequency with memory position
: Road to which the change of direction
leads i Station ; is displayed with the station
; Distance to change of direction and visual frequency or station name. The memory
distance display position is only displayed along with sta-
= Lane recommendation tion ; if this has been stored.
? Lane continues through change of direc- X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
tion Online and select Radio; see the separate
A New lane during a change of direction operating instructions.
B Change-of-direction symbol X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change X To select a stored station: briefly press
of direction. During the change of direction, the 9 or : button.

additional lanes may be displayed. X To select a station from the station
Lane recommendations are only displayed if list: press and briefly hold the 9
the relevant data is available on the digital or : button.
map. If no station list is received:
X To select a station using the station
Other status indicators of the naviga- search: press and briefly hold the 9
tion system or : button.
RO: you have reached the destination or an
i For information on switching wavebands
intermediate destination. and storing stations, see the separate oper-
RNew route... or Calculating route:
ating instructions.
calculating a new route
ROff map or Off road: the vehicle position
i DAB radio mode (Digital Audio Broadcast-
ing): see the separate operating instruc-
is outside the area of the digital map (off-
tions.
map position).
RNo route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
Audio player or audio media operation TV operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display : Channel frequency with memory position
: Current track i The memory position is only displayed
Audio data from various audio devices or along with station : if this has been
media can be played, depending on the equip- stored.
ment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on COMAND Online and select TV;
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND see the separate operating instructions.
Online and activate audio CD/DVD mode X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
or MP3 mode; see the separate operating ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
instructions. X To select a stored station: briefly press
X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
the 9 or : button.
ing wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a station from the station
X To select the next/previous track:
list: press and briefly hold the 9
briefly press the 9 or : button. or : button.
X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the i Storing a TV channel: see the separate
9 or : button until desired operating instructions.
track : has been reached. i Depending on the digital TV broadcaster,
If you press and hold the 9 or : but- radio stations can also be received. The
ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. multifunction display shows TV (RADIO).
Not all audio devices or media support this
function. Video DVD operation
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
The current track does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Example: CD/DVD changer display

: Current scene
X Switch on COMAND Online and select
video DVD; see the separate operating
instructions.
ing wheel to select the Audio menu.
Z
X To select the next or previous scene: or COMAND Online, the mobile phone
briefly press the 9 or : button. searches for a network.

X To select a scene from the scene list RTelephone ready or the name of the net-
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the work provider: the mobile phone has found
9 or : button until desired a network and is ready to receive.
scene : has been reached. RTelephone No service: there is no net-
work available or the mobile phone is
searching for a network.
Telephone menu i You can obtain further information about
Introduction suitable mobile phones and connecting
mobile phones via Bluetooth®:
G WARNING Rfrom any Mercedes Benz Service Centre
Observe the legal requirements of the country Ron the Internet at: http://
in which you are currently driving regarding
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
the use of mobile phones in the vehicle.
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while Accepting a call
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use
them when the road and traffic conditions
allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from
the traffic conditions, cause an accident and
injure yourself and others.
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-

arate operating instructions).
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Example: incoming call
Online; see the separate operating instruc- X Press the 6 button on the steering
tions. wheel to accept an incoming call.
X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket If someone calls you when you are in the
(Y page 334). Tel menu, a display message appears in the
or multifunction display.
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the You can accept a call even if you are not in
audio system or COMAND Online; see the the Tel menu.
separate operating instructions.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rejecting or ending a call
ing wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the ~ button on the steering
You will see one of the following display mes- wheel.
sages in the multifunction display:
You can end or reject a call even if you are not
RPlease enter PIN: the mobile phone has in the Tel menu.
been placed in the mobile phone bracket
and the PIN has not been entered. Dialling a number from the phone book
When you enter your PIN via the mobile
phone, LINGUATRONIC, the audio system
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Assistance menu

desired name.
or
Introduction
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialling. In the Assist. menu, you have the following
options:
or
Rshow Speed Limit Assist and activate/
X If there is more than one number for a
deactivate its message function
particular name: press the 6 or a
(Y page 255)
button to display the numbers.
Rshow the distance display (Y page 256)
Ractivate/deactivate ESP®(Y page 256)
number you want to dial.
Ractivate/deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
ling. (Y page 256)
Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST
or
(Y page 257)
X To exit the telephone book: press the
Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or
~ or % button.
Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 257)
Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or
Redialling Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 257)
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Speed Limit Assist
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Displaying Speed Limit Assist
ing wheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.
redial memory.
Speed Lim. Asst..
desired name or number.
X Press the 6 or a button to start dial-
Under certain conditions, detected speed
ling. limits are shown in the multifunction dis-
or play (Y page 221).
X To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button. Activating/deactivating the Speed Limit
Assist message function
Speed Lim. Asst..
Z
X Press the a button. Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-

The multifunction display shows Speed cles (Y page 74).

Limit Assist. For further information about ESP®, see
X Press the : button. (Y page 72).
The current selection is displayed. X Start the engine.
X To activate or deactivate: press a. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
If the Speed Limit Assist message function ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.
is activated, a detected speed limit is auto- X Press the 9 or : button to select
matically displayed for five seconds. Other
ESP.
items in the multifunction display are not
shown during this time.
The current selection is displayed.
If Speed Limit Assist is operational and the
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
message function is activated, the multifunc-
tion display shows the Ä symbol when the button again.
ignition is switched on. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up continu-
Showing the distance display ously when the engine is running.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If the ä warning lamp and the å warn-
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
available due to a malfunction.
Distance display. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-
lowing situations:
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display Rwhen using snow chains
appears in the multifunction display Rin deep snow
(Y page 202). Ron sand or gravel
If the Sensors deactivated message Observe the information on warning lamps

appears, the radar sensor system is deacti- (Y page 302).
vated. Observe the information on display messages
X Check whether or not the radar sensor sys- (Y page 269).
tem is permitted to be activated
(Y page 451). Activating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE®
X Switch on the radar sensor system Brake
(Y page 262).
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Deactivating/activating ESP® X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
G WARNING ing wheel to select the Assist. menu.
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- X Press the 9 or : button to select
bilises the vehicle. There is an increased risk PRE-SAFE Brake.
of skidding and an accident. X Press the a button.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- The current selection is displayed.
bed in the following. X To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the mul- X Press the a button.

tifunction display shows the Ä symbol as The current selection is displayed.
long as the HOLD function is not activated X To activate/deactivate: press the a
(Y page 205). button again.
Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if PARK- If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors deac‐
TRONIC is activated and you are driving at a tivated or Active blind spot assist.
speed under 35 km/h, the j Parking Guid- sensor system deactivated message
ance symbol is shown instead of the Ä appears, the radar sensor system is deacti-
symbol (Y page 215). vated.
If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors deacti‐ X Check whether or not the radar sensor sys-
vated message appears, the radar sensor tem may be activated (Y page 451).
system is deactivated.
X Activate the radar sensor system
X Check whether or not the radar sensor sys- (Y page 262).
tem may be activated (Y page 451).
For further information about Blind Spot
X Activate the radar sensor system
Assist, see (Y page 225).
(Y page 262).
For further information about Active Blind
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, Spot Assist, see (Y page 229).
see (Y page 76).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION Assist
ASSIST
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Assist. menu.
ing wheel to select the Assist. menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keep. Asst.
Attention Assist. X Press the a button.
X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed.
The current selection is displayed. X Press a to confirm.
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane
button again.
Keeping Assist is activated, the Ã symbol
When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the appears in the multifunction display when the
À symbol appears in the multifunction ignition is on.
display when the ignition is on. For further information about Active Lane
For further information about ATTENTION Keeping Assist, see (Y page 232).
ASSIST, see (Y page 220).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Service menu

Assist
Blind Spot Asst..
Z
In the Serv. menu, you have the following You can determine whether the multifunction
options: display shows some messages in miles or kil-

Rcall up display messages in the message ometres.
memory (Y page 268) X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Rrestart the tyre pressure loss warning sys- ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
tem (Y page 385) X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Rcheck the tyre pressure electronically Inst. cluster submenu.
(Y page 386) X Press a to confirm.
Rcall up when a service is due
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
(Y page 349)
Display unit Speed-/odometer: func-
tion.
You will see the selected setting: km or
Settings menu
miles.
Introduction X Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for dis-

tance applies to:
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rtotal distance recorder and the trip meter
Rtrip computer
Rcurrent consumption and the range
In the Settings menu, you have the following Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
options: menu
Rchange the instrument cluster settings Rcruise control
(Y page 258) RSPEEDTRONIC
Rchange the light settings (Y page 259) RDISTRONIC PLUS
Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 261) RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Rchange the auxiliary heating settings
(Y page 262) Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
Rchange the convenience settings
(Y page 263) Only vehicles with manual transmission have
Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 264)
this function.
The Addit. speedo [mph] function allows
you to choose whether the status area in the
Instrument cluster
multifunction display always shows the speed
Selecting the unit of measurement for dis- in mph instead of the outside temperature.
tance You can determine whether the multifunction
The Display unit Speed-/odometer: display permanently shows your speed or the
function allows you to choose whether cer- outside temperature.
tain displays appear in kilometres or miles in X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
the multifunction display. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Inst. cluster submenu.
X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the W symbol in the multifunction display

Addit. speedo (mph) function. are shown in red.
You will see the selected setting: on or X Press the a button to save the setting.
off.
Further information on daytime driving lights
X Press the a button to save the setting.
(Y page 125).
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this Switching the Intelligent Light System
function is not available. on/off
Selecting the permanent display function X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
You can determine whether the multifunction ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
display permanently shows your speed or the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
outside temperature. Light submenu.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press a to confirm.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Intell. Light System function.
Inst. cluster submenu. If the Intell. Light System function has
been switched on, the cone of light and the
L symbol in the multifunction display
are shown in red.
Permanent display: function.
You will see the selected setting: outside
temperature or Dig. speedo [mph]. When you activate Intell. Light System,
X Press the a button to save the setting. you activate the following functions:
Rmotorway mode
i Speed is displayed in mph. Ractive light function
i Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this Rcornering light function
function is unavailable. Rextended range foglamps
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for

lights driving on the right/left, the multifunction
display shows the Intell. Light System:
Switching the daytime driving lights on/
system inoperative Inactive for
off
left-side traffic or Intell. Light
The Day lights function can only be System: System inoperative Inactive
switched on with the engine turned off. for right-side traffic (Y page 260)
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- display message instead of the Intell.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. Light System function in the Light sub-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the menu.
Light submenu. Further information on the Intelligent Light
X Press a to confirm. System (Y page 130).
Day lights: function.
If the Day lights: function has been
switched on, the cone of light and the
Z
Setting the dipped-beam headlamps for Setting the brightness of the ambient
driving on the left/right lighting

X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light submenu. Light submenu.
X Press a to confirm. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Dipped beams Setting for: function. Amb. light +/- function.
You will see the selected setting: Right- You will see the selected setting.
side traffic or Left-side traffic. X Press a to confirm.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
If you change the setting, conversion does brightness to any level from Off to Level
not take place until the next time the vehi- 5 (bright).
cle is stationary. X Press the a or % button to save the
This function is only available on vehicles with setting.
the Intelligent Light System.
You can use this function to switch between Activating/deactivating the surround
symmetrical and asymmetrical dipped beam lighting and exterior lighting delayed
(Y page 124). switch-off
If you set the dipped-beam headlamps for X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
driving on the right/left, then motorway ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
mode and the extended range foglamps are X Press the : or 9 button to select the
unavailable. Light submenu.
A qualified specialist workshop can set the X Press a to confirm.
dipped-beam headlamps for driving on the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
right or left .
Surround lighting function.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ When the Surround lighting function is
off activated, the light cone and the area
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- around the vehicle are displayed in red in
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. the multifunction display.
Light submenu. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-
X Press a to confirm. rior lighting temporarily:
X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to
Adapt. main beam function. position 0 in the ignition lock.
If the Adapt. main beam function has X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
been switched on, the cone of light and the lock.
_ symbol in the upper multifunction The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
display are shown in red. deactivated.
X Press the a button to save the setting. Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
For further information about Adaptive High- reactivated the next time you start the
beam Assist, see (Y page 132). engine.
If you have activated the Surround light‐ Vehicle

ing function and the light switch is set to
Ã, the following functions are activated Setting permanent SPEEDTRONIC
when it is dark: X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking X Press the : or 9 button to select the
with the key. If you start the engine, the Vehicle submenu.
surround lighting is switched off and auto- X Press a to confirm.
matic headlamp mode is activated X Press the : or 9 button to select the
(Y page 125).
Limit speed (winter tyres): function.
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
You will see the current setting.
exterior lighting remains lit for
60 seconds after the engine is switched off.
If you close all the doors and the boot lid/ X Press the : or 9 button to adjust
tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after permanent SPEEDTRONIC in increments of
5 seconds. ten (230 km/h to 160 km/h). The Off set-
ting switches permanent SPEEDTRONIC
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, off.
when the surround lighting and delayed
X Press the a button to store the entry.
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-
lowing light up: For further information on permanent SPEED-
Rside lamps TRONIC (Y page 195).
Rfoglamps
Switching the automatic locking feature
Rdipped-beam headlamps on/off
Rdaytime driving lights X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
Rsurround lighting in the exterior mirrors ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off Vehicle submenu.
If you activate the Lighting delayed sw.-
off function, the interior lighting remains on X Press the : or 9 button to select the
for 20seconds after you remove the key from Auto. door locks function.
the ignition lock. When the Automatic door locks func-
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- tion is activated, the vehicle doors are dis-
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. played in red in the multifunction display.
Light submenu. If you activate the Automatic door locks
X Press a to confirm. function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 15 km/h.
Light. delay function. For further information on the automatic lock-
When the Lighting delayed sw.-off ing feature, see (Y page 90).
function is activated, the vehicle interior is
displayed in red in the multifunction dis-
play.
Z
Activating/deactivating the acoustic RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 225)

locking confirmation RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229)

If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the Heating
vehicle.
Auxiliary heating departure time
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. G WARNING
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
Vehicle submenu. ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should
therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in
confined spaces without an extraction sys-
Acoustic Lock function. tem, e.g. a garage.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction dis- G WARNING
play lights up red. When operating the auxiliary heating parts of
X Press the a button to save the setting. the vehicle can get very hot. Make sure that
the exhaust system does not under any cir-
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor cumstances come into contact with easily
system ignitable material such as dry grass or fuels.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- The material could otherwise ignite and set
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. the vehicle alight. Choose your parking spot
X Press the : or 9button to select the accordingly.
Vehicle submenu. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus pro-
X Press a to confirm. hibited at filling stations or when your vehicle
is being refuelled. You must therefore switch
off the auxiliary heating at filling stations.
Radar sensor (See Owner's Man.):.
You will see the selected setting: on or ! Operating the auxiliary heating/ventila-
off. tion draws on the vehicle battery. After you
X Press the a button to save the setting. have heated or ventilated the vehicle a
maximum of two times, drive for a longer
i You must deactivate the radar sensor sys- distance.
tem in certain countries and near radio
telescope facilities. For further informa- This function is only available on vehicles with
tion, see (Y page 451). auxiliary heating (Y page 151).
In the Heating submenu, you can select a
When you are close to radio telescope facili-
stored departure time or change a departure
ties, the radar sensor system will be deacti-
time.
vated automatically.
The auxiliary heating timer function calcu-
The following systems are switched off when
lates the switch-on time according to the out-
the radar sensor system is deactivated:
side temperature so that the vehicle is pre-
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 195) heated by the departure time. When the
RBAS PLUS (Y page 71) departure time is reached, the auxiliary heat-
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76) ing continues to heat for a further five
minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary
heating adopts the THERMATIC or X Press the : or 9 button to set the

THERMOTRONIC temperature setting. selected display.
You can switch off the auxiliary heating by X Press the a button to store the entry.
using the remote control or the auxiliary heat- The yellow indicator lamp on the auxiliary
ing button on the centre console. heating button lights up.
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly
once a month for about ten minutes. Convenience
Selecting the departure time or deactivat- Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ing a selected departure time ENTRY/EXIT feature
G WARNING
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. The steering wheel moves when the EASY-
X Press the : or 9 button to select the ENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk
Heating submenu. of occupants becoming trapped. Before acti-
X Press a to confirm. vating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make
You will see the selected setting. sure that nobody can become trapped.
X Press a to confirm. Do not leave children unsupervised in the
X Press the : or 9 button to select
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could open the
one of the three departure times or Timer
driver's door and thereby unintentionally acti-
off (no timer active).
vate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and
become trapped.
If a departure time is selected, the yellow
indicator lamp lights up on the auxiliary X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
heating button. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Changing the departure time
Convenience submenu.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Easy Entry/Exit: function.
Heating submenu.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa-
ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed
You will see the selected setting. in red in the multifunction display.
X Press the : or 9 button to select A,
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
B or Change C. feature (Y page 118).
You can now change the departure time. Switching the belt adjustment on/off
X Press the = or ; button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
display to be changed: hours, minutes. ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
Convenience submenu.
Z
X Press the : or 9 button to select the You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
Belt adjustment function. using button :.

When the Belt adjustment function is
activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed Resetting to factory settings
in red in the multifunction display.
ing wheel to select the Settings menu.
For further information on belt adjustment, X Press the : or 9 button to select the
see (Y page 52). Factory setting submenu.
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- X Press a to confirm.
ing function on/off The Reset all settings? message
This function is only available on vehicles with appears.
Memory Function (Y page 121). X Press the : or 9 button to select
When you activate the Auto. fold in func- No or Yes.

tion, the exterior mirrors are folded in when X Press the a button to confirm the selec-
the vehicle is locked. When you unlock the tion.
vehicle and then open a door, the exterior If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
mirrors fold out again. display shows a confirmation message.
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- For safety reasons, not all functions are reset:
ing wheel to select the Settings menu. the Limit speed (winter tyres) function
X Press the : or 9 button to select the in permanent SPEEDTRONIC can only be set
Convenience submenu. in the Vehicle submenu. If you want to reset
X Press a to confirm. the Daytime driving lights in the Light
submenu, you must turn the key to position
Auto. fold in function.
If the Auto. fold in function is activated,
the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in AMG menu in AMG vehicles
red in the multifunction display.
X Press the a button to save the setting. AMG displays
: Digital speedometer
; Gear indicator
= Upshift indicator
? Engine oil temperature
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
A Coolant temperature
If you have switched the Auto. fold in
B ECO start/stop function status indicator
function on and you fold the exterior mirrors
(Y page 165)
in using button :, they will not fold out auto-
matically (Y page 119).
X Press the = or ; button on the steer- RACETIMER

ing wheel to select the AMG menu.
Displaying and starting the RACETIMER
Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range
when in the manual gearshift program.
Upshift indicator UP= fades out other mes-
sages until you have shifted up.
If the engine oil temperature is below 80 †,
the oil temperature is shown in blue. Avoid
using the full output of the engine during this : Lap
time. ; RACETIMER
SETUP You can start the RACETIMER when the

engine is running or if the key is in position
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
: Drive program (C/SS+/M) RACETIMER.
; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
mode (SPORT) Displaying the intermediate time
= Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/
SPORT+)
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
suspension tuning.
ing wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the = or ; button to select
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until Interm. Time.
SETUP is displayed. X Press a to confirm.
or The intermediate time is displayed for five
X Briefly press the AMG button on the centre seconds.
console (Y page 210).
Z
Starting a new lap Deleting all laps

: RACETIMER If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER

; Fastest lap time (best lap) is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
= Lap deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
i It is possible to store a maximum of six- does not have to be reset.
teen laps. Lap 16 can only be stopped with X Reset the current lap.
Finish Lap. X Press a to confirm Reset.
Stopping the RACETIMER Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-

function display.
X Press the : button to select Yes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall evaluation
X Press the % button on the steering

wheel.
X Press a to confirm Yes.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop

the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in
the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position
: RACETIMER overall evaluation
2 or 3 and then press a to confirm
; Total time driven
Start, timing is continued.
= Average speed
Resetting the current lap ? Distance covered
X Stop the RACETIMER.
A Maximum speed
X Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap. This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
overall evaluation is shown.
Lap evaluation

: Lap
; Lap time
= Average lap speed
? Lap length
A Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
Z
268 Display messages
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ
from the symbols in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Owner's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 205)
RParking (Y page 183)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-
play messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-
sages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages 269
Safety systems

!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-

gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill
currently unavail‐ start assist and ESP® trailer stabilisation are temporarily unavail-
able See Owner's able.
Manual
The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist
and ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.
inoperative See
Owner's Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the J, ä, å and ! warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
Z


increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.
inoperative See
Owner's Manual The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
also have failed.
In addition, the ä and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function may not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-
SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabi-
÷ lisation are unavailable due to a malfunction.
inoperative See The adaptive brake lights, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may
Owner's Manual also have failed.
In addition, the ä, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
increase.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
Release parking X Release the parking brake.
brake
J or
Vehicles with manual transmission: with the HOLD function acti-
Brake immediately vated, you have either:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet.
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock

the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disap-
pears.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183).
You can restart the engine.
Z

J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

In addition, the red J warning lamp lights up in the instrument
Check brake fluid
cluster and a warning tone sounds.
level
G WARNING
The braking efficiency may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This does not correct the error.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check brake pad
wear
PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
inoperative See safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
Owner's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
Functions cur‐ Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
rently limited See Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty.
Owner's Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-
tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
goes out.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers
(Y page 354).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 74).
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a fault. BAS PLUS or the

Functions cur‐ distance warning signal may also have failed.
rently limited See X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Owner's Manual
ü If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has been inserted into a rear seat belt buckle.
For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts: (Y page 54).
Z

ý If the symbol appears in the multifunction display, a seat belt

tongue has not been inserted in a rear seat belt buckle.
G WARNING
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been
engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot provide the
intended level of protection.
This poses an increased risk of injury.
X If necessary, ask the occupants in the rear to fasten their seat
belts (Y page 52).
For further information on the status indicator for the rear seat
belts, (Y page 54).
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-
Restraint syst. ter.
malfunction Con‐
sult workshop G WARNING
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,

see (Y page 43).
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front left malfunc‐
tion Consult work‐ G WARNING
shoporFront right The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
malfunction Con‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
sult workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.
6 G WARNING
Rear left malfunc‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tion Consult work‐ tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
shop or Rear right This poses an increased risk of injury.
malfunction Con‐ SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
sult workshop warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

6 G WARNING
Rear centre mal‐ The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
function Consult tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
workshop This poses an increased risk of injury.
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear centre. The 6 warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window-

bag.
Left windowbag mal‐ The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
function Consult
workshop or Right G WARNING
windowbag malfunc‐ The left or right windowbag may either be triggered unintentionally
tion Consult work‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
shop
lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
Left cornering
(Y page 135).
light or Right cor‐
nering light or
b The left or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Left dipped beam
(Y page 135).
or Right dipped
beam or
b The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.

X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.
Trailer left tail
lamp or Trailer or
right tail lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.

Trailer left indi‐
cator or Trailer or
right indicator X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

Trailer brake lamp
or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Rear left indica‐
(Y page 135).
tor or Rear right
indicator or
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.

Front left indica‐
(Y page 135).
tor or Front right
indicator or
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

faulty.
Left mirror indica‐ X
Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
tor or Right mir‐
(Y page 135).
ror indicator
or
b The third brake lamp is faulty.

Third brake lamp
(Y page 135).
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is faulty.

Left-hand tail
(Y page 135).
lamp/brake
lamporRight-hand or
tail lamp/brake X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
lamp

b The left or right-hand high beam is faulty.
Left main
(Y page 135).
beamorRight main
beam or
b The left or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.

Left licence plate
(Y page 135).
lamporRight
licence plate lamp or
b The left-hand or right-hand front foglamp is faulty.

Left fog lamp or
(Y page 135).
Right fog lamp
or
b The rear foglamp is faulty.

Rear fog lamp
(Y page 135).
or
b The front left or front right parking lamp is faulty.

Front left parking
(Y page 135).
lamp or Front
right parking lamp or
b The left or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.

Left revers. lamp
(Y page 135).
or Right revers.
lamp or
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is faulty.

Rear left side
(Y page 135).
marker lamp or
Rear right side or
marker lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

b The left-hand or right-hand daytime driving lamp is faulty.

Left daytime driv‐
(Y page 135).
ing lamp or Right
daytime driving or
lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The Intelligent Light System is faulty. The lights remain available

without the Intelligent Light System.
Intell. Light Sys‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tem inoperative
b The exterior lighting is faulty.

Malfunction See
Owner's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 375).
X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes
as you do so.
b The light sensor is faulty.

AUTO lights inoper‐
ative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch off lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Main-beam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-

Assist currently ative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windscreen.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Main-beam Assist available again message
is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine

+ The coolant level is too low.
Top up coolant See ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Owner's Manual cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing
so (Y page 348).
X If the coolant needs topping up more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

? The coolant is too hot.

A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Stop vehi‐
cle Switch engine G WARNING
off Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine
is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which
can occur just by opening the bonnet.
This poses a risk of injury.
X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
fic conditions, and switch off the engine.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by frozen slush.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is under 120 †. The engine may
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The reading may rise up to 120 † under normal driving conditions
if the coolant has been filled correctly.
Z

# The battery is not being charged.

Possible causes:
Rfaulty alternator
Rtorn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics

X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check eng. oil
X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
lev. when next
refuelling (Y page 347).
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 347).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

X Check the oil level when next refuelling, at the latest
Add 1 litre engine
(Y page 347).
oil when next refu‐
X If necessary, top up the engine oil (Y page 347).
elling
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated when the fuel level
Reserve fuel level drops into the reserve range.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
The auxiliary heating cannot be operated.
X Refuel at the nearest filling station without fail.
¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must
be replaced.
Please replace air X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
cleaner
! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
Clean the fuel fil‐ X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ter
¯ The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warning
tone also sounds.
Refill AdBlue at
workshop See Own‐
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
er's Manual cialist workshop.
¯ The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated distance. A

Refill AdBlue at
workshop No start
X Have AdBlue® refilled as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
in .. km cialist workshop.
¯ The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You can
no longer start the engine.
Refill AdBlue at
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
workshop Eng.
start not possible
¯ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

sounds.
Check AdBlue See
Owner's Manual

sounds.
Eng. start not pos‐
sible in ... km

sounds. You can no longer start the engine.
Eng. start not pos‐
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
sible
Z
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so that you
get enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
inoperative
ör° Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle rising
ör° The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-
ing tone also sounds.
Vehicle rising X Do not pull away.
Please wait
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
ör° You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
STOP vehicle Vehi‐ period.
cle too low
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is faulty. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h.
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
wings or the tyres could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.

ör° The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-
acteristics may be affected.
Malfunction X Do not drive at speeds above 80 km/h.
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
currently unavail‐ Possible causes:
able See Owner's Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the dis-
play message disappears.
Speed Limit Assist is operational again.
Speed Limit Speed Limit Assist is only available in certain countries.

Assist: Unavaila‐ X Drive on.
ble in this country Speed Limit Assist is available again as soon as you drive in a
country in which its use is approved.
Speed Limit Assist Speed Limit Assist is faulty.

inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 205).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 205).
Radar sensor deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated.

tivated See Own‐ X Check whether or not the radar sensor system may be activated
er's Manual (Y page 451).
X Activate the radar sensor system (Y page 262).
Z

Radar sensor deac‐ Vehicles with a navigation system: the vehicle is close to a radio
tivated autom. See telescope facility and is therefore prohibited from transmitting any
Owner's Manual radar signals. The radar sensor system has switched off automat-
ically (Y page 451).
If DISTRONIC PLUS was activated, it is no longer available. A
If Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist was activated, it is
no longer available. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up
in the exterior mirrors.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake are then also
unavailable.
X Drive on.
Once you have moved far enough away from the radio telescope,
the above functions are available again.
Vehicles with Becker® MAP PILOT: if the Becker® MAP PILOT is

not connected, the radar sensor system is deactivated automati-
cally.
BAS PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS, Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind
Spot Assist and PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
X Connect the Becker® MAP PILOT; see the separate operating
instructions.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
unavailable See Rthe windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Owner's Manual or Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Active Lane Keep‐
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
ing Assist cur‐
rently unavailable Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
See Owner's Manual Once the causes listed above no longer apply, the display message
goes out.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
Assist inopera‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
tive or Active
Lane Keeping
Assist inoperative
Lane Keeping Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-
Assist currently erative.
unavailable See You have established the electrical connection between the trailer
Owner's Manual or and your vehicle.
Active Lane Keep‐ X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display mes-
ing Assist cur‐
sage.
rently unavailable
See Owner's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while
towing a trailer.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-

erative. Possible causes:
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
rors.
goes out.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 354).
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-
Active Blind Spot rors.
Assist inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 215).

inoperative X Restart the engine.
Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes:

cancelled RThe vehicle is skidding.
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Ra malfunction has occurred.

X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 215).
If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction

display at speeds below 30 km/h:
X Clean the sensors (Y page 354).
If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunc-
tion display at speeds below 30 km/h:
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer

following the recommended path.
X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages
Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 195).
If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-
available again rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 195).

DISTRONIC PLUS cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes:
rently unavailable Rthe function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Owner's Manual R
the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

goes out.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and in the bumpers
(Y page 354).
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty.

inoperative BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
inactive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

--- km/h X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 195).
DISTRONIC PLUS and DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone
SPEEDTRONIC also sounds.
Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC and cruise control are malfunctioning.

SPEEDTRONIC inop‐ A warning tone also sounds.
erative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

Limit While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point
--- km/h (kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.
Cruise control A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
--- km/h You have tried to store a speed below 30 km/h, for example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the
speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 189).
120 km/h Only for certain countries: the maximum speed has been excee-
Maximum speed ded.
exceeded In addition, the multifunction display shows 120 km/h!.
X Drive more slowly.
Tyres

Tyre pressure The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Check tyres loss in pressure.
G WARNING
With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
greatly impair tyre traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X If there is a flat tyre, inspect the tyres (Y page 363).
X Check the tyre pressures and, if necessary, correct the tyre
pressure.
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system when the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 385).
Check tyre pres‐ The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-
sures sage and has not been restarted since.
then restart Run X Set the correct tyre pressure in all four tyres.
Flat Indicator X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 385).
Run Flat Indicator The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Tyre pressure The tyre pressure monitor is measuring the tyre pressure.
displayed after X Drive on.
driving for a few The tyre pressures appear in the multifunction display after you
minutes have been driving for a few minutes.
Tyre press. monitor The tyre pressure monitor is faulty.

Z

Tyre press. moni‐ The wheels fitted do not have a suitable tyre pressure sensor. The
tor inoperative No tyre pressure monitor is deactivated.
wheel sensors X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
The tyre pressure monitor is activated automatically after driv-
ing for a few minutes.
Check The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
tyres The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
lowing hazards:
increase.
so.
X Check the tyre pressure (Y page 386).
X If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

Warning The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The
tyre defect wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:
RA flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
RYou could lose control of the vehicle.
RContinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
so.
Rectify The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
tyre pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
(Y page 386).
X Restart the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 387).
Wheel sensor(s) There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or several
missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tyre is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tyre press. monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
currently unavail‐ from the wheel sensors. The tyre pressure monitor is temporarily
able malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
cause has been rectified.
Z

h The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.

Tyre pressure Cau‐
tion Tyre malfunc‐ G WARNING
tion If you drive with a flat tyre, there is a risk of the following hazards:
RA flat tyre affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
RYou could lose control of the vehicle.
RContinued driving with a flat tyre will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
so.
h The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly.
Tyre pressure G WARNING

Check tyre(s) With tyre pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-
lowing hazards:
increase.
Rthey tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may
so.
h The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
Please correct X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity
tyre pressure
(Y page 386).
Vehicle

To start engine, You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
shift to either P position R or D.
or N X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
P Vehicles with automatic transmission with a selector lever:

Select Park (P) You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door.
You wanted to lock the vehicle.
or
You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and
opened the driver's door with the transmission in position N.
Vehicles with automatic transmission with a selector lever:

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:
Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the bonnet
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock

the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
You cannot start the engine.
You can restart the engine.
Auxiliary battery Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

malfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
being charged.
Apply brake to Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

deselect You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
Park (P) position position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Z

Risk of vehicle Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

rolling The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
Transmission not or D.
in P A warning tone also sounds.
Without changing Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

gear, You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
consult workshop A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
Only select Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever:

position P when The vehicle is moving.
vehicle is station‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
ary attention to road and traffic conditions.
N Saloon: the boot lid is open.

X Close the boot lid.
A Estate: the tailgate is open.

G WARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
X Close the tailgate.

M or ? The bonnet is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNING
The open bonnet may then block your view when the vehicle is in
motion.
X Close the bonnet.
If the active bonnet (pedestrian protection) has been triggered:

X Reset the bonnet (Y page 344).
X Close the bonnet.
Active bonnet mal‐ The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is not active due to a
function See Own‐ malfunction.
er's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors.
_ Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat:

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
Rear left seat right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
backrest not
X Push the backrest back until it engages.
locked or Rear
right seat back‐
rest not locked
j The trailer tow hitch is not correctly engaged.

Check trailer
hitch lock
X Allow the trailer tow hitch ball coupling to engage in the end
position (Y page 237).
& The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating has switched
itself off or cannot be switched on (Y page 151).
inoperative Bat‐ X Drive for a longer distance.
tery low
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating is operational
again as soon as the on-board electrical system voltage is suf-
ficient.
Z

& There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating cannot
be switched on (Y page 151).
inoperative Refuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
vehicle
& The auxiliary heating has a temporary malfunction or is faulty.

X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
inoperative See
down, make up to four attempts to switch on the auxiliary heat-
Owner's Manual
ing, waiting several minutes between each attempt
(Y page 151).
X If the auxiliary heating does not switch on, consult a qualified
Ð The power steering assistance is faulty.

Power steering mal‐
function See Own‐ G WARNING
er's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Telephone No Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

service receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Top up washer fluid X
Top up the washer fluid (Y page 349).
Key

Â You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct key.
Key does not
belong to vehicle
Â The key needs to be replaced.

Replace key
Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 85).
Change key batter‐
ies
Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key not detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
Key not detected
in the vehicle.
(white display mes-
sage) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key still in vehi‐ X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
cle
Z
298 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not continually detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-
Remove starting ing tone also sounds.
button, then
X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
insert key
position.
Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close doors to
lock vehicle
Indicator and warning lamps in the % Diesel engine: preglow

instrument cluster (Y page 163)
h Tyre pressure monitor
Warning and indicator lamps over- (Y page 308)
view
L Dipped-beam headlamps
(Y page 126)
T Side lamps (Y page 127)
K Main-beam headlamps
(Y page 129)
#! Turn signals (Y page 128)
R Rear foglamp (Y page 127)
ü Seat belts (Y page 299)
J Brakes (Y page 300)
! ABS (Y page 301)
ä ESP®(Y page 302)
å ESP® OFF (Y page 302)
M SPORT handling mode in AMG
vehicles (Y page 303)
6 SRS (Y page 304)
; Engine diagnostics
(Y page 305)
8 Reserve fuel (Y page 305)
? Coolant (Y page 305)
· Distance warning signal
(Y page 307)
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 299
Safety

Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
Only for certain coun- to fasten their seat belts.
tries: the red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
warning lamp lights up
for six seconds after
the engine starts.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

Only for certain coun- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
tries: the red seat belt The warning tone ceases.
warning lamp lights up
after the engine starts.
In addition, a warning
tone sounds for up to
six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out.
the engine starts, as
soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At the
The red seat belt warn- same time, the car is being driven faster than 25 km/h or has been
ing lamp flashes and an briefly driven faster than 25 km/h.
intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 52).
warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,

you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster
than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

J G WARNING
The yellow brake sys- The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteris-
tem warning lamp tics may be affected.
lights up while the
engine is running.
X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please
observe this.
J G WARNING
The red brake system The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-
warning lamp comes on acteristics may be affected.
while the engine is run-
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
J There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system G WARNING
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is run- The braking efficiency may be impaired.
ning. A warning tone There is a risk of an accident.
also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
X Do not top up the brake fluid. Topping up will not rectify the
fault.
display.

! ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) has been deactivated due to a fault.
The yellow ABS warning For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
lamp is lit while the Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
engine is running. tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
stabilisation are also deactivated, for example.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-
mission, will not be available.
Z

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,

The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func-
lamp is lit while the tion, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
engine is running. A stabilisation, for example, are not available either.
warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
sounds.
G WARNING
increase.
display.
Jäå! ABS and ESP® are not available due to a fault. Therefore, BAS, BAS
The red brake warning PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill
lamp, the yellow ESP® start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilisa-
and ESP® OFF warning tion, for example, are not available either.
lamps and the yellow ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is G WARNING
running. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
increase.
display.

ä ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
the vehicle is in motion. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Accelerate more gently while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).

å ESP® is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilise the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 72).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M SPORT handling mode is activated.

AMG vehicles only: G WARNING
The yellow SPORT han-
dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
lamp is lit while the stabilise the vehicle.
engine is running. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the
conditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT han-
dling mode" section (Y page 74).
Z

äå ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD

The yellow ESP® and function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer
ESP® OFF warning stabilisation are not available due to a malfunction.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
display.
J You are driving with the parking brake applied.

The red brake system X Release the parking brake.
warning lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

The red SRS warning tem).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,
see (Y page 43).
Engine

; There may be a fault, for example:
The yellow engine diag- Rin the engine management
nostics warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry
(Y page 182).
X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp goes out, emer-
gency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
checked.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
The yellow reserve fuel Operation of the auxiliary heating is deactivated if the fuel level
warning lamp lights up drops into the reserve range.
while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ning.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant warn- faulty.
ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
and the coolant tem- X Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traf-
perature gauge is at the fic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving
start of the scale. under any circumstances.
Z

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
ing lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be mal-
while the engine is run- functioning.
ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the
warning notes (Y page 348).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 120 †. The engine may otherwise be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The airflow to the
The red coolant warn- engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too
ing lamp comes on low.
while the engine is run- G WARNING
ning. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Never drive with an overheated engine. Driving when your engine
is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns, which
can occur just by opening the bonnet.
This poses a risk of injury.
display.

X Check the coolant level and top up the coolant, observing the
warning notes (Y page 348).
X If you have to top up the coolant frequently, have the engine
cooling system checked.
Driving systems

· The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
The red distance warn- selected.
ing lamp lights up while X Increase the distance.
the vehicle is in motion.
· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line

The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed.
ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately.
the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
A warning tone also brake or take evasive action.
sounds.
Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 195).
Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76).
Z
Tyres

h The tyre pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tyre pres- least one of the tyres.
sure monitor warning G WARNING
lamp is on.
lowing hazards:
increase.
so.
display.
309

Stowage areas .................................. 310
Features ............................................. 328
Stowing and features

310 Stowage areas
Useful information or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle

(including occupants).
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
els, series and optional equipment for your sible and as low down in the boot/luggage
vehicle that were available at the time of compartment as possible.
going to press. National variations are pos- Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be edge of the seat backrests.
equipped with all of the functions descri- Ralways place the load against the rear or
bed. This is also the case for systems and front seat backrests. Make sure that the
functions relevant to safety. seat backrests are securely locked into

i Read the information on qualified special- place.
ist workshops: (Y page 25). Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
Stowage areas wear-resistant lashing material. pad sharp
edges for protection.
Loading guidelines
i Load restraints are available at any quali-
G WARNING fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Secure and position the load as described in Benz Service Centre.
the loading guidelines.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could
be injured by the load being thrown around in Stowage compartments
the event of sharp braking, a sudden change
in direction or an accident. Important safety notes
You will find further information in the "Secur- G WARNING
ing a load" section. The stowage compartments must be closed
Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, when items are stored in them. Luggage nets
the load will increase the risk of injury in the are not designed to secure heavy items of
event of an accident. luggage.
You or other vehicle occupants could be
G WARNING injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Keep the boot lid/tailgate closed while the Rbrake sharply
vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust
Rchange direction suddenly
fumes could enter the vehicle interior and poi-
Rare involved in an accident
son you.
Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be
The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- placed in the luggage net.
cle are dependent on the distribution of the Do not place hard objects in the map pockets.
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you Objects must not protrude from the map
should observe the following notes when pockets.
transporting a load:
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
Stowage areas 311
Glove compartment Spectacles compartment

X To open: pull handle : and open glove There is a compartment to stow spectacles in
compartment flap ;. the roof lining on the driver's side.
X To close: fold glove compartment flap ; X To open: pull down spectacles compart-
upwards until it engages. ment : by the handle.
i The glove compartment can be ventilated

Stowage compartment in the centre
(Y page 156).
console
The glove compartment can only be locked

Illustration: vehicles with DIRECT SELECT selector
and unlocked using the emergency key ele- lever
ment.
X To open: slide cover : forwards, until it
X To lock: insert the emergency key element
engages.
into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to
X To close: briefly press : at the front.
position 2.
Cover : slides back.
X To unlock: insert the emergency key ele-
ment into the lock and turn it 90° anti-
clockwise to position 1.
Z
312 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment/telephone Stowage compartment in front of the

compartment under the armrest armrest
Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever Vehicles with selector lever or manual transmis-
sion
X To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out. X To open: slide cover : back.
Vehicles with selector lever or manual transmis- Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever
sion X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
X To open: press left-hand button ; or right- engages.
hand button :. X To close: briefly press cover : at the
The stowage compartment opens. front.
Cover : moves back.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB port and an AUX-IN jack or a Media
Interface are installed in the stowage com- Stowage compartment under the front
partment. seats
Before using these connections, you must G WARNING
remove the mobile phone bracket (see the
Only load the stowage compartment with the
separate installation instructions) and fold
maximum permissible load of 1.5 kg. Other-
up the preinstalled mobile phone holder
wise, the transported load could, for example,
(see the separate Audio or COMAND Online
be thrown out of the stowage compartment if
Operating Instructions).
you change direction suddenly or brake
sharply, and you or others could be injured.
Stowage areas 313
X Pull handle : upwards.

The armrest folds out.
Stowage net in the rear compartment

X To open: pull handle : up and fold
cover ; forwards.
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the
fire extinguisher is located in the stowage
compartment under the driver's seat. Vehicles with a rear bench seat
: Stowage net
Stowage compartment in the rear com-
partment
Vehicles with luxury single seats in the rear com-

partment
: Handle strip
Vehicles with a rear bench seat
; Stowage net
X To open: fold down seat armrest ;.
X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. X Pull handle strip : on the upper edge of
the cover forwards until it is released from
its anchorage.
X Fold down the cover in the direction of the
arrow.
Stowage nets
G WARNING
Only place lightweight items in the luggage
net. Do not use it to transport heavy, bulky,
sharp-edged or fragile objects. In the event of
partment
Z
314 Stowage areas
an accident, the luggage net will not secure X Pull skibag : into the vehicle interior and
the transported goods. unfold it.
X Open the boot lid.
Luggage nets are located in the front-
passenger footwell and on the left and right-
hand sides of the boot/luggage compart-
ment.
Skibag
Unfolding the skibag and loading skis

G WARNING
The skibag is designed to carry up to four pairs
of skis. Do not use the skibag to carry any X Press release catch :.
other type of load. The flap opens downwards.
The skibag must always be secured when X Slide the skis into the skibag from the boot.
laden. Otherwise, injuries could be caused by
it in the event of an accident.
X Pull strap : tight by the loose end until the

skis are held firmly inside the skibag.
X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X Press release catches ; together and fold
down cover :.
X Engage hook : in securing ring ;.

X Pull the strap tight by the loose end.
Stowage areas 315
Removing the skis and folding up the X Open the boot lid.
skibag X Press release catch :.
Flap ; folds down.
X Press catch = in and pull out frame ?
containing the skibag.
Through-loading facility in the rear

compartment

X Loosen the two straps.
X Remove hook : from securing ring ;.
X Take the skis out of the skibag.
X Close the flap in the boot.
X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up.
X Put the skibag into the backrest.
X Fold the cover back up.
The through-loading facility is opened from
i You should always close the flap in the the boot.
boot if you do not require the skibag. This X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
will prevent unauthorised access to the X Press release catch :.
boot from the vehicle interior.
The flap opens downwards.
Removing the skibag
G WARNING Through-loading facility in the rear
When the skibag has been removed, always bench seat (Saloon)
drive with the boot lid closed. Otherwise, Important safety notes
exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle inte-
rior. G WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
G WARNING
Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
The skibag can be removed for cleaning or rior.
drying.
Z
316 Stowage areas
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-

ests can be folded down separately to
increase the boot capacity.
Folding the seat backrest forwards

! Before you fold down the rear seat back-
rest, remove the side head restraints for
the integrated child seat; see the "Side
head restraints for integrated child seat"
section. The side head restraints could oth-

erwise be damaged. X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding back the seat backrest

G WARNING
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is cor-
rectly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
i Vehicles with memory function: when you
fold one or both parts of the rear seat back-
rest forwards, the respective front seat Rare involved in an accident
moves forward slightly, when necessary, in If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this
order to avoid contact. will be shown in the multifunction display in
X Vehicles without memory function: if nec- the instrument cluster.
essary, move the driver's or front-
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
passenger seat forwards.
become trapped when folding the rear seat
X Open the boot.
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back- aged.
rest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released.
The head restraints for the seat backrests
in the rear compartment lower.
Stowage areas 317
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat ! When folding the rear seat backrest for-
forward if necessary. wards, ensure that there are no items lying
X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it on the seat cushions. These items could
engages. otherwise be damaged or could themselves
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
damage the rear seats.
(Y page 110).
back if necessary.

i You should always engage the rear seat
backrests if you do not need the through-
loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-
ised access to the boot from the vehicle
interior.
EASY-PACK through-loading facility in

the rear bench seat (Estate)
G WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless
they are secured.
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak- The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci- ests can be folded forwards separately to
dent. increase the luggage compartment capacity.
When using the enlarged luggage compart- The combined luggage cover and net can
ment, always clip in the safety net. remain installed.
i When you fold one or both parts of the
G WARNING
rear seat backrests forwards, the headr-
Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust
ests are also lowered if necessary. In the
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
case of vehicles with memory function, the
rior.
respective front seat is moved forwards
slightly to avoid contact with the seat
Folding the rear seat backrest forward behind it.
! Before you fold down the rear seat back-
rest, remove the side head restraints for
the integrated child seat; see the "Side
head restraints for integrated child seat"
section. The side head restraints could oth-
erwise be damaged.
Z
318 Stowage areas
X Vehicles without memory function: if nec- X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
essary, move the driver's or front- forward if necessary.
passenger seat forwards. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
X Pull the left-hand or right-hand release han- X Adjust the head restraints if necessary
dle at the rear in load compartment : or (Y page 110).
at the side beside backrests ;. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
The corresponding backrest folds for- back if necessary.
wards.
X Pull back the left or right release lever in
the luggage compartment :. Securing a load

The corresponding backrest folds for-
wards. Plastic hooks (Saloon)
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back

G WARNING
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is cor-
rectly engaged. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly On vehicles without a through-loading feature
in the rear bench seat, six plastic hooks are
fitted to the boot floor. You can use these to
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged, this attach the luggage securing fixture, which is
will be shown in the multifunction display in available as an accessory.
the instrument cluster.
Lashing eyelets
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat General notes
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged. G WARNING
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets
evenly.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Please observe the loading guidelines.

Stowage areas 319
Observe the following notes on securing changing direction quickly or in the event of
loads: an accident, the bag hooks will not secure the
Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets. items sufficiently. This could result in injury to
Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure yourself or others.
a load, as these are only intended as an
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
anti-slip protection for light loads.
of 3 kg. Do not use it to secure a load.
Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp
edges or corners.
Rpad sharp edges for protection.

Boot/luggage compartment
Saloon
X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :.
Saloon
: Lashing eyelets
Estate
X To open: press bag hook : (arrow).
Bag hook : slides out.
X To close: press bag hook : until it
Estate
: Lashing eyelets engages.
There are six lashing eyelets in the boot/lug-

gage compartment. EASY-PACK luggage compartment
cover
Bag hook
G WARNING
Only hang light loads on the bag holders. Do G WARNING
not use them to transport heavy, sharp-edged The luggage compartment cover is not a
or fragile objects. When braking sharply, restraint system. Secure the load under the
Z
320 Stowage areas
luggage compartment cover by suitable X To extend: pull luggage compartment

means. Make sure that the luggage compart- cover : back by grab handle ; and clip
ment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is it into the retainers on the left and right.
not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over
the backrest into the passenger compart-
ment, for instance during heavy braking, sud-
den changes of direction or in the event of an
accident. You could cause an accident or
cause injury to yourself and others.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the luggage
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the luggage compartment
X To retract: unhook luggage compartment
cover.
cover : from the retainers on the left and
The luggage compartment cover and the right and guide it forwards by grab han-
safety net are attached to anchorages on the dle ; until it is fully retracted.
right and left in the luggage compartment as
a combined luggage cover and net.
Fitting and removing the combined lug-
When the tailgate is opened, the luggage
gage cover and net
compartment cover is automatically raised to
make loading easier. It is automatically low-
ered again when the tailgate is closed.
When the luggage compartment cover is clip-
ped in, there should be no objects obstructing
the downwards movement of the cover in the
luggage compartment when the tailgate is
closed. The luggage compartment cover will
otherwise be raised again.
Extending and retracting the luggage

compartment cover
You can reach the combined luggage cover
and net to install and remove it from the lug-
gage compartment and, with the seat back-
rest folded forwards, from the left-hand rear
door.
X Make sure that the safety net and the lug-
gage compartment cover are rolled up.
X To remove: press button ;.
X Fold the combined luggage cover and net
forwards on the left-hand side with the seat
backrest folded forwards, and fold it back-
wards with the seat backrest folded up.
Stowage areas 321
X First, detach the combined luggage cover X Fold the left and right seat backrest for-
and net from left-hand catch : and then wards (Y page 317).
remove it from right-hand fixture =. X Insert combined luggage cover and net ;
X To install: push the combined luggage into two guides : and push it up to the
cover and net up to the stop into right-hand stop in the direction of the arrow.
fixture =.
X Place the combined luggage cover and net
into the left-hand fixture and push it into Safety net (Estate)
catch : until the combined luggage cover

and net engages audibly.
G WARNING
The safety net cannot secure heavy loads. You
should therefore always lash down the load.
You could otherwise be injured by objects
which have not been sufficiently secured
being thrown around in the event of sharp
braking, a sudden change of direction or an
accident.
G WARNING
In the event of sharp braking, a sudden
X Make sure that red lock status indica- change of direction, or an accident, light loads
tor ? is no longer visible. The combined can be thrown about.
luggage cover and net will otherwise not be This could result in injury to yourself or others.
locked in place.
Therefore, if you are transporting light loads,
use the safety net.
Attaching the combined luggage cover
and net to the rear seat backrest
Safety net without luggage compart-
! If you have attached the combined lug- ment enlargement
gage cover and net to a rear seat backrest
that is folded forwards, do not fold the
backrest back.
X Pull the safety net up by tab : and hook it

into eyelets ;.
Z
322 Stowage areas
Safety net with luggage compartment EASY-PACK boot box

enlargement
G WARNING
Only load the EASY-PACK convenience box to
the maximum permissible load of 10 kg. To
prevent overloading, the floor of the box
moves down onto the boot floor mat when
loaded with more than approx. 5 kg.
Do not transport sharp-edged and fragile

objects in the box.
Otherwise, e.g. in the event of a rapid change
of direction or heavy braking, the objects
X Make sure that the safety net is attached
could be thrown out of the EASY-PACK con-
to the rear seat backrest (Y page 320).
venience box and injure you and others.
X Guide the safety net up by tab : and hook
it into eyelets ;. ! When the EASY-PACK convenience box is
pulled out, no objects may be placed on the
frame of the box or pushed onto the frame
Coat hooks on the tailgate from above. Otherwise, the box could be
damaged.
G WARNING
The tailgate may close if too great a load is Adjusting the height to any position
placed on the coat hooks.
This could cause you or others to be trapped G WARNING
and injured. Make sure that your hands are not inside the
If you use the coat hooks, only hang light EASY-PACK convenience box when the load
clothing on them. Make sure that nobody can surface moves up. Otherwise, you could be
become trapped. injured.
: Coat hook X Pull the box out by handle : in the direc-

tion of the arrow all the way to the stop.
X Lowering the load surface: push the
centre of load surface ; down by hand in
the direction of the arrow until load sur-
Stowage areas 323
face ; has reached the desired position i Store the EASY-PACK boot box on a flat
and the box is the desired size. surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable
X To raise the load surface: press switch shelf.
=.
Load surface ; of the box moves up auto-
matically.
EASY-PACK load-securing kit (Estate)
X To stow the box: push the box in by han- Components and storage
dle : all the way to the stop.
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you

to use your luggage compartment for a variety
Removing and fitting of purposes. The accessory parts are located
under the luggage compartment floor.
X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
partment floor (Y page 326).
X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into

slots =
EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts

: Telescopic rod
; Bag containing the brackets and luggage
holder
= Folding box
Inserting the brackets into the loading

rail
G WARNING
X Raise box : and press hooks A into Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets
anchorage ? as far as they will go. evenly.
X Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
and right-hand rotating catch B anti-clock- injured by objects being thrown around if you:
wise by 90°. Rbrake sharply
X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch Rchange direction suddenly
B anti-clockwise and right-hand rotating Rare involved in an accident
catch B clockwise by 90°. Please observe the loading guidelines.
X Move box : downwards and pull it out
from anchorages ?.
Z
324 Stowage areas
X To install: insert two brackets A into the

left or right loading rail (Y page 323).
X Press release button : of the luggage
holder and pull the strap out slightly.
X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A
and, while doing so, press release button
= and push the luggage holder downwards
until it engages.
X Press release button : of the luggage
holder and pull the strap out in the direction

X Insert bracket : into the centre of loading of the arrow.
rail ?. X Place the load between the strap and the
X Press release button ; and push luggage compartment side wall.
bracket : into the desired position in load- X Using one hand, press locking button : of
ing rail ?. the luggage holder.
X Let go of release button ;. X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly
X Press locking button =.

until the load is secured.
X Make sure that locking button ? on brack-
Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?.
X If necessary, fold lashing eyelet A
ets A is pressed.
This keeps brackets A in place on the
upwards.
loading rail.
X To remove: press release button = on
Luggage holder
respective bracket A and remove luggage
! Only use the luggage holder to secure holder ; by pulling upwards and out.
loads with a maximum weight of 7 kg and
with dimensions that allow the loads to be
Telescopic rod
safely and securely retained by the luggage
holder.
The telescopic rod can be used to secure the

The luggage holder can be used to secure load against the rear seats to prevent it from
light loads against the side wall of the luggage moving around.
compartment to prevent them from moving
around.
Stowage areas 325
X To install: insert one bracket ; into both

the left and the right loading rails and slide
it to the desired position (Y page 323).
X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ;
and, while doing so, press release but-
ton ? and push the rod downwards until it
engages.
X Make sure that locking button = on brack-
ets ; is pressed.

This keeps brackets ; in place on the
loading rail. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
X To remove: press release button ? on
respective bracket ; and remove tele-
scopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out. EASY-PACK folding floor with stowage
compartment under the luggage com-
partment floor (Estate)
Stowage well under the boot floor Important safety notes
(Saloon)
! Remove the handle again before closing G WARNING
the boot lid and snap it in tightly to prevent Do not carry unsecured objects under the
the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, EASY-PACK folding luggage-compartment
you could damage the handle. floor if it is open.
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
! Do not apply pressure to the EASY-PACK

folding luggage-compartment floor when it
is fully open. You may otherwise damage
the hinges of the EASY-PACK folding lug-
gage-compartment floor.
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are ! Vehicles with a B&O sound system: do not
located in the stowage compartment. remove the EASY-PACK folding floor. The
X To open: pull handle : up. cable or the connector could otherwise tear
off from the amplifier, as the amplifier mod-
ule is screwed onto the underside of the
EASY-PACK folding floor.
Z
326 Stowage areas
Opening and closing the folding lug- Fitting and removing the folding lug-
gage-compartment floor gage-compartment floor
A removable insert under the EASY-PACK 120° position

folding luggage-compartment floor contains X Remove the combined luggage cover and
the parts of the EASY-PACK load-securing kit net (Y page 320).
and a folding box. Beneath the insert, you will X To remove: move EASY-PACK folding lug-
find the TIREFIT kit or the emergency spare gage-compartment floor : into the 120°
wheel and the vehicle tool kit, for example. position and lift it upwards.
X To open: open the tailgate. X To install: push EASY-PACK folding lug-
X Holding the ribbing, press handle : down- gage-compartment floor : to the stop,
wards ;. move it into the 120° position and make
Handle : folds upwards. sure it engages audibly.
X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compart-
ment floor : forwards.
EASY-PACK rear sill protector (Estate)

! Before closing the tailgate, refasten the
EASY-PACK loading sill protector on the
underside of the EASY-PACK folding lug-
gage-compartment floor.
The EASY-PACK loading sill protector could
X Pull EASY-PACK folding luggage-compart-
ment floor = in the direction of the arrow
by handle : until it reaches the desired
position and engages in side ?.
X To close: disengage the EASY-PACK fold-
ing luggage-compartment floor and pull it
back.
X Press the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
partment floor down ; until it engages.
Stowage areas 327
The EASY-PACK rear sill protector is attached Rthe sliding sunroof/panorama sliding
to the underside of the EASY-PACK folding sunroof can be fully raised, depending on
luggage-compartment floor by means of mag- the vehicle's equipment.
nets. It is designed to prevent clothing Rthe boot lid/ tailgate can be fully opened.
becoming stained and the paintwork being Rthe aerial on the roof does not touch the
scratched when loading. roof carrier.
X Open the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-
partment floor (Y page 326).
ers, do not use metallic or hard objects to
X Use tab ; to detach EASY-PACK rear sill
open them.

protector : from the magnets and place
it over the loading sill. Attaching the roof carrier (Saloon)
X Close the EASY-PACK folding luggage-com-
partment floor.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
An incorrectly secured roof carrier, ski rack or
load could become detached from the vehi-
cle. These objects might then be thrown
around, and could injure you or others or Vehicles with a steel roof or sliding sunroof (illus-
tration)
cause an accident. Follow the roof carrier/ski
rack manufacturer's installation instructions
and special instructions for use.
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must always observe the maximum roof
load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style
to the prevailing road, traffic and weather
conditions and drive with particular care if the
roof is laden.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
This helps to prevent damage to the vehi- the arrow.
cle. X Fold covers : upwards.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-
a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage points under covers :.
age even when it is in motion. X Observe the manufacturer's installation
Make sure that if the roof carrier is fitted: instructions.
Z
328 Features
Attaching the roof carrier (Estate)

X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holders

Vehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever
G WARNING X To open: slide cover = forwards until it
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle engages.
is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants X To remove: slide catch ; forwards and
could be injured by objects being thrown pull out cup holder :.
around if you:
X To insert: insert cup holder : and slide
Rbrake sharply
back catch ;.
X To close: briefly press cover = at the
front.
Only use the cup holders for containers of a Cover ; moves back.
suitable size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill. You can remove the cup holder to clean it.
Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Clean it with clean, lukewarm water only.
You may otherwise scald yourself.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
Cup holder in the front centre console ! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
Vehicles with selector lever or gear lever

: Cup holders
; Cover
X To open: slide cover ; back.
Vehicles with a rear bench seat
Features 329
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. bottle holders

X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
G WARNING
X Press release catch :.
Do not transport heavy, sharp-edged and frag-
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
ile bottles in the bottle holder. In the event of
X Fold the cover of the rear seat armrest back an accident, the bottle holder can not secure
down again if necessary. the bottles adequately.
X To close: lift the cover of the rear seat arm-
rest. ! Make sure that any bottles weighing more
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages. than 0.5 kg that are stored in the bottle

holder rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle
holder could otherwise be damaged.

partment
X To open: press lightly on the upper section X Press the outer edge of button : and slide
of cup holder : and fold down the cover. in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening.
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
Cup holder in the folding bench seat
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a
capacity from 0.7 l to 1.5 l.
The bottle holder does not secure bottles; it
merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors cov-
X To open: press the front of cup holder :. ered while driving. You could otherwise be
Cup holder : is released. dazzled, which may impair your view of traffic
X Pull cup holder : out to the stop. conditions and as a result could cause an
accident.
Z
330 Features
Sunblinds on the rear side windows

! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this
would damage the automatic roller mech-
anism.
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller
sunblind hooked in and the side windows
opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind
can jump out of the retainers and spring

back suddenly when driving at high speeds,
: Mirror light
e.g. when driving on the motorway. This
; Additional sun visor could damage the inertia reel. Therefore,
= Bracket either close the side window or retract the
? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket roller sunblind before driving at high
A Vanity mirror speeds.
B Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor

is clipped into retainer = and mirror cover
B has been folded up.
Glare from the side
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by

tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the
top of the window.
Rear window roller sunblind (Saloon)

Extending/retracting the roller sun-
blind
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
X Fold down sun visor :. move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =. or other objects could be damaged.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Vehicles with an additional sun visor:
slide sun visor : horizontally as desired.
X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the
windscreen.
Features 331
X To refit the insert: press insert = into the

holder until it engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and
use the resulting compartment for stow-
age.

Rear-compartment ashtray
lock (Y page 161).
X To extend or retract: briefly press but-
ton :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top.
not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- The ashtray opens.
rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the X To remove the insert: press release but-
ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the ton = and lift the insert up and out.
stowage space could be damaged.
X To fit the insert: fit insert : from above
into the holder and press down into the
holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob.
Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the vehi-
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it cle are not able to injure themselves on the
engages. hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.
X To remove the insert: hold insert = by
the indentation at the sides and lift it
up ; and out.
Z
332 Features
Socket in the front centre console


lock (Y page 161).
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
engages.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
front.
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
front.
Socket in the rear-compartment centre
console
12 V sockets
General notes
lock (Y page 161).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-
ries include such items as lamps or chargers
for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when X Briefly press cover ; at the top.
the engine is switched off, the battery may The cover opens.
discharge. X Lift up the cover of socket :.
i An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, the power to
the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
Features 333
Socket in the luggage compartment Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an

approved exterior aerial. This ensures:
Roptimal mobile phone reception quality in
the vehicle
Rmutual influences between the vehicle
electronics and mobile phones are mini-
mised
An exterior aerial has the following advan-
tages:

Rit conducts the electromagnetic fields gen-
erated by a wireless device to the exterior.
Power socket in the luggage compartment (Estate) Rthe field strength in the vehicle interior is
X Lift up the cover of socket :. lower than in a vehicle that does not have
an exterior aerial.
i There are various mobile phone brackets
Mobile phone that may be fitted in your vehicle; in some
cases, these are country-specific.
i You can connect a Bluetooth®-capable
G WARNING mobile phone with Audio 20, Audio 50 or
Observe the legal requirements of the country COMAND Online via the Bluetooth® inter-
in which you are currently driving regarding face. This also applies if your vehicle is
operating mobile communications equipment equipped with convenience telephony.
in a vehicle. More information on suitable mobile phones,
If it is permitted by law to operate communi- mobile phone brackets and on connecting
cations equipment while the vehicle is in Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones with
motion, you must only do so if the traffic sit- Audio 20, Audio 50 or COMAND Online can
uation permits. Otherwise, you could be dis- be obtained:
tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an
Rat your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
accident and injure yourself and others.
Ron the Internet at http://www.mercedes-
Two-way radios and fax equipment used with-
out low-reflection exterior aerials can inter- benz.com/connect
fere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby i The functions and services available when
jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle you use the phone depend on your mobile
and your safety. Therefore, you must only use phone model and service provider.
this equipment if it is correctly connected to
a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. Using a mobile phone
G WARNING If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
phone bracket, you can speak to the person
may cause damage to your health and the
you are calling using the hands-free system.
health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes X Open the telephone compartment
into account current scientific discussions (Y page 312).
relating to the possible health risk posed by X Vehicles with automatic transmission
electromagnetic fields. without DIRECT SELECT lever: connect
the mobile phone bracket to the pre-instal-
Z
334 Features
led bracket (see the separate mobile phone separate mobile phone operating instruc-
bracket fitting instructions). tions.
Vehicles with automatic transmission i Not all mobile phones support "private
with DIRECT SELECT lever: install the mode".
sliding adapter depending on the model of
the mobile phone bracket (Y page 335). Mobile telephone bracket in the stow-
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile age space
phone bracket (see the separate installa-
tion instructions for the mobile phone fit-
ting).
i On some mobile phone brackets, you first
have to connect the mobile phone via Blue-
tooth® to the mobile phone bracket (see
the separate operating instructions for the
mobile phone bracket).
If this is the case, the mobile phone does
not have to be inserted into the bracket for
you to be able to use the telephone func-
tions. However, the charging function and You can fold the pre-installed bracket up to
aerial function are not available. improve access to the stowage space
beneath it. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
Operating the mobile phone ment, a USB connection and an AUX-IN con-
nection/Media Interface are fitted in the
You can operate the telephone using the stowage compartment.
6 and ~ buttons on the multifunction X To fold the bracket up: press button :.
steering wheel. You can operate other mobile
X To fold the bracket down: press the
phone functions via the on-board computer
(Y page 254). bracket down and allow it to engage.
When you remove the key from the ignition
lock, the mobile phone stays switched on.
However, you can no longer use the hands-
free system.
If you have an active call and would like to
take the key out of the ignition lock, first
remove the mobile phone from the bracket.
i When using a bracket connected to the
mobile phone via Bluetooth® and you wish
to proceed with a call:
Switch to private mode before removing
the key from the ignition lock. Otherwise, it
may take up to 20 seconds, before the
mobile phone separates from the system.
Only then can the telephone call continue.
Information on the necessary steps for set-
ting up "private mode" can be found in the
Features 335
Sliding adapter for the mobile phone X Press both release buttons ? and press
bracket sliding adapter : with the mobile phone
bracket down until it engages.
Overview
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile
phone bracket; see the separate mobile
phone bracket installation instructions.
Removing the sliding adapter

: Previous model: example of a mobile
phone bracket
; New model: example of a mobile phone
bracket
= Sliding adapter X Remove the mobile phone from its bracket;
i The sliding adapter for the mobile phone see the separate mobile phone bracket fit-
bracket is only available for automatic vehi- ting instructions.
cles with DIRECT SELECT lever. X Press both release buttons ; and press
Certain mobile phone brackets require a slid- sliding adapter : with the mobile phone
ing adapter so the bracket can be installed bracket upwards until it disengages.
correctly. X Remove the mobile phone bracket from
sliding adapter :; see the separate mobile
Fitting the sliding adapter phone bracket fitting instructions.
X Detach sliding adapter : using suitable
tool = and remove.
Garage door opener

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-
ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper-
ate up to three different door and gate sys-
X Insert sliding adapter : by aligning the tems.
openings with lugs ; of contact plate =. i The garage door opener is only available
X Attach the mobile phone bracket to sliding for certain countries. Observe the legal
adapter :; see the separate mobile phone requirements for each individual country.
bracket fitting instructions. The HomeLink® garage door opener is
compatible with most European garage and
gate opener drives. More information on
Z
336 Features
HomeLink® and/or compatible products is the first time. If the selected button has
available from: already been programmed, indicator
Rat a qualified specialised workshop lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
Rthe HomeLink® hotline seconds have elapsed.
(0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
+49 (0) 6838 907 277 (charges apply) lamp : flashes yellow.
Ron the Internet at: X Point garage door remote control A
http://www.homelink.com towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
mirror at a distance of 5to 20 cm.
Programming i The required distance between remote

control A and the integrated garage door
Programming buttons
opener depends on the garage door drive
G WARNING system. Several attempts may be required.
Only press the button on the integrated You should test every position for at least
garage door opener if there are no persons or 25 seconds before trying another position.
objects present within the sweep of the X Press and hold button B on remote control
garage door. Persons could otherwise be
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
injured as the door moves.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or
flashes, then programming has been suc-
cessful.
X Release button B of garage door drive
remote control A.
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming procedure for the corre-
sponding button on the rear-view mirror.
When doing so, vary the distance between
remote control A and the rear-view mirror.
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mir-
ror successful programming, the garage door
system is using a rolling code. After pro-
Garage door remote control A is not part of gramming, you must synchronise the
the integrated garage door opener. garage door opener integrated in the rear-
X Before programming for the first time, clear view mirror with the receiver of the garage
the memory of the integrated garage door door system.
opener (Y page 337).
Synchronising the rolling code
lock. Your vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
the integrated garage door opener. objects are present within the sweep of the
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights door or gate.
up yellow.
Observe the safety notes when performing
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon the rolling code synchronisation.
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
Features 337
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition ton B on remote control A again before
lock. transmission ends.
X Press the programming button of the door RAlign the aerial cable of the garage door
or gate drive (see the door or gate drive opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- tion/transmission.
gramming of additional remote controls").
i Usually, you now have 30seconds to ini- Opening or closing the garage door
tiate the next step.
Once programmed, the integrated garage
X Press previously programmed button ;, door opener will assume the function of the

= or ? of the integrated garage door garage door system's remote control. Please
opener until the door closes. also read the operating instructions for the
The rolling code synchronisation is then garage door system.
complete. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Problems when programming
X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
If you have problems when programming the
programmed to operate the garage door.
integrated garage door opener, please note
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
the following:
cator lamp : lights up green.
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage Garage door system with a rolling code:
door drive remote control A. This can usu- indicator lamp : flashes green.
ally be found on the back of the remote
control.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal for
as long as the button is pressed. The trans-
RReplace the batteries in garage door
mission is halted after a maximum of ten
remote control A. This increases the like- seconds and indicator lamp : lights up
lihood that garage door remote control A yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if
will transmit a strong and precise signal to necessary.
the integrated garage door opener in the
rear-view mirror.
Clearing the memory
RWhen programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
button which you are programming. Try var- lock.
ious angles at a distance between 5and X Press buttons ; and ?.
30 cm or at the same angle but at varying The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
distances. X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
RIf there is another remote control for the indicator lamp turns green.
same garage door drive, perform the pro-
gramming steps again using this remote i Make sure that you clear the memory of
control. Before performing these steps, the integrated garage door opener before
make sure that new batteries have been selling the vehicle.
fitted in garage door drive remote control
A.
RNote that some remote controls transmit
only for a limited period (the indicator lamp
on the remote control goes out). Press but-
Z
338 Features
Frequencies Country Radio type approval num-

Europe ber
Frequency range (MHz)
Country Radio type approval num-
ber EE (Estonia) Article 6 of Directive
Frequency range (MHz) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 May
05
AD (Andorra) 20 July MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
ES (Spain) 000438/2005,
AT (Austria) Article 6 of Directive 000439/2005,

1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 000440/2005
05 000441/2005,
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 000445/2005,
000446/2005
BE (Belgium) Article 6 of Directive
1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May 000447/2005
05 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FI (Finland) Article 6 of Directive
BG (Bulga- Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668
ria) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 13 May 05
07 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 FR (France) Article 6 of Directive
CH (Switzer- Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668
land) 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 13 May 05
27 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 GI (Gibraltar) Article 6 of Directive
CY (Cyprus) Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May
1999/5/EC R&TTE 5 May 05 (UK)
05 MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 GR (Greece) Article 6 of Directive
CZ (Czech General Licence GL-30/R/ 1999/5/EC
Republic) 2000 Reg. No. 844 13 May R&TTE11409/18/4/2005
05 18 May 05
MHz: 27, 40, 433 MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
DK (Den- Article 6 of Directive HR (Croatia) SDR 224/06

mark) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 20 April MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
05 HU (Hun- Article 6 of Directive
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 gary) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May
DE (Ger- Article 6 of Directive 05
many) 1999/5/EC MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
R&TTE7519301 29 April 05
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
Features 339
Country Radio type approval num- Country Radio type approval num-
ber ber
Frequency range (MHz) Frequency range (MHz)
IC (Canary 000438/2005, LT (Lithua- Article 6 of Directive
Islands) 000439/2005 nia) 1999/5/EC
000440/2005, R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May
000441/2005 05
000445/2005, MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868

000446/2005 LU (Luxem- Article 6 of Directive
000447/2005, 3rd June bourg) 1999/5/EC
2005 R&TTE150405/9538 24
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 May 05
IE (Ireland) Article 6 of Directive MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May LV (Latvia) Article 6 of Directive
05 1999/5/EC R&TTE
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06
IS (Iceland) Article 6 of Directive MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May MC (Mon- Article 6 of Directive
05 aco) 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 13 May 05
IT (Italy) DGPGSR/II/347487/ MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
FOR/15347 MT (Malta) Article 6 of Directive
DGPGSR/II/347487/ 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May
FOR/15348 05
DGPGSR/II/347487/ MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
FOR/15350
NL (Nether- Article 6 of Directive
DGPGSR/II/347487/
lands) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May
FOR/15357
05
DGPGSR/II/347487/
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
FOR/15358
DGPGSR/II/347487/ NO (Norway) Article 6 of Directive
FOR/15359 1999/5/EC
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18
May 05
LI (Liechten- Article 6 of Directive MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
stein) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357
27 May 05 PL (Poland) Article 6 of Directive
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 1999/5/EC R&TTE 21 April
05
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
PT (Portugal) ANCOM-S08399/05
27, 40, 433, 868
Z
340 Features
Country Radio type approval num- Africa

ber Country Radio type approval num-
Frequency range (MHz) ber
RO (Roma- Article 6.4 of Directive Frequency range (MHz)
nia) 1999/5/EC R&TTE EG (Egypt) W-KLE-17/08 Mar. 06
MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433,
RU (Russian POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 868
Federation) May 05 RE (Réunion) Article 6 of Directive
MHz: 433 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July

05
SE (Sweden) Article 6 of Directive
1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
05 ZA (South 11 October 2005
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 Africa) MHz: 27, 40, 433
SI (Slovenia) Article 6 of Directive America
1999/5/EC R&TTE
500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 Country Radio type approval num-
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 ber
SK (Slova- Article 6 of Directive
kia) 1999/5/EC R&TTE BB (Barba- Registration not required
Slovak dos) MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
206/11/2005 4 May 05 CL (Chile) 38447/F-23 No.3.3634
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868 MHz: 40, 433
UK (United Article 6 of Directive GF (French Article 6 of Directive
Kingdom) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 18 May Guyana) 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668
05 13 May 05
MHz: 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
GP (Guade- Article 6 of Directive
loupe) 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668
13 May 05
MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
MQ (Martini- Article 6 of Directive
que) 1999/5/EC R&TTE 11 July
05
MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
MX (Mexico) MHz: 280 to 390
Features 341
Asia The floormats must be correctly secured at all

Country Radio type approval num- times using the securing knob and retainers.
ber Before you drive off, check the floormats and
Frequency range (MHz) secure them if necessary. A floormat which is
not properly secured can slip and thereby
AE (United 1623/5/10-2/26/76 interfere with the movement of the pedals.
Arab Emi- MHz: 433 Do not place floormats on top of one another.
rates)
JO (Jordan) TRC/LPD/2005/23

MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
KW (Kuwait) 5 October 2005
MHz: 27, 30, 40, 418, 433,
868
LB (Leba- 2920/O&M/2006 / 3 July
non) 05
MHz: 27, 40, 433, 868
SA (Saudi 11_02_05/5024-5-6 X Slide the seat backwards.
Arabia) MHz: 418, 433 X To fit: lay the floormat in the footwell.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
SY (Syria) 279/4/14 / 05 March 06
X To remove: pull the floormat from retain-
TR (Turkey) National Certification 23 ers ;.
July 07
X Remove the floormats.
MHz: 433
Australia
Retrofitted anti-glare film
Country Radio type approval num-
ber Retrofitted anti-glare film on the inside of the
windows can interfere with radio/mobile
telephone reception. This is particularly the
AU (Aus- 28 June case for conductive or metallic-coated films.
tralia) MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 You can obtain information about anti-glare
film from a qualified specialist workshop.
NZ (New 20 March 06
Zealand) MHz: 27, 30, 40, 433
Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are used,
and that the floormats are properly secured.
Z
342
343

Engine compartment ........................ 344
Service ............................................... 349
Care .................................................... 350
Maintenance and care

344 Engine compartment
Useful information
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod-

i Read the information on qualified special- If active bonnet : has been triggered, it will
ist workshops: (Y page 25). be raised at the back by about 50 mm.

Lids ; will then no longer rest on housings
=.
Engine compartment
You can reset a triggered active bonnet your-
Bonnet self.
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) Even if the active bonnet has been triggered,
you can still continue driving and have it reset
Operating principle at a qualified specialist workshop. If you pull
the bonnet release lever, you must reset the
G WARNING bonnet before driving on.
If you pull the bonnet release lever and then
neglect to reset the bonnet, it will not lock at Resetting
the front when closed. The bonnet can then G WARNING
open when the vehicle is in motion and
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
obscure your field of vision. If you pull the
even if the engine is not running.
bonnet release lever, you must reset the bon-
net before driving on. Some engine components can become very
hot.
! Do not try to press down the raised bon- To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
net at the back. Otherwise, the bonnet components described in the Owner's Manual
could be damaged. and observe the relevant safety notes.
i The active bonnet is only available in cer-
G WARNING
tain countries. It is available for all models,
If the bonnet can still not be engaged properly
except for AMG vehicles.
or the L symbol appears in the multifunc-
The active bonnet can reduce the risk of injury tion display, do not continue driving. The bon-
to pedestrians in certain accident situations. net can then open when the vehicle is in
Raising the active bonnet increases the clear- motion and obscure your field of vision. Con-
ance to hard components, such as the engine. sult a qualified specialist workshop. Other-
wise, you may cause an accident and injure
Engine compartment 345
G WARNING
G WARNING
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
even if the engine is not running.
Some engine components can become very
hot.
X Open the bonnet (Y page 345). To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those

X With both hands, lift the bonnet up in the components described in the Owner's Manual
centre A. The bonnet is open wide enough and observe the relevant safety notes.
when both lids of bonnet lifter ; no longer
move. G WARNING
The radiator fan between the radiator and the
If you push the lids back, you will notice a
engine can start automatically, even if the key
resistance.
has been removed from the ignition lock. For
X Release bonnet :.
this reason, you must not reach into the fan
X Check whether the lids of bonnet lifter ; rotation area. You could otherwise be injured.
are resting on housings = (arrow). Vehicles with a petrol engine: The elec-
X The lids of bonnet lifter ; are resting tronic ignition system uses high voltage. For
on the housings: close bonnet : this reason, you must never touch ignition
(Y page 346). system components (ignition coil, ignition
or cables, spark plug connectors or test socket)
while:
X The lids of bonnet lifter ; are not rest-
Rthe engine is running
ing on the housings: first lift up bon-
net : on left-hand side ? and then on Rthe engine is being started
right-hand side B. Lift up bonnet : until Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
the respective lid of bonnet lifter ; no lon- is being cranked by hand
ger moves. You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
The lids of bonnet lifter ; must rest on and be seriously or even fatally injured.
housings = (arrow). Vehicles with a diesel engine: The elec-
X Close bonnet :(Y page 346). tronic injection control uses high voltage. For
this reason, you must never touch injection
If you cannot close the bonnet : or if the system components while:
L symbol appears in the multifunction
Rthe engine is running
display, repeat the steps.
Rthe engine is being started
Opening the bonnet Rthe ignition is switched on
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock

G WARNING and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open
up and block your view.
Z
G WARNING Closing the bonnet

The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage G WARNING
could be set in motion.
When the bonnet is open, you or others could as you close the bonnet.
be injured by the wiper linkage.
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a
switched off. Remove the key or make sure height of approximately 20 cm.
that no ignition position has been selected X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator lamps must be erly.
off in the instrument panel. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are it with a little more force.
not folded away from the windscreen. Oth-
erwise, you could damage the windscreen
wipers or the bonnet.
Radiator
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover
the radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect
protection covers or anything similar. Doing
so can cause the Onboard Diagnostics Sys-
tem to display inaccurate values. Some of
these values are legally required and must
always be correct.
Engine oil
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are General notes
switched off.
X Pull release lever : on the bonnet. G WARNING
The bonnet is released. Hybrid vehicles: ensure that you read the
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle

consumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1,000 km. The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be installed at a different location.
X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han-

dle ; up and lift the bonnet.
If you lift the bonnet by approximately
40 cm, the bonnet is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Engine compartment 347
When checking the oil level: Adding engine oil

Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. G WARNING
Rthe engine should be switched off for
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
approximately five minutes if the engine is engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn
at normal operating temperature. yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot
Rif the engine is not at normal operating engine parts.
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly: wait about 30 minutes H Environmental note
before carrying out the measurement. When topping up the oil, take care not to spill
any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is
Checking the oil level using the oil dip- harmful to the environment.

stick
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that
have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
Example: vehicles with a petrol engine
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rchanging the engine oil and oil filter after
missing the change interval required by
the service system
Rusing engine oil additives
! Do not add too much oil. Topping up with

too much engine oil can result in damage
to the engine or to the catalytic converter.
Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 1.0 litre of engine oil.
Z
Example: engine oil filler cap X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove it. Only check the coolant level if the vehicle
X Top up the engine oil. is on a level surface and the engine has
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark cooled down.
on the oil dipstick, add 1.0 litre of engine X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
oil. lock (Y page 161).
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
clockwise. Start/Stop button twice (Y page 161).
Make sure that the cap locks securely into X Check the coolant temperature display in
place. the instrument cluster.
X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- The coolant temperature must be below
stick (Y page 347). 70 †.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 161) in
For further information on engine oil, see
(Y page 440). the ignition lock.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock-
wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
Other service products X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
remove it.
Checking the coolant level
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
G WARNING = in the filler neck when cold, there is
The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, enough coolant in coolant expansion
only unscrew the cap once the engine has tank ;.
cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge If the coolant level is approximately
must display less than 70 † . Otherwise, you 1.5 cm above marker bar = in the filler
could be scalded if hot coolant escapes. neck when warm, there is enough coolant
in coolant expansion tank ;.
X If necessary, top up with coolant that has
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 442).
Service 349
Topping up the windscreen washer sys- engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
tem/headlamp cleaning system engine oil level (Y page 346).
G WARNING The multifunction display shows a service

message for a few seconds, e.g.:
Windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Avoid spilling windscreen washer Next service A in .. days
fluid/antifreeze on hot engine components as Service A due
it can ignite and burn. Severe burns could be Service A overdue by ... days
the result. The letter indicates which service is due. A
stands for a minor service and B for a major
service. A number or another letter may be
displayed after the letter. This figure indicates

any necessary additional maintenance work
to be performed.
If you notify a qualified specialist workshop of
this display, you will receive a statement on
the associated costs.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is disconnec-
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. ted.
X Top up with the premixed washer fluid. Maintaining the time-dependent service
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck schedule:
until it engages. X Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before discon-
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
necting the battery.
windscreen washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system. or
Further information on windscreen washer X After reconnecting the battery, subtract
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 443). the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Service Hiding a service message

ASSYST PLUS X Press the % or a button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Displaying service messages
informs you of the next service due date.
X Switch the ignition on.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
You can obtain further information from a
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display a.
does not show any information on the The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Z
350 Care
Information about Service To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas

aftertreatment must be operated with the
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter- reducing agent AdBlue®. AdBlue® is topped
val display up as part of the service. Under normal oper-
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- ating conditions, a full tank of AdBlue® should
play has been inadvertently reset, this set- last until the next service due date.
ting can be corrected at a qualified special- Depending on how and where the vehicle is
ist workshop. used, there may be an increase in the
Have service work carried out as described AdBlue® consumption, resulting in the next
in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise service due date being brought forward.
lead to increased wear and damage to the Certain display messages show that
major assemblies or the vehicle.
AdBlue® must be topped up, e.g.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the er's Manual
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after
Refill AdBlue at workshop No start
the service work has been carried out. You
in .. km
can also obtain further information on main-
tenance work, for example. A warning tone also sounds.
You can no longer start the engine when the
Special service requirements AdBlue® supply has been used up
Arduous operating conditions or increased (Y page 281).
loads on the vehicle will require some service
! Have the AdBlue® tank topped up at a
work to be performed more often than for a
vehicle in normal use. Such arduous condi- qualified specialist workshop only. The
tions include regular city driving with frequent vehicle may otherwise be damaged or
intermediate stops and use in mountainous soiled.
terrain or on poor road surfaces. Before taking a trip with your vehicle outside
For example, if the vehicle is used under ardu- Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked at
ous operating conditions, have air filters, a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary,
engine oil and oil filters changed frequently have AdBlue® topped up. Before a longer stay
and check the wheels often. Further informa- outside of Europe, consult a qualified special-
tion can be obtained at a qualified specialist ist workshop.
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Observe the notes on AdBlue®(Y page 440).
Centre. You can obtain further information about
Driving abroad BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network AdBlue® from any Mercedes-Benz Service
is also available in other countries. The Centre.
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
for use when you are abroad are to be found
in the "Mercedes-Benz Service24h" section Care
of the Service Booklet. General notes
H Environmental note
AdBlue® service indicator Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
i For BlueTEC vehicles only.
ner.
Care 351
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are
of the following: closed completely.
Rdry, Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is
rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents switched off (OFF button is depressed).
Rthe windscreen wiper switch is at posi-
Rsolvents
tion 0.
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective ! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice make sure that the automatic transmission
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or is in transmission position N; otherwise,
damage the surfaces and protective film. the vehicle could be damaged.

RVehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever and
! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
key:
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel do not remove the key from the ignition
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause lock. Do not open the driver's door or
increased corrosion of the brake discs and front-passenger door when the engine is
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
should drive for a few minutes after clean- transmission selects park position P
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the automatically and locks the wheels. You
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The can prevent this by shifting the auto-
vehicle can then be parked up. matic transmission to N beforehand.
RVehicles with DIRECT SELECT lever and
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
KEYLESS-GO:
retaining the quality in the long term.
do not open the driver's door or front-
Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
passenger door when the engine is
ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P
automatically and locks the wheels.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission on vehicles with
Automatic car wash DIRECT SELECT stays in position N:
G WARNING X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing ignition is switched off.

the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For X Turn the key to position 2(Y page 161) in
this reason, following a car wash, drive with the ignition lock.
particular care until the brakes are dry. Use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-
ton on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
G WARNING X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, tion N.
deactivate the HOLD function and DISTRONIC X Release the brake pedal.
PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an auto- X Release the parking brake.
matic car wash.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the key in
! Make sure that: the ignition lock.
Z
352 Care
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about
wash from the very start. the correct distance is available from the
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi- equipment manufacturer.
cle in an automatic car wash. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off around when cleaning your vehicle.
wax from the windscreen and the wiper Do not aim directly at any of the following:
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce Rtyres
wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.
screen.
Relectrical components
Washing by hand Rbattery
Rconnectors
In some countries, washing by hand is only
Rlights
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements for each indi- Rseals
vidual country. Rtrim elements
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rventilation slots
vehicle in direct sunlight. Damaged seals or electrical components
X Use a soft sponge to clean. can lead to leaks or failures.
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the paintwork
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a ! Do not affix:
gentle jet of water.
Rstickers
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
Rfilms
the air inlet.
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently. to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
damage the paintwork.
thoroughly with a chamois. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
paintwork. quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all cialist workshop.
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
X Remove impurities immediately, where
soon as possible.
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
High-pressure cleaning equipment X Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
G WARNING X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu- off the treated areas afterwards.
lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth- oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci- with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
dent. lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
30 cm between the vehicle and the high- X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Care 353
Care and treatment of matt paintwork ! Do not park up the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
shiny.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
! The following may cause the paint to brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
become shiny and thus reduce the matt should drive for a few minutes after clean-
effect: ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate- brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
rials. vehicle can then be parked up.
RFrequent use of car washes.
Cleaning the windows

RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- G WARNING

ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove
wax. These products are only suitable for the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehi-
with matt finish leads to considerable sur- cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop
face damage (shiny, spotted areas). button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster have gone off. The
Always have paintwork repairs performed
windscreen wipers could otherwise move and
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
injure you.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
treatment under any circumstances. solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
Do not touch the insides of the windows
clear matt finish. This will help you to avoid
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
treatment.
the windows.
These notes also apply to light-alloy wheels
with a clear matt finish. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windscreen and the rear window at regular
i The vehicle should preferably be washed intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and pollen may under certain circumstan-
and plenty of water. ces prevent water from draining away. This
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo can lead to corrosion damage and damage
from the range of recommended and to electronic components.
approved Mercedes-Benz care products. X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agent that is recommended and approved
Cleaning vehicle parts by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the wheels
Cleaning the wiper blades
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage G WARNING
wheel bolts and brake components. Switch off the windscreen wipers and remove
the key from the ignition lock before cleaning
Z
354 Care
the windscreen or the wiper blades. On vehi- Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop cloths.
button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster have gone off. The Cleaning the sensors
windscreen wipers could otherwise move and
injure you. ! If you clean the sensors with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, make sure that you keep a
! Do not pull on the wiper blade. Otherwise, distance of at least 30 cm between the
the wiper blade could be damaged. vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner noz-
zle. Information about the correct distance
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and is available from the equipment manufac-
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the turer.
graphite coating could be damaged. This

could cause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windscreen could be damaged if
the wiper arm hits against it suddenly.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windscreen wipers back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean sensors : of the driving systems
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
lenses of the exterior lighting.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior Cleaning the reversing camera
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car around the reversing camera with a high-
shampoo or cleaning cloths. pressure cleaner.
Mirror turn signal

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Care 355
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-
camera lens :. pling :.
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes working properly.
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with alka- i You can also have the maintenance work
line-based cleaning agents, such as wheel on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch
cleaner. carried out by a qualified specialist work-
Impurities combined with the effects of road shop.
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust Interior care

pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win- Cleaning the display
ter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
product tested and approved by Mercedes- lowing:
Benz. Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch Rcommercially-available household clean-
ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi- not put pressure on the display surface
ronmentally-responsible manner. when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-
ble damage to the display.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high-
pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
! Observe the note on care provided by the
X Clean the display surface using a commer-
trailer manufacturer.
cially available microfibre cloth and TFT/
LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
fibre cloth.
Cleaning Night View Assist Plus

! Never clean the camera lens. When clean-
ing the field of vision of the driving systems,
make sure that you do not spray glass
cleaner on the camera lens. If the camera
lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist work-
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it shop.
becomes dirty or corroded.
X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
a brush.
Z
356 Care
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality

look of the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfibre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change colour tempora-
rily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wooden trim and trim ele-

ments
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of
X Use a soft cloth to clean the windscreen in damaging the surface.
front of camera ;. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim elements
with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfi-
Cleaning the plastic trim bre cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
G WARNING products recommended and approved by
When cleaning the steering wheel boss and Mercedes-Benz.
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning Cleaning the seat covers
agents containing solvents cause the surface
to become porous, and as a result plastic ! Observe the following when cleaning:
parts may break away and be thrown around Rclean genuine leather covers carefully
the interior when an airbag is deployed, which with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-
may result in severe injuries. ers down with a dry cloth. Make sure that
the leather does not become soaked. It
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- may otherwise become rough and
ces: cracked. Only use leather care agents
Rstickers that have been tested and approved by
Rfilms Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these
Rscented oil bottles or similar items from a qualified specialist workshop.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
You could otherwise damage the plastic.
moistened with a solution containing
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent 1 % detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
or sunscreen to come in contact with the
Care 357
Rclean cloth covers with a microfibre cloth

moistened with a solution containing
1 % detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid).
Rub carefully, and always wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
Cleaning results depend on the type of
dirt and how long it has been there.
Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.

! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen-
uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA
covers. If used often, these can damage the
cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to
make sure that the appearance and com-
fort of the covers are retained over time.
Cleaning the seat belts

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
at temperatures above 80 † or in direct
sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.
Cleaning the roof lining and carpets

X Roof lining: if it is very dirty, use a soft
brush or dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-
ing agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Z
358
359

Where will I find...? ........................... 360
Flat tyre ............................................. 363
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 367
Jump-starting .................................... 370
Towing and tow-starting .................. 372
Electrical fuses ................................. 375
Breakdown assistance
360 Where will I find...?
Useful information X Estate: open the tailgate.

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- X Remove warning triangle :.
Setting up the warning triangle
Where will I find...?

Warning triangle
: Press-stud
Removing the warning triangle ; Reflectors
= Feet
X Fold feet = down and out to the side.
X Pull side reflectors ; upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using
upper press-stud :.
First-aid kit
X Saloon: open the boot lid.

X Press warning triangle holder : up in the
direction of the arrow, open it and remove
the warning triangle.
Saloon: the first-aid kit is in the right-hand

stowage compartment in the boot.
X Slide the stowage net down.
X Open the stowage compartment.
Where will I find...? 361
X Loosen tensioning strap :. The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage

X Remove first-aid kit ;. compartment underneath the driver's seat.
X Pull handle : upward and fold cover ;
First-aid kit in the stowage net
forward.
X Remove the fire extinguisher from the
stowage compartment.
i Have fire extinguisher ; refilled after
each use and checked every one to two
years. It may otherwise fail in an emer-
gency.
Observe the legal requirements for each
individual country.
First-aid kit behind the side trim panel

Vehicle tool kit
Estate: depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, the first-aid kit is in the stowage net or General notes
behind the side trim panel.
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-
X Open the tailgate. age well under the boot floor/luggage com-
X Open the right-hand side trim panel if the partment floor. Depending on the vehicle
first-aid kit is in the side trim panel. equipment, the vehicle tool kit is on the left-
X Remove first-aid kit :. hand side or the right-hand side in the stow-
age well under the boot floor/load compart-
i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit ment floor.
at least once a year. Replace the contents
if necessary, and replace any missing i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
items. tions, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-
change tool kit. Some tools for changing a
wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
Fire extinguisher information on which tools are required to
perform a wheel change on your vehicle,
! Keep the stowage compartment closed consult a qualified specialist workshop.
while the vehicle is in motion. It may oth-
erwise be damaged.
362 Where will I find...?
Necessary wheel-changing tools can Vehicles with spare wheel/"Minispare"

include, for example: emergency spare wheel
Rjack
Rwheel chock
Rwheel wrench
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
: Vehicle tool kit tray

; Stowage tray
= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
X Open the boot lid/tailgate.
Example: vehicle tool kit in the left-hand stowage X Swing the boot floor/luggage compart-
space ment floor upwards (Y page 325) or
: Tyre sealant filler bottle (Y page 325).
; Folding wheel chock
The vehicle tool kit contains:
= One pair of gloves (under jack)
RFoldable wheel chock
? Tyre inflation compressor
RFuse allocation chart
A Towing eye RJack
B Jack RCentring pin
C Centring pin ROne pair of gloves
D Wheel wrench RWheel wrench
X Open the boot lid/tailgate. RTowing eye
X Swing the boot floor/luggage compart-
ment floor upwards (Y page 325) or
(Y page 325).
Flat tyre 363
Vehicles with a collapsible emergency X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
spare wheel from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
"normal" level is selected (Y page 208).
X Switch off the engine.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
: Towing eye the key from the ignition lock.
; One pair of gloves X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
= Jack driver's door.
? Folding wheel chock The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the key having been
A Centring pin
removed.
B Sheet for faulty wheel X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
C Tyre inflation compressor Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
D Wheel wrench (Y page 161).
E Fuse allocation chart X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that they are not endangered as
X Open the boot lid/tailgate.
they do so.
X Swing the boot floor/luggage compart- X Make sure that no one is near the danger
ment floor upwards (Y page 325) or
area while a wheel is being changed. Any-
(Y page 325).
one who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
Flat tyre X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-
Preparing the vehicle fic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
Information on changing a wheel/fitting
X Place the warning triangle a suitable dis-
(Y page 388).
tance away (Y page 360). Observe legal
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
requirements.
cles with MOExtended tyres.
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat char- MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat
acteristics) (Y page 363) characteristics)
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 364)
G WARNING
Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
countries) (Y page 425)
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of accident.
Z
364 Flat tyre
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. i When replacing one or all tyres, make
Avoid abrupt steering and driving manoeu- sure that you only use tyres marked
vres, and driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot- "MOExtended". Make sure that you only
holes, off-road). This applies in particular to a use the size of tyre specified for the vehicle.
laden vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
TIREFIT kit
Ryou hear banging noises.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Using the TIREFIT kit
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. TIREFIT is a tyre sealant.
RESP® is intervening constantly. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre. to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread.
After driving in emergency mode, have the You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures
down to Ò20 †.
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist

workshop with regard to their further use. The G WARNING
faulty tyre must be replaced.
In the following situations, the tyre sealant is
With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
characteristics), you can continue to drive tance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly:
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre
pressure in one or more tyres. larger than those mentioned above.
MOExtended tyres may only be used in con- Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
junction with an active tyre pressure loss Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
warning system or with an active tyre pres- or on a flat tyre.
sure monitor. There is a risk of accident.
The maximum driving distance is approx- Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
imately 80 km when the vehicle is partially specialist workshop.
laden, and approximately 30 km when the
vehicle is fully laden.
G WARNING
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tance possible depends upon: tion. It must not come into contact with your
Rspeed skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
Rroad condition inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away
Routside temperature from children. There is a risk of injury.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode If you come into contact with the tyre sealant,
may be reduced by extreme driving condi- observe the following:
tions/manoeuvres, or it can be increased RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin
through a moderate style of driving. immediately with water.
The maximum permissible distance which RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
the moment the tyre pressure loss warning oughly with clean water.
appears in the multifunction display. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immediately
You must not exceed a maximum speed of rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
80 km/h. plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
Flat tyre 365
RImmediately change out of clothing which X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out
has come into contact with tyre sealant. of the housing.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical X Screw hose A onto flange B of tyre seal-
attention immediately. ant bottle :.
X Place tyre sealant bottle : head down-
! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
wards into recess ; of the tyre inflation
pressor for longer than eight minutes at a
time without a break. It may otherwise compressor.
overheat.
The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-
ated again once it has cooled down.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tyre.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
TIREFIT sticker, 2-part
X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
X Do not remove any foreign objects which (Y page 332) in your vehicle.
have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
nails. Observe the notes on sockets
(Y page 332).
X Remove the tyre sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tyre infla-
tion compressor from the stowage well lock (Y page 161).
underneath the boot floor/luggage com- X Press on/off switch = on the tyre inflation
partment floor (Y page 361). compressor to I.

X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within The tyre inflation compressor is switched
the driver's field of vision. on. The tyre is inflated.
X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
i First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.
The pressure can briefly rise to approx-
valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.
imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for
five minutes. The tyre should then have
attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi) has been attained after five minutes:
(Y page 366).
Z
366 Flat tyre
If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out
26 psi) has not been attained after five of the filler hose. This could cause stains.
minutes: (Y page 366). Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
i If the tyre sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
It can then be removed like a layer of film. H Environmental note
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of
have it cleaned as soon as possible with professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
perchloroethylene. workshop.
Tyre pressure not reached If a tyre pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)
has been attained after five minutes:
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been achieved after five minutes: X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X
the faulty tyre.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
the faulty tyre.
tion compressor and the warning triangle.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
X Pull away immediately.
approximately 10 m.
X Pump up the tyre again. The maximum speed for a tyre sealed with
tyre sealant is 80 km/h. The upper part of
After a maximum of five minutes the tyre
the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
instrument cluster in the driver's field of
26 psi).
vision.
G WARNING X Stop after driving for approximately ten
If the required tyre pressure is not reached minutes and check the tyre pressure with
after the specified time, the tyre is too badly the tyre inflation compressor.
damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the The tyre pressure must now be at least
tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and a tyre 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
pressure that is too low can significantly
G WARNING
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. If the required tyre pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tyre is too
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot
repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres
and a tyre pressure that is too low can signif-
Tyre pressure reached icantly impair the vehicle's braking and driv-
ing characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
G WARNING
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of X Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
accident. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (see the fuel filler
You should therefore adapt your driving style flap for values).
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed X To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the specified maximum speed with a tyre that the tyre inflation compressor.
has been repaired using tyre sealant.
Battery (vehicle) 367
work on the battery carried out at a qualified

G WARNING
Hybrid vehicles: it is imperative that you read
the "HYBRID" supplement. Otherwise, you
may not recognise dangers.
G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit and
X To reduce the tyre pressure: depress damage your vehicle's electronic system. This
pressure release button E next to pres- can disrupt driving safety systems such as
sure gauge F. ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Elec-
tronic Stability Program).
X If the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the
RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock
filler hose from the valve of the repaired
during braking. This limits the steerability
tyre.
of the vehicle when braking and the braking
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
distance may increase. There is a risk of
repaired tyre. accident.
X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre
RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be
inflation compressor.
stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel starts
The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant to spin. There is a risk of accident.
bottle.
You should therefore have all work involving
X Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre infla-
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist
tion compressor and the warning triangle. workshop.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tyre changed there. G WARNING
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced as Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
soon as possible at a qualified specialist tective measures when handling batteries.
workshop. Risk of explosion
X Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Fire, naked flames and
i In your vehicle, you will find a sticker with smoking are prohibited
the Mercedes-Benz Service24h telephone when handling the battery.
number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's Avoid creating sparks.
side. Battery acid is caustic.
Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing.
Battery (vehicle) Wear suitable protective
Important safety notes clothing, in particular
gloves, an apron and a face
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or instal- mask.
ling, requires specialist knowledge and the
use of special tools. Therefore, always have
Z
368 Battery (vehicle)
Immediately rinse acid H Environmental note

splashes off with clean Batteries contain pollutants.
water. Consult a doctor if It is illegal to dispose of them
necessary. with the household rubbish.
Wear eye protection. They must be collected sep-
arately and disposed of in an
recycling system.
Keep children away.
manner. Take discharged
Observe this Owner's Man- batteries to a qualified spe-
ual. cialist workshop or to a col-
ies.
G WARNING ! Have the battery checked regularly at a

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- qualified specialist workshop.
mends that you only use batteries which have
Observe the service intervals in the Service
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
workshop for more information.
increased impact protection to prevent vehi-
cle occupants from suffering acid burns ! You should have all work involving the
should the battery be damaged in the event battery carried out at a qualified specialist
of an accident. workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
To prevent acid burns, observe the following necessary for you to disconnect the battery
safety notes when handling batteries: yourself, make sure that:
Rdo not lean over the battery. Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery. key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit
ensure that the ignition is switched off.
and the battery's gas mixture could ignite.
Check that all the indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
Rmake sure that you do not create an elec-
electronic components, such as the
trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic alternator, may be damaged.
clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
Therefore, you should not pull or slide the
battery over carpets or other synthetic
clamp and then the positive terminal
materials.
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-
Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge
tem may be damaged.
a possible electrostatic charge, step out of
Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,
the vehicle first and touch the bodywork.
the transmission is locked in position P
Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The
after disconnecting the battery. The vehi-
battery may explode as a result of electro-
cle is secured against rolling away. You
static charge or due to flying sparks.
can then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive
terminal clamp must be fitted securely dur-
ing operation.
Battery (vehicle) 369
In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- You can obtain information on battery charg-
mum possible service life, it must always be ers which allow the battery to be charged
sufficiently charged. while still installed from a qualified specialist
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can workshop.
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In such cases, have the battery dis- G WARNING
connected at a qualified specialist workshop. There is a risk of acid burns during the charg-
You can also charge the battery with a ing process due to the gases which escape
charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. from the battery. Do not lean over the battery
For more information, please contact a quali- during the charging process.
fied specialist workshop.
Have the battery charge checked more fre- G WARNING
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a skin, eyes or clothing.
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle ! Only charge the installed battery with a
parked up for a long period of time. battery charger which has been tested and
i When you park the vehicle, remove the approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
key if you do not require any electrical con-
while still installed in the vehicle.
sumers. The vehicle will then use very little
energy, thus conserving battery power. ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
i After an interruption of the power supply, mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
e.g. the battery was discharged, you have ! Only charge the battery using the jump-
to: start connection point.
Rset the clock. Information on setting the The jump-starting connection point is in the
clock can be found in the separate oper- engine compartment (Y page 370).
ating instructions. Read the battery charger's operating instruc-
On vehicles with COMAND Online and a tions before charging the battery.
navigation system, the clock is set auto- X Open the bonnet (Y page 345).
matically. X Connect the battery charger to the positive
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
terminal and earth point in the same order
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding as when connecting the donor battery in
the mirrors out once (Y page 120). the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 370).
Charging the battery
G WARNING
Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
area. As the battery is being charged, gases
can escape and generate minor explosions.
This could injure you and other persons or
cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
rosion on the vehicle.
Z
370 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
G WARNING
Hybrid vehicles: it is imperative that you read the "HYBRID" supplement. Otherwise, you may not
recognise dangers.
G WARNING
There is a risk of acid burns when jump-starting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from
the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jump-started.
G WARNING
Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid cre-
ating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke.
Comply with the important safety precautions when handling batteries. You will find these under
"Battery (vehicle) - important safety notes" in the index.
G WARNING
Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Vehicles with a petrol engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise,
the non-combusted fuel may damage the catalytic converter.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jump
leads. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
Rvehicles with a petrol engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust
system are cold.
Rdo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
Rjump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Ronly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
Rif the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
Rmake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:

RThe jump leads are not damaged.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps do not come into contact with other metal parts
while the jump leads are connected to the battery.
Rthe jump leads cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X Manual transmission: engage neutral.
Jump-starting 371
X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P.

X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the bonnet (Y page 345).
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jump lead. Always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using
the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let the engines run for several minutes.
X First, remove the jump leads from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time beginning at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jump leads.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jump-starting cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at
any qualified specialist workshop.
Z
372 Towing and tow-starting
Towing and tow-starting Rthe tow rope may only be attached to the
towing eyes.
Important safety notes Robserve the brake lamps of the towing
G WARNING vehicle while driving. Always maintain a
distance so that the tow rope does not
Hybrid vehicles: it is imperative that you read
sag.
the "HYBRID" supplement. Otherwise, you
Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow
may not recognise dangers.
your vehicle. The vehicle could be dam-
G WARNING aged.
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
towing bar if: this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
Rthe engine is not running. recover the vehicle with a crane.
Rthere is a brake system malfunction. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power
or the vehicle's electrical system. is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.
The power assistance for the steering and the ! To tow vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use
brake force booster do not work when the the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
engine is not running. You will need more The automatic transmission may otherwise
force to steer and brake, you may have to switch to position P when you open the
depress the brake pedal with maximum force. driver's or front-passenger door which
Before towing away, make sure that the steer- could damage the transmission.
ing can be moved and is not locked.
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
not be exceeded.
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire
G WARNING vehicle must be lifted up and transported.
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, weight must not exceed the maximum per-
deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-
vehicle is to be towed. cle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
! Only secure the tow rope or towing bar to
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
the towing eyes. The vehicle may otherwise
identification plate (Y page 435).
be damaged.
Observe the legal requirements for the rele-
! Observe the following points when towing vant countries when towing and tow-starting.
with a tow rope: It is better to have the vehicle transported
Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on than to have it towed.
both vehicles. If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-
Rthe tow rope must not be longer than is age, have it transported on a transporter or
legally permitted. It should be marked in trailer.
the middle, e.g. with a white cloth When towing a vehicle with an automatic
(30 x 30 cm) so that other road users are transmission, the transmission must be in
aware that a vehicle is being towed. position N.
Towing and tow-starting 373
The battery must be connected and charged. Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if you intend
Otherwise, you: to use the vehicle for towing, fold out the ball
Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to coupling and connect the towbar to it
position 2 (Y page 237).
Rcannot shift the transmission to position The mountings for the removable towing eyes
N on vehicles with automatic transmission are located in the bumpers. They are at the
front and at the rear, under the covers.
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
release the selector lever lock manually to
move it out of position P (Y page 179). tool kit (Y page 361).
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
direction of the arrow.
(Y page 90). You could otherwise be locked
X Take cover : off the opening.
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the
Deactivate tow-away protection
(Y page 79) before the vehicle is towed. stop and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye

Fitting/removing the towing eye
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
Fitting the towing eye X Position cover : on the bumper and press
it until it engages.
G WARNING
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
particularly careful when removing the rear
cover. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
! The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP® could other-
wise damage the brake system.
Only possible on vehicles without
4MATIC.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 129).
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
0 and remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X When leaving the vehicle, take the key or
the KEYLESS-GO key with you.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 372).
Example: Saloon, towing eye covers
Z
374 Towing and tow-starting
Towing the vehicle with both axles on bination switch is reset, the hazard warning
the ground lamps start flashing again.
G WARNING
The power assistance for the steering and the Transporting the vehicle
brake force booster do not work when the
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
engine is not running. You will then need
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
much more effort to brake and steer the vehi-
such as axle or steering components. Oth-
cle. Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
erwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
It is important that you observe the safety The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be
instructions when towing away your vehicle used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
(Y page 372). porter if you wish to transport it.
The automatic transmission automatically X Vehicles with manual transmission:
shifts to position P when you open the driver's shift to neutral.

or front-passenger door or when you remove X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
the key from the ignition lock. In order to turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
ensure that the automatic transmission stays lock.
in position N when towing the vehicle, you X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
must observe the following points: tion N.
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
that the key is in position 0 in the ignition
lock. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition applying the parking brake.
lock. X Vehicles with manual transmission:
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key engage first or reverse gear.
instead of the Start/Stop button X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
(Y page 161). shift the automatic transmission to posi-
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. tion P.
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N. 0 and remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
X Secure the vehicle.
depress the clutch pedal.
X Engage neutral.
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles
X Release the parking brake.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
(Y page 129). with the front or rear axle raised; otherwise,
the transmission may be damaged.
X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition
lock. If the vehicle has transmission damage or
i When towing with the hazard warning damage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-
ported on a transporter or trailer.
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual to signal a change of direc- In the event of damage to the electrical
tion. In this case, only the turn signals for system
the desired direction flash. When the com-
Electrical fuses 375
If the battery is defective, the automatic X Remove the towing eye (Y page 373).
transmission will be locked in position P. To X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.
shift the automatic transmission to position
Before tow-starting the following conditions
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
must be fulfilled:
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 370). Rthe battery is connected.
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter Rthe engine has cooled down.
or trailer. Rthe exhaust system has cooled down.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"

at (Y page 370).
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission Electrical fuses
must not be tow-started. The transmission Important safety notes
may otherwise be damaged.
When tow-starting, it is important that you G WARNING
observe the safety instructions (Y page 372) Only use fuses that have been approved for
and the legal requirements in each respective Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
country. correct fuse rating for the systems con-
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge
faulty fuses. Using fuses which have not been
(Y page 129).
approved or attempting to repair or bridge
X Fit the towing eye (Y page 373).
faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be over-
X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing loaded and result in a fire. Have the cause
rope. traced and rectified at a qualified specialist
X Depress and hold the brake pedal. workshop.
lock. ! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
X Depress the clutch pedal and keep it
have the correct fuse rating for the system
depressed.
concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
X Engage neutral.
tems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
X Tow-start the vehicle.
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
X Engage second gear. nents on the circuit and their functions stop
X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not operating.
depress the accelerator pedal while doing Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
so. the same rating, which you can recognise by
The engine is started. the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings
X Depress the clutch pedal and shift to neu- are listed in the fuse allocation chart.
tral. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
X Stop at a suitable place. cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
X Depress the parking brake. cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.
Service Centre.
Z
376 Electrical fuses
Before replacing a fuse

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 183).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
lock and remove it (Y page 161).
or
X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
the ignition is switched off (Y page 161).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster X Remove any existing moisture from the
must be off. fuse box using a dry cloth.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: X To open: take lines ; from the guides.
Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the X Move aside lines ;. Route the lines behind
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed connection = to do this.
in the direction of travel X Open clamps :.
Rfuse box in the boot/luggage compartment
X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when
viewed in the direction of travel X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
The fuse allocation chart is located in the lying correctly in the cover.
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
under the boot/luggage compartment floor into the retainer.
(Y page 361). X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
X Secure lines ; in the guides.
Fuse box in the engine compartment X Close the bonnet.
G WARNING
Make sure that the windscreen wipers are Fuse box in the boot
turned off and the key is pulled out of the igni-
tion lock before you open the cover of the fuse
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
box. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers and fuse box when the cover is open.
the wiper rods above the cover could be set ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
in motion. This could lead to you or others is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
being injured by the wiper rods. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it

is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are
switched off.
X Open the bonnet.
Electrical fuses 377
X To open: release cover : at the top right

and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
Fuse box in the luggage compartment

fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
X Open the tailgate.
X To open: pull handle : on the cover.

X Swing the cover down.
X Swing trim ; forwards.
Z
378
379

Operation ........................................... 380
Winter operation ............................... 382
Tyre pressure .................................... 383
Changing a wheel ............................. 388
Wheel and tyre combinations .......... 393
Emergency spare wheel ................... 425
Wheels and tyres

380 Operation
Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- shop and enquire about:
els, series and optional equipment for your Rsuitability
vehicle that were available at the time of Rlegal stipulations
going to press. National variations are pos- Rfactory recommendations
equipped with all of the functions descri- Information on the dimensions and types of
bed. This is also the case for systems and wheels and tyres for your vehicle can be
functions relevant to safety. found under "Wheel/tyre combinations"
(Y page 393).
i Read the information on qualified special- Information on air pressure for the tyres on
ist workshops: (Y page 25). your vehicle can be found:
Ron the tyre pressure label on the fuel filler
Important safety notes flap (Y page 180)
Runder "Tyre pressure" (Y page 383)
G WARNING Rin the "Tyre pressure" section
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, Modification work on the brake system and
Wheels and tyres
the wheel brakes or suspension components wheels is not permitted. The use of wheel
may be damaged. There is a risk of accident. spacers or brake dust shields is not permit-
Always replace wheels and tyres with those ted. This invalidates the general operating
that fulfil the specifications of the original part permit for the vehicle.
(designation, manufacturer, model). i Further information on wheels and tyres
can be obtained at any qualified specialist
G WARNING workshop.
A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steer-
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident. Operation
Tyres without run-flat characteristics:
Information on driving
Rdo not drive with a flat tyre.
Check the tyre pressures when the vehicle is
Rimmediately replace the flat tyre with your
heavily laden and, if necessary, adjust.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop. While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
Tyres with run-flat characteristics:
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
Rpay attention to the information and warn- the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you sus-
ing notices on MOExtended tyres (tyres pect that a tyre is defective, reduce your
with run-flat characteristics). speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible to check the wheels and tyres for
Accessories that are not approved for your damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being causing the unusual handling characteristics.
used correctly can impair the operating If you find no signs of damage, have the tyres
safety. and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or
Operation 381
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over The service life of tyres depends on various
kerbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try factors, including the following:
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- Rdriving style
erwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, Rtyre pressure
may be damaged.
Rtyre mileage
Regular checking of wheels and tyres

Tyre tread
G WARNING
Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pres- G WARNING
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre trac-
of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. tion. The tyre is no longer able to dissipate
water. This means that on wet road surfaces,
Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage
the risk of aquaplaning increases, in particular
and replace any damaged tyres immediately.
where speed is not adapted to suit the driving
Regularly check the wheels and tyres of your conditions. There is a risk of accident.
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres
well as after driving off-road or on rough may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of ent locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you
Wheels and tyres

tyre pressure. Pay particular attention to should regularly check the tread depth and
damage such as: the condition of the tread across the entire
Rcuts
width of all tyres.
in the tyres
Rpunctures
Minimum tyre tread depth for:
Rtears Rsummer tyres: 3 mm
in the tyres
Rbulges on tyres RM+S tyres: 4 mm
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels For safety reasons, replace the tyres before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the
tyre tread depth is reached..
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tyre (Y page 381). If necessary, turn
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tyre surface. Selecting, fitting and replacing tyres
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not fit and make.
anything onto the valve other than the stand- ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
ard valve cap or other valve caps approved by wheels.
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not fit any RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tyre pres- the first 100 km. They only reach their full
sure monitoring systems. performance after this distance.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tyres, RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tyre tread depth. This otherwise significantly
pressure as necessary (Y page 383). reduces the traction on wet roads (aqua-
Observe the notes on the emergency spare planing).
wheel (Y page 425). RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-
est, regardless of wear.
Z
382 Winter operation
Observe the notes on the emergency spare M+S tyres

wheel (Y page 425).
G WARNING
M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than
MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they
characteristics) do not provide sufficient traction. There is a
risk of accident.
With MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of 4 mm must be replaced.
pressure in one or more tyres.
At temperatures below +7 †, use winter tyres
MOExtended tyres may only be used in con- or all-season tyres. Both types of tyre are
junction with an active tyre pressure loss identified by the M+S marking.
warning system or with an active tyre pres-
Only winter tyres bearing the i snowflake
sure monitor and on wheels specifically tes-
ted by Mercedes-Benz. symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
Notes on driving with MOExtended tyres with ditions.
a flat tyre (Y page 363).
Only these tyres will allow driving safety sys-
i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-
Wheels and tyres
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. mally in winter. These tyres have been devel-
It is therefore recommended that you addi- oped specifically for driving in snow.
tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread
if you fit tyres that do not feature run-flat on all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
characteristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT acteristics.
kit can be obtained from a qualified spe-
Always observe the maximum permissible
cialist workshop.
speed specified for the M+S tyres you have
fitted.
Winter operation If you fit M+S tyres that have a lower maxi-
mum permissible speed than that of the vehi-
General notes cle, affix a corresponding warning label in the
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified driver's field of vision. This can be obtained
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" Under these circumstances, you should also
section (Y page 388). restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle
using permanent SPEEDTRONIC so that it
does not exceed the maximum permissible
Driving with summer tyres speed for the M+S tyres (Y page 195).
When you have fitted the M+S tyres:
At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres
lose elasticity and therefore traction and X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 383).
braking power. Change the tyres on your vehi- X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
cle to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very tem (Y page 385).
cold temperatures could cause tears to form, X Restart the tyre pressure monitor
thereby damaging the tyres permanently. (Y page 387).
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
For more information on driving with an emer-
for this type of damage.
gency spare wheel, see (Y page 425).
Tyre pressure 383
Snow chains ieving an increased driving force (cutting

action).
G WARNING
For more information on driving with an emer-
If you have fitted snow chains to the front gency spare wheel, see (Y page 425).
wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. Tyre pressure
To avoid hazardous situations: Tyre pressure specifications
Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels G WARNING
Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. Tyres with too low or too high tyre pressure
contain the following hazards:
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish
Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
to fit snow chains to steel wheels, make
heavily laden or when driven at high
sure that you remove the respective
speeds.
wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
Rthe tyres can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tyre
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- traction.
Wheels and tyres

mends that you only use snow chains that
Rthe driving, steering and braking character-
have been specially approved for your vehicle
istics may be severely impaired.
by Mercedes-Benz, or that are of a corre-
sponding standard of quality. There is a risk of accident.
If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear Follow recommended tyre inflation pressures
the following points in mind: and check the pressure of all the tyres includ-
ing the spare wheel:
Rsnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel-
Rat least every two weeks
tyre combinations. Permissible wheel-tyre
combinations (Y page 393). Rif the load changes
Ronly use snow chains when the road sur- Rbefore beginning a long journey
face is completely snow-covered. Remove Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-
the snow chains as soon as possible when road driving
you come to a road that is not snow-cov- If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.
ered.
Rlocal regulations may restrict the use of G WARNING
snow chains. Observe the appropriate reg- If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tyre
ulations if you wish to fit snow chains. valves, the tyre valves may be overloaded and
Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure
speed of 50 km/h. loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tyre pres-
Ron vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive sure monitors keep the tyre valve open. This
at raised vehicle level if snow chains have can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is
been fitted (Y page 208). a risk of accident.
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps
specifically provided by Mercedes-Benz for
pulling away with snow chains fitted
your vehicle onto the tyre valve.
(Y page 73). This way you can allow the
wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
Z
384 Tyre pressure
G WARNING If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the

If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the following tyre pressure information is only
wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre valid for that tyre size.
pressure that is too low may result in a tyre Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
blow-out. There is a risk of accident. tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre
RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. does not permit any reliable conclusion about
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the
electronic tyre pressure monitor, the tyre
valve is leaking.
pressure can be checked using the on-board
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- computer.
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
If possible, only correct tyre pressures when
the tyres are cold.
The tyres are cold:
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least
every 14 days. Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tyres
out of direct sunlight for at least three
You will find a table of tyre pressures for var- hours and
ious operating conditions on the inside of Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
your vehicle's fuel filler flap. than 1.6 km
Wheels and tyres
Operation with the emergency spare Depending on the ambient temperature, the
wheel(Y page 425). speed at which you are driving and the load
Operation with a trailer: the applicable on the tyres, the tyre temperature and thus
value for the rear tyres is the maximum tyre the tyre pressure change by approximately
pressure value stated in the table inside the 10 kPa per 10 † (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this
fuel filler flap. into account when checking the pressure of
The table inside the fuel filler flap may state warm tyres. Only correct the tyre pressure if
tyre pressures for different load conditions. it is too low for the current operating condi-
These are defined in the table as different tions.
numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or
gage. The actual number of seats may vary; too low can:
for more information, please refer to the vehi- Rshorten the service life of the tyres
cle's registration documents. Rcause increased tyre damage
If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pres- Rhave a negative effect on handling charac-
sures stated on the tyre pressure information
teristics and thus the driving safety (e.g.
label apply for all tyres approved for this vehi-
aquaplaning)
cle.
i The tyre pressure values given for low
loads are minimum values which offer you
good ride comfort characteristics.
However, you can also use the values given
for higher loads. These are permissible and
will not adversely affect the running of the
vehicle.
Tyre pressure 385
Speeds up to 210 km/h(does not apply to The function of the tyre pressure loss warning
AMG vehicles): despite the values stated on system is limited or delayed if:
the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
flap), for speeds up to 210 km/h and with tyres.
R16 or R17 tyres, the values stated can be Rroad conditions are wintry.
reduced as follows without a reduction in
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
safety:
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-
RSaloon: Ò30kPa (Ò0.3bar/Ò4psi)
nering at high speeds or driving with high
REstate: Ò20 kPa (Ò0.2 bar/Ò3 psi) rates of acceleration).
This does not apply to vehicles towing a Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
This improves the ride comfort of your vehi- vehicle or on the roof).
cle; however, the fuel consumption may
increase slightly. Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system
Tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Wheels and tyres

Rchanged the tyre pressure
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres- Rchanged the wheels or tyres
sure loss warning system monitors the set Rfitted new wheels or tyres
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of
X Before restarting, make sure that the tyre
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed pressures are set properly on all four tyres
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of for the respective operating conditions.
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning The recommended tyre pressures can be
message will appear in the multifunction dis- found in the table on the fuel filler flap. The
play. tyre pressure loss warning system can only
The tyre pressure warning system does not give reliable warnings if you have set the
warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre
Observe the notes on the recommended tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will
pressure (Y page 383). be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on
The tyre pressure loss warning system does
not replace the need to regularly check your tyre pressures (Y page 383).
vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of X Make sure that the key is in posi-
pressure on several tyres at the same time tion 2(Y page 161) in the ignition lock.
cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
warning system. to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn X Press the 9 or : button to select
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the Tyre pressure.
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the X Press the a button.
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the The message appears in the multifunction
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid display.
abrupt steering manoeuvres.
Z
386 Tyre pressure
If you wish to confirm the restart: the notes on the recommended tyre pressure
X Press button a. (Y page 383).
The Tyre press. now OK? message The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
appears in the multifunction display. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
Yes.
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
abrupt steering manoeuvres.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the
message appears in the multifunction dis- vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that
play. monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres.
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure The tyre pressure monitor warns you if the
loss warning system will monitor the set pressure drops in one or more of the tyres.
tyre pressures of all four tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only functions if
If you wish to cancel the restart: the corresponding sensors are fitted to all
wheels.
X Press button %.
Information on tyre pressures is displayed in
or the multifunction display. After a few minutes
X When the Tyre press. now OK? message of driving, the current tyre pressure of each
Wheels and tyres
appears, press the 9 or : button to tyre is shown in the multifunction display.

select Cancel. The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-
X Press the a button. board computer may differ from those meas-
The tyre pressure values stored at the last ured at a filling station using a pressure
restart will continue to be monitored. gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-
board computer refer to those measured at
sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pressure
Tyre pressure monitor values indicated by a pressure gauge are
higher than those shown by the on-board
Important safety notes computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressures.
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- The operation of the tyre pressure monitor
sure suitable for the operating situation can be affected by interference from radio
(Y page 383). Note that the correct tyre pres- transmitting equipment (e.g. radio head-
sure for the current operating situation must phones, two-way radios) that may be being
first be taught-in to the tyre pressure monitor. operated in or near the vehicle.
If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the
warning threshold for the warning message is Checking tyre pressure electronically
aligned to the reference values taught-in. X Make sure that the key is in position
Restart the tyre pressure monitor after 2(Y page 161) in the ignition lock.
adjusting to the cold tyre pressure
(Y page 387). The current pressures are
saved as new reference values. This will ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
ensure that a warning message will only
appear if the tyre pressure drops significantly.
The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. Observe
Tyre pressure 387
X Press the 9 or : button to select minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures
Tyre pressure. are displayed for the correct positions.
The current tyre pressure for each wheel Restarting the tyre pressure monitor
will be displayed in the multifunction dis- When you restart the tyre pressure monitor,
play. all existing warning messages are deleted and
If the vehicle was parked for longer than the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
20 minutes the Tyre pressures will be the currently set tyre pressures as the refer-
displayed after a few minutes of ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the
driving message is shown. tyre pressure monitor will automatically
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure detect the new reference values after you
monitor automatically recognises new have changed the tyre pressure. However,
wheels or new sensors. If a clear allocation of you can also define reference values man-
the tyre pressure values to the individual ually as described here. The tyre pressure
wheels is not possible, the message is shown monitor then monitors the new tyre pressure
instead of the tyre pressure display. The tyre values.
pressures are already being monitored. X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler
flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set
i If an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the
correctly in all four tyres for the current
Wheels and tyres

system may continue to show the tyre pres-
operating conditions.
sure of the wheel that has been removed
for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that Also observe the notes in the section on
the value displayed for the position where tyre pressures (Y page 383).
the spare wheel is fitted is not the same as X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the current tyre pressure of the emergency the ignition lock.
spare wheel. X Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Serv. menu.
Warning messages of the tyre pressure X Press the 9 or : button to select
monitor Tyre pressure.
If the tyre pressure monitor detects a signifi- X Press the a button.
cant pressure loss on one or more tyres, a The multifunction display shows the cur-
warning message is shown in the multifunc- rent tyre pressure for each tyre or the
tion display. A warning tone also sounds and Tyre pressures displayed after a
the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up in few minutes of driving message.
the instrument cluster. X Press the : button.
Each tyre that is affected by a significant loss The multifunction display shows the Use
of pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis- current pressure values as new ref‐
play. erence values message.
X If the Please correct tyre pressure
If you wish to confirm the restart:
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play, check the tyre pressure on all four X Press the a button.
wheels and correct it if necessary. The Tyre press. monitor restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are play.
interchanged, the tyre pressures may be
displayed for the wrong positions for a
short time. This is rectified after a few
Z
388 Changing a wheel
After you have driven for a few minutes, the tance" section (Y page 363). You will also find
system checks whether the current tyre information on driving with MOExtended
pressures are within the specified range. tyres in the event of a flat tyre.
The new tyre pressures are then accepted You can find information on what to do in the
as reference values and monitored. event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assis-
If you wish to cancel the restart: tance" section (Y page 363). You will also find
information on driving with MOExtended
X Press the % button. tyres in the event of a flat tyre.
The tyre pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Interchanging the wheels
Radio type approval for the tyre pres-
sure monitor G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
In certain countries, a radio type approval for severely impair the driving characteristics if
the tyre pressure monitor may be required. the wheels or tyres have different dimensions.
The radio type approval number for the tyre The wheel brakes or suspension components
pressure monitor can be found online at: may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
http://www.mercedes-benz.de/ dent.
betriebsanleitung.
Wheels and tyres
Interchange front and rear wheels only if the

Country Radio type approval number wheels and tyres are of the same dimensions.
Brazil 1489-10-4415 ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure

Dubai TRA, Registered NO monitor, electronic components are loca-
0016161/08 ted in the wheel.
TRA, Registered NO Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in
0016162/08 the area of the valve, as this could damage
the electronic components.
Morocco MR5527 ANRT 2010/ 27. April Only have tyres changed at a qualified spe-
2010 cialist workshop.
MR5526 ANRT 2010/ 27. April Interchanging the front and rear wheels of
2010 differing dimensions can render the general
Philip- ESD-1105558C operating permit invalid.
pines Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the "Fitting a wheel" section (Y page 389).
Singa- Compliance with IDA Standard
pore N0140-09 The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
South TA-2008/1068 Interchange the wheels before a clear wear
Africa TA-2008/1069 pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres
typically wear more on the shoulders and the
rear tyres in the centre.
Changing a wheel On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can interchange the wheels
Flat tyre every 5000km to 10,000 km depending on
You can find information on what to do in the the degree of tyre wear. Maintain the direc-
event of a flat tyre in the "Breakdown assis- tion of tyre rotation.
Changing a wheel 389
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel "normal" level is selected (Y page 208).
is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, X Switch off the engine.
if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
warning system or the tyre pressure monitor. the key from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
Direction of rotation driver's door.

The on-board electronics have status 0,
Tyres with a specified direction of rotation which is the same as the key having been
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk removed.
of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben- X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
efits if the correct direction of rotation is Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
observed. (Y page 161).
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates X If included in the vehicle equipment,
its correct direction of rotation. remove the tyre-change tool kit from the
vehicle.
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
Storing wheels
away.
Wheels and tyres

Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the i Apart from certain country-specific varia-
tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a
tyre-change tool kit. Some tools for chang-
ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For
Cleaning the wheels more information on which tools are
required to perform a wheel change on your
G WARNING vehicle, consult a qualified specialist work-
The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grind- shop.
ers) can cause damage not visible from the Necessary wheel-changing tools can
outside to tyres or chassis components. Com- include, for example:
ponents damaged in this way can unexpect- Rjack
edly fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Rwheel chock
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
Rwheel wrench
lar-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have dam-
aged tyres or chassis components replaced
immediately. Securing the vehicle against rolling
away
Fitting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
Z
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, Raising the vehicle

it can be found in the tyre-change tool kit
(Y page 361). G WARNING
The folding wheel chock is an additional If you do not position the jack correctly at the
securing measure to prevent the vehicle from appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
rolling away, for example when changing a jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
wheel. There is a risk of injury.
X Fold both plates upwards :.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
X Fold out lower plate ;.
must be positioned vertically, directly under
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the jacking point of the vehicle.
the openings in base plate =.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the jack is
used incorrectly, it could tip over while the
vehicle is raised.
Wheels and tyres
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold

the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for per-
forming maintenance work under the vehi-
Securing the vehicle on level ground (example: cle.
Saloon) Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
X On level ground: place chocks or other downhill slopes.
suitable items under the front and rear of Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the rolling away by applying the parking brake
wheel you wish to change. and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-
gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients height.
(example: Saloon)
Rmake sure that the distance between the
X On light downhill gradients: place
underside of the tyres and the ground does
chocks or other suitable items in front of not exceed 3 cm.
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Rnever place your hands or feet under the
raised vehicle.
Changing a wheel 391
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.

Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the boot lid/
tailgate when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG Sports

package)
X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
equipment: fold cover ; upwards.
Using wheel wrench :, loosen the bolts on
Wheels and tyres

X
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
X Position jack ? at jacking point =.
Jacking points (example: Saloon)

The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel arches and just in front of the rear
wheel arches (arrows).
AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG Example
equipment: the vehicle has covers fitted next X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-
to the jacking points on the outer sills to pro- tioned vertically under the jacking point.
tect the vehicle body
Z
X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
completely on jacking point = and the of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. specialist workshop immediately. Have the
X Turn crank A until the tyre is raised a max- damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
imum of 3 cm off the ground. replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING
Removing a wheel
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo- when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can over. There is a risk of injury.
strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
it. Therefore, take precautions and get a when the vehicle is on the ground.
second person to assist you. Alternatively,
you can use a second centring pin. Always pay attention to the instructions and
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. safety notices in "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 388).
The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel
hubs could otherwise be damaged when Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
the bolts are tightened. for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
Wheels and tyres
only use wheel bolts which have been

approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! AMG vehicles: during removal and repo-
sitioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can
strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage
it. Therefore, take precautions and get a
second person to assist you. Alternatively,
you can use a second centring pin.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X Screw centring pin : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
Fitting a new wheel

G WARNING Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with emer-
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged gency spare wheel)
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could surfaces.
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
accident.
centring pin and push it on.
Wheel and tyre combinations 393
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
ger-tight. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
X Unscrew the centring pin. tools in the boot again.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG
tight. equipment: insert the cover into the outer
X Vehicles with a collapsible emergency sill.
spare wheel: inflate the collapsible emer- X Check the air pressure of the newly fitted
gency spare wheel (Y page 427). wheel and adjust accordingly.
Only then lower the vehicle. Observe the recommended tyre pressure
(Y page 383).
Lowering the vehicle i Vehicles with tire pressure control sys-
G WARNING tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped
with functioning sensors.
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Wheel and tyre combinations
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop General notes
Wheels and tyres

after a wheel is changed.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-
! Vehicles with a collapsible emergency ommends that you only use tyres and
spare wheel: Inflate the collapsible emer- wheels which have been approved by
gency spare wheel using the tyre inflation Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-
compressor before lowering the vehicle. cle.
The rim could otherwise be damaged. These are specially adapted to the control
systems, such as ABS or ESP® and are
marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tyres featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Tightening wheel bolts (example: vehicle with Only use tyres, wheels or accessories tes-
emergency spare wheel) ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-
X Turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle
until the vehicle is once again standing noise emissions or fuel consumption, may
firmly on the ground. otherwise be adversely affected. In addi-
X Place the jack to one side.
tion, when driving with a load, tyre dimen-
sion variations could cause the tyres to
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
come into contact with the bodywork and
wise pattern in the sequence indicated axle components. This could result in dam-
(: to A). The tightening torque must be age to the tyres or the vehicle.
130 Nm.
Z
394 Wheel and tyre combinations
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for ally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you
damage resulting from the use of tyres, fit tyres that do not feature run-flat charac-
wheels or accessories other than those tes- teristics, e.g. winter tyres. A TIREFIT kit can
ted and approved. be obtained from a qualified specialist work-
Further information about wheels, tyres shop.
and approved combinations can be i Not all wheel/tyre combinations can be
obtained from any qualified specialist mounted at the factory in all countries.
workshop.
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be detec-
ted on retreaded tyres. As a result,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
fit used tyres if you have no information
about their previous usage.
! Large wheels: the lower the section width
for a certain wheel size, the lower the ride
Wheels and tyres
comfort is on poor road surfaces. Roll com-

fort and suspension comfort are reduced
and the risk of damage to the wheels and
tyres as a result of driving over obstacles
increases.
Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-
ing tyre tables:
RBA: both axles
RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle
You will find a table with recommended tyre

pressures for various operating conditions on
the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. For
further information on tyre pressure, see
(Y page 383). Check tyre pressures regularly
and only when the tyres are cold.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always fit
the vehicle:
Rwith tyres of the same size on a given axle
(left/right)
Rwith the same type of tyres at a given time
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended
tyres)
Vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you addition-
Tyres
E 200 BlueEFFICIENCY
Summer tyres
R16
Tyres Light-alloy wheels

BA: 205/60 R16 92 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
Wheels and tyres

R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL MOExtended5 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
5 MOExtended tyres (tyres featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activate tyre pressure
loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor.
6 The use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 H XL M+Si4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46

Wheels and tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
7 Only in combination with AIRMATIC (code 489), Direct Control suspension (code 677) or Sports package
(code 950).
8 Not in combination with trailer tow hitch (code 550) or folding bench seat (code 844; Estate).
9 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in the "Wheel/tyre combinations" section.
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
Summer tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
Wheels and tyres

BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45,5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 H XL M+Si4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45,5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46

Wheels and tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

4 Estate only.
3 Saloons only.
E 300
Summer tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Summer tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
E 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

Summer tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
R193

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
(code 950).
Z

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

Summer tyres
R1610
Wheels and tyres

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
10 Not in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952.

BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Wheels and tyres

RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R1610

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
4 Estate only.
(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
Z
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

Wheels and tyres

Summer tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
R193

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

3 Saloons only.
(code 950).
4 Estate only.
Z
Summer tyres
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
Wheels and tyres
R18


Summer tyres
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R18

4 Estate only.
(code 950).
E 63 AMG
Summer tyres
R18

FA: 255/40 ZR18 (99 Y) XL MO111 FA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 37
RA: 285/35 ZR18 (101 Y) XL MO16, 11 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52
R19

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL9 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37
RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y)XL6, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
Winter tyres
R18
Wheels and tyres

FA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si11 FA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 37
RA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si11 RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2 ET 52
R19

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si9, 12 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si9, 12, 13 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si9 FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2 ET 37

RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si9, 13 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 52
11 Not in conjunction with a ceramic brake system.

12 Estate: maximum permissible speed 220 km/h.
13 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.
Z
E 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY

Summer tyres
R16

BA: 205/60 R16 92 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
Wheels and tyres

R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z
R18


Summer tyres
R16

BA: 205/60 R16 92 W3 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46

Wheels and tyres
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R16
Wheels and tyres

BA: 205/60 R16 92 H M+Si3 BA: 7.0 J x 16 H2 ET 38
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
4 Estate only.
(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
Z

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18


Summer tyres
R16
Wheels and tyres

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.

BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Wheels and tyres

RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
4 Estate only.
(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
Z

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

E 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

Wheels and tyres
Summer tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
R193

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18


Summer tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
3 Saloons only.
(code 950).
4 Estate only.
Z

BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

Wheels and tyres
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
4 Estate only.
3 Saloons only.
(code 950).
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
Wheels and tyres

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

E 350 BlueTEC
Summer tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z

BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

Wheels and tyres
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
4 Estate only.
3 Saloons only.
(code 950).
Winter tyres
R16

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
Wheels and tyres

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z

Summer tyres
R1614

BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 W XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
BA: 225/55 R16 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17

Wheels and tyres
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
FA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
RA: 265/35 R18 97 Y XL6 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 ET 54
14 Notin conjunction with Sports package code 950/952.

3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
R19

FA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL7, 8, 9 FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
RA: 275/30 R19 96 Y XL6, 7, 8, 9 RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R1610

BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 7.5 J x 16 H2 ET 45.5
BA: 225/55 R16 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 16 H2 ET 46
R17
Wheels and tyres

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
(code 950).
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Z
R18


Summer tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 95 W3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 Y XL4 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

Wheels and tyres
R18

BA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 48
Winter tyres
R17

BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48
BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.0 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
BA: 245/45 R17 95 H M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48
3 Saloons only.
4 Estate only.
Emergency spare wheel 425

BA: 245/45 R17 99 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 ET 48

M+SiMOExtended5
R18

Emergency spare wheel Snow chains must not be fitted to emergency

spare wheels.
G WARNING
General notes
The wheel/tyre dimensions and the tyre type
Wheels and tyres

of the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel You should regularly check the pressure of all
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Fit- your tyres, including the emergency spare
ting a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and cor-
may severely impair the driving characteris- rect the pressure as necessary (Y page 383).
tics. There is a risk of accident. The applicable value is found on the wheel or
To prevent hazardous situations: under "Technical data" (Y page 429).
RAdapt
An emergency spare wheel may also be fitted
your driving style accordingly and
against the direction of rotation. Observe the
drive carefully.
time restriction on use as well as the speed
RNever fit more than one spare wheel/emer-
limitation specified on the emergency spare
gency spare wheel if the dimesions are dif- wheel.
ferent to those of the wheel being replaced.
Replace the tyres after six years at the latest,
ROnly use a spare wheel/emergency spare
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
wheel briefly if the dimesions are different emergency spare wheel.
to those of the wheel being replaced.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
RDo not switch off ESP®.
emergency spare wheel fitted, the tyre
RHave the spare wheel/emergency spare
pressure loss warning system or the tyre
wheel in question replaced at the nearest pressure monitor cannot function reliably.
qualified specialist workshop. Make sure Only restart the tyre pressure loss warning
that the wheel/tyre dimensions and tyre system/tyre pressure monitor when the
type are correct. defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor:
exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
the system may still display the tyre pres-
4 Estate only.
Z
426 Emergency spare wheel
sure of the removed wheel for a few

minutes. The value displayed for the moun-
ted emergency spare wheel is not the same
as the current tyre pressure of the emer-
gency spare wheel.
Removing the "Minispare" emer-

gency spare wheel/collapsible emer-
gency spare wheel
Opening the stowage well Example: Estate without a folding bench seat
X Without a folding bench seat: remove
stowage tray :.
X With a folding bench seat: lift up the lug-
gage compartment floor.
Removing an emergency spare wheel

(Estate without a folding bench seat, or
Wheels and tyres
Saloon)
Example: well insert

Saloon: the emergency spare wheel can be
found in the stowage well under the boot
floor.
X Swing the boot floor upwards
(Y page 325).
X Release tabs : on the right of well
insert ;.
X Reach into recess = of well insert ;, Example: Saloon, stowage well
swing the insert up and remove it. X Remove vehicle tool kit tray :.
Estate: the emergency spare wheel is located X Turn stowage tray ; anti-clockwise and
in the stowage well under the luggage com- remove it.
partment floor. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
X Without a folding bench seat: lift up the wheel = or collapsible emergency spare
EASY-PACK folding load compartment floor wheel.
(Y page 325).
X With a folding bench seat: remove the
seat cushions of the folding bench seat
(Y page 113).
Removing the emergency spare wheel X Remove the protective film from the vehicle
(Estate with folding bench seat) tool kit and put it over the collapsible emer-
gency spare wheel.
X Stow the collapsible emergency spare
wheel in the emergency spare wheel well
under the boot.
Inflating the collapsible emergency

spare wheel
! Inflate the collapsible emergency spare
wheel using the tyre inflation compressor
Example: emergency spare wheel
before lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim
could otherwise be damaged.
X Remove vehicle tool kit tray : by
recess ;. ! Do not operate the tyre inflation com-
pressor for longer than eight minutes at a
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
time without a break. It may otherwise
wheel or collapsible emergency spare
overheat.
wheel =.
Wheels and tyres

The tyre inflation compressor can be oper-
For further information on changing and fit- ated again once it has cooled down.
ting a wheel, see (Y page 389).
Stowing a used collapsible emer-

gency spare wheel
! Only place the collapsible emergency
spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry.
Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehi-
cle.
Take the following steps to stow a used col-
lapsible emergency spare wheel. It will not
otherwise fit into the spare wheel well.
X Mount the collapsible emergency spare
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have wheel as described (Y page 388).
this work performed at a qualified specialist The collapsible emergency spare wheel
workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service must be mounted before it is inflated.
Centre. X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of
X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. the housing.

X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
the valve insert from the valve and release lapsible emergency spare wheel.
the air. X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the
i Fully deflating the tyre may take a few valve.
minutes. X Make sure on/off switch A of the tyre
X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. inflation compressor is set to 0.
X Screw the valve cap back on.
Z
428 Emergency spare wheel
X Insert connector ? into the cigarette

lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 331). Observe the notes on sock-
ets (Y page 332).
lock (Y page 161).
X Press on/off switch A on the tyre inflation
compressor to I.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
on. The tyre is inflated. The tyre pressure is
shown on pressure gauge =.
X Pump the tyre to the specified tyre pres-
sure.
The specified tyre pressure is printed on
the yellow label of the emergency spare
wheel.
Wheels and tyres
X When the specified tyre pressure has been

reached, press on/off switch A on the
electric air pump to 0.
The tyre inflation compressor is switched
off.
lock.
X If the tyre pressure is higher than the speci-
fied pressure, press pressure release but-
ton ; until the correct tyre pressure has
been reached.
X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from
the valve.
X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible
emergency spare wheel valve again.
X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
section of the blower housing.
X Stow the tyre inflation compressor in the
vehicle.
Technical data
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
T 155/70 R17 110 M15 4.0 B x 17 H2 ET 3915
Tyre pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
T 155/60 R18 107 M16 4.5B x 18 H2 ET 3616
AMG vehicles
Collapsible emergency spare wheel
175/50 – 19 97 P 6.5 B x 19 H2 ET 14
Wheels and tyres

15 Not for E 500 BlueEFFICIENCY and E 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY.

16 Only for E 500 BlueEFFICIENCY and E 500 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY.
Z
430
431

Information on technical data ......... 432
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 432
Vehicle electronics ........................... 433
Identification plates ......................... 435
Service products and capacities ..... 435
Vehicle data ...................................... 444
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 447
24 GHz radar sensor system (coun-
try overview) ..................................... 451
Technical data
432 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Useful information parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels

and accessories that have been specifically
i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- approved for your vehicle.
vehicle that were available at the time of H Environmental note
going to press. National variations are pos- Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned
sible. Note that your vehicle may not be assemblies and parts which are of the same
equipped with all of the functions descri- quality as new parts. For these, the same war-
bed. This is also the case for systems and ranty applies as for new parts.
! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well
as control units and sensors for these
restraint systems, may be installed in the
following areas of your vehicle:
Information on technical data Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
G WARNING Rdoor sills
Hybrid vehicles: ensure that you read the Rseats
"HYBRID" supplement. You could otherwise Rdashboard
fail to recognise dangers. Rinstrument cluster
Rcentre console
You can find current technical data on the
Internet at: Do not install accessories such as audio
Technical data
http://www.mercedes-benz.com systems in these areas. Do not carry out

repairs or welding. You could impair the
i The technical data was determined in
operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
accordance with EC Directives. All data
tems.
applies to the vehicle's standard equip-
ment. The data may therefore differ for Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified
vehicles with optional equipment. You can specialist workshop.
obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. version parts and accessories that have been
specifically approved for your vehicle for their
reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
G WARNING accepts no responsibility for the use of parts
Driving safety may be impaired if non- that have been independently or officially
approved parts, tyres and wheels or safety- approved.
relevant accessories are used. In Germany, certain parts are only officially
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel- approved for installation or modification if
evant systems, e.g. the brake system. This they comply with legal requirements. This
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle also applies to some other countries. All gen-
and cause an accident. uine Mercedes-Benz parts meet the approval
requirements. The use of non-approved parts
For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends
may invalidate the vehicle's general operating
that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or
permit.
Vehicle electronics 433
This is the case: G WARNING

Rif they cause a change of the vehicle type Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
from that for which the vehicle's general lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in
operating permit was granted the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial
Rif other road users could be endangered takes into account current scientific discus-
Rif the emission or noise levels are adversely sions relating to the possible health hazards
affected. that may result from electromagnetic fields.
Always specify the vehicle identification num- Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ber (VIN) (Y page 435) and the engine num- ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
ber (Y page 435) when ordering genuine cialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz parts.
! The operating permit may be invalidated
if the instructions for installation and use of
RF transmitters are not observed.
Vehicle electronics
In particular, the following conditions must
Tampering with the engine electron- be complied with:
ics Ronly approved wavebands may be used.
G WARNING Rthe maximum permissible output in
Always have work on the engine electronics these wavebands must be complied with.
and related components carried out at a quali- Rthe approved aerial positions must be
fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi- complied with.
cle's operating safety could be affected.
Technical data
! Only have work carried out on the engine
electronics and its associated parts, such
as control units, sensors and connector
leads, at a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle components may otherwise wear
more quickly and the vehicle's operating
permit may be invalidated.
Retrofitting two-way radios and Saloon: approved aerial positions

mobile phones (RF transmitters) : Front roof area
G WARNING ; Rear roof area
Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can = Rear wing
cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction. ? Boot lid
The vehicle's operating safety and thus your
own safety are impaired.
Have aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
ting equipment installed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Z
434 Vehicle electronics
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at

the base of the aerial must not exceed the
following values:
Waveband Maximum
transmission
output (PEAK)
Short wave (f < 54 MHz) 100 W
4 m waveband 30 W
Estate: approved aerial positions 2 m waveband 50 W

: Front roof area trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
; Rear roof area
70 cm waveband 35 W
= Rear wing
GSM/DCS/PCS 10 W
i When fitting an aerial on the front roof
area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, 850/900/1800/1900
observe the sweeping range of the roof. UMTS/LTE 10 W
On vehicles with panorama sliding sunroof,
fitting an aerial to front or rear roof area is The following can be used in the vehicle with-
not permitted. out restrictions:
On the rear wing, it is recommended to RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
Technical data
position the aerial on the side of the vehicle

sion output of up to 100 mW
closest to the centre of the road.
Rmobile phones (GSM/DCS/PCS/UMTS/
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS LTE)
21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for
There are no restrictions when positioning the
fitting aftermarket radio frequency transmit-
aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the fol-
ting equipment") when retrofitting RF (radio
lowing wavebands:
frequency) transmitters. Comply with the
legal requirements for add-on parts. Rtrunked
radio/Tetra
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio R70cm waveband
equipment, use the power supply or aerial RGSM/DCS/PCS
connections intended for use with the basic RUMTS/LTE
wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's
additional instructions when installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-
mum transmission outputs or aerial positions
must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and capacities 435
Identification plates data applicable to your vehicle on the vehi-

cle's identification plate.
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
VIN
X Open the front right-hand door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :. X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-
most position.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 435).
Technical data
Engine number
The engine number is stamped onto the
crankcase. You can obtain further informa-
Example: vehicle identification plate tion from any qualified specialist workshop.
: Vehicle identification plate
; Vehicle manufacturer (Daimler AG)
Service products and capacities
= EU type approval number (only for certain
countries) Important safety notes
? VIN
G WARNING
A Maximum permissible gross vehicle
When handling, storing and disposing of any
weight (kg)
service products, please observe the relevant
B Maximum permissible mass of vehicle/
regulations, as you could otherwise endanger
trailer combination (kg)
C Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
Keep service products away from children.
D Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
To protect your health, do not allow service
E Paint code products to come into contact with your eyes
i The data shown on the vehicle identifica- or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if
tion plate is example data. This data is dif- any service product is swallowed.
ferent for every vehicle, and can deviate
from the data shown here. You can find the
Z
436 Service products and capacities
H Environmental note G WARNING

Dispose of service products in an environ- Avoid contact with fuels.
mentally-responsible manner. It is hazardous to your health if your skin
comes into direct contact with fuels or you
Service products include the following: breathe in fuel vapours.
Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel)
Rexhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. Tank capacity
AdBlue®
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
depending on the vehicle equipment.
Rcoolant
Rbrake fluid Model Total capa-
Rwindscreen washer fluid
city
Rclimate control system refrigerant E 200 BlueEFFICIENCY 59.0 l
Components and service products must be E 250 BlueEFFICIENCY or
matched. Mercedes-Benz recommends that E 300 BlueEFFICIENCY, 80.0 l
you use products tested and approved by Saloon
Mercedes-Benz. They are listed in this E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY,
Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the appro- Saloon
priate section.
E 200 CDI BlueEFFI-
You can identify service products approved CIENCY
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
E 220 CDI BlueEFFI-
Technical data
tions on the container:

CIENCY
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) E 250 CDI BlueEFFI-
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) CIENCY
Other designations or recommendations indi- E 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEF-
cate a level of quality or a specification in FICIENCY
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been All other models (except 80.0 l
approved by Mercedes-Benz. E 63 AMG)
Further information can be obtained from any E 63 AMG 66.0 l
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the or
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
80.0 l
Fuel Model Of which

reserve fuel
Models with 59.0 l total Approx-
G WARNING capacity imately 8.0 l
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are therefore prohibited when Models with 80.0 l total approx-
handling fuels. capacity imately 9.0 l
Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating E 63 AMG Approx-
before refuelling. imately
14.0 l
Petrol (EN 228, E DIN 51626-1) fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full
throttle.
Fuel grade
Information on refuelling (Y page 180).
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
petrol engine. Even a small quantity of die- AMG vehicles
sel will damage the fuel injection system. ! Only refuel using super unleaded petrol
! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at with at least 98 RON/88 MON that con-
least 95 RON/85 MON that conforms to forms to European standard EN 228 or an
European standard EN 228 or E DIN equivalent specification.
51626-1 or an equivalent specification. You can otherwise impair engine output or
Fuel with this specification may contain up damage the engine.
to 10 % ethanol. ! Premium-grade unleaded petrol with an
! Do not use the following: octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may be
used as a temporary measure if the recom-
RE85 (petrol with 85 % ethanol) mended fuel is not available. This may
RE100 (100 % ethanol) reduce engine performance and increase
RM15 (petrol with 15 % methanol) fuel consumption. As much as possible,
RM85 (petrol with 85 % methanol) avoid driving at full throttle.
RM100 (100 % methanol) ! Regular unleaded petrol with an octane
RPetrol with metallic additives rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also be
RDiesel used as a temporary measure if the recom-
Do not mix these fuels with petrol, and do mended fuel is not available.
Technical data
not use any additives. This can otherwise Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel
lead to engine damage. This does not consumption, and the engine power output
include cleaning additives for the removal is noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full
and prevention of residue build-up. Only throttle.
cleaning additives recommended by If only regular unleaded petrol with an
Mercedes-Benz should be added to petrol, octane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or
see "Additives". You can obtain further lower is available, you must have the vehi-
information from any Mercedes-Benz cle adapted to this fuel at a qualified spe-
Service Centre. cialist workshop.
Usually you will find information about the i E10 fuel contains up to 10 % bioethanol.
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10
label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta- fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10
tion staff. fuel.
i E10 fuel contains up to 10 % bioethanol. E 300 BlueEFFICIENCY, E 300 4MATIC
Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 BlueEFFICIENCY, E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY
fuel. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 and E 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY
fuel. ! Only refuel using premium-grade sulphur-
i If the recommended fuel is not available, free unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON/
but only as a temporary measure, you may 85 MON that conforms to European stand-
also use unleaded petrol with an octane ard EN 228 or an equivalent specification.
rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may You could otherwise impair engine output
reduce engine performance and increase or damage the emission control system.
Z
i In some countries, the available petrol Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre to

may not be sufficiently low in sulphur. This view a list of approved products. Observe the
fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant instructions for use in the product descrip-
odours, especially on short journeys. As tion.
soon as sulphur-free fuel (sulphur content Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This
< 10 ppm) is used for refuelling, the odours causes unnecessary costs and could damage
are reduced. the engine.
Additives
Diesel (EN 590)
! Do not refuel with low grade fuel and do
not use fuel additives that have not been Fuel grade
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. Otherwise the fuel system could
G WARNING
malfunction or be damaged. Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die-
sel engine. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This
One of the major problems with low-grade would result in damage to the fuel system and
fuel is the creation of carbon deposits during engine, which could lead to a vehicle fire.
the process of burning fuel. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use fuel brands that ! When refuelling, only use diesel fuel that
have additives. conforms to the European standard EN 590
If you use fuels without these additives for a or is of equivalent quality. Fuel that does
longer period of time, there may be a build-up not conform to EN 590 can lead to
of carbon deposits. These will form especially increased wear as well as damage to the
on the inlet valves and in the combustion engine and exhaust system.
Technical data
chamber.
! Do not use the following:
This could lead to engine running problems,
Rmarine diesel
e.g.:
Rheating oil
Rlonger engine warm-up phase
Rbio-diesel
Runeven idle
Rvegetable oil
Rengine noise
Rpetrol
Rmisfiring
Rparaffin
Rloss of power
Rkerosene
In areas where petrol with the required addi-
tives is not available, carbon deposits can Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and
build up. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recom- do not use any special additives. This can
mends the use of additives that have been otherwise lead to engine damage. This
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles; see does not include flow improver additives.
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. For further information, see "Flow improv-
ers".
The quality of the fuel available in some coun-
tries may not be sufficient. Residue could ! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter: in
build up as a result. In such cases, and in countries outside the EU, only refuel with
consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service low-sulphur Euro diesel with a sulphur con-
Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the tent under 50 ppm; otherwise the emission
additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz control system could be damaged.
(part no. A000989254510). You must
! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-
observe the notes and mixing ratios specified
ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with
on the container.
a high sulphur content is available, you will become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions
need to carry out your vehicle's oil change can arise through heating the fuel system,
at shorter intervals. More information e.g. through parking in a heated garage.
about the interval for oil change can be More information about recommended flow
obtained from any qualified specialist improvers can be obtained from any qualified
workshop. specialist workshop.
Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the Fuel consumption information
label on the petrol pump, ask the filling sta-
tion staff. H Environmental note
Information on refuelling (Y page 180). CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-
tists believe to be principally responsible for
Low outside temperatures global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your
In winter months, diesel fuel with an improved vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to
cold flow quality is available. In Europe, the fuel consumption and therefore depend on:
EN 590 standard defines various climate- Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
dependent temperature categories. Malfunc- Rdriving style
tions can be avoided by refuelling with diesel
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
fuel that corresponds to the climatic specifi-
ronmental influences or road conditions
cations outlined in EN 590. At unusually low
outside temperatures, it is possible that the You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
flow characteristics of the diesel fuel could be sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
insufficient. Accordingly, diesel fuel from iced regularly.
Technical data
warmer areas may not be suitable for opera-
tion in colder climatic conditions. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in
the following situations:
i Further information on country-specific
Rat very low outside temperatures
fuel properties can be obtained from oil
Rin urban traffic
companies, e.g. at filling stations.
Ron short journeys
Flow improvers Rin mountainous terrain
To improve the low-temperature resistance of Rwhen towing a trailer
diesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached.
The effectiveness of a flow improver is not i Only for certain countries: you can find
guaranteed for every fuel. the current consumption and emission val-
Only use flow improvers tested and approved ues of your vehicle in the COC documents
by Mercedes-Benz. During use, please (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These
observe the information on operation. documents are delivered with your vehicle.
Correct dosage and sufficient mixing are deci- The consumption figures were in each case
sive in improving low-temperature resistance based on the currently applicable version:
with the flow improver. Overdosage can Rfor vehicles that comply with standards
potentially even decrease low-temperature up to and including the EURO 4 standard,
resistance and must therefore be avoided. in accordance with EU Directive
Follow the manufacturer's guidelines on dos- 80/1268/EEC
age. Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed
Mix the additive into the diesel in good time, the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with
before the flow characteristics of the diesel Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007
Z
Deviations from these values may occur Purity

under normal operating conditions.
! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other
service products, cleaning agents or dust)
lead to:
AdBlue®
Rincreased emission values
General notes Rdamage to the catalytic converter
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic, col- Rengine damage
ourless, odourless and water-soluble fluid. Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC® exhaust
gas aftertreatment system
High outside temperatures
Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly
G WARNING important with respect to avoiding malfunc-
If you open the AdBlue® tank cap, small tions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-
amounts of ammonia vapour may be released. ment system.
This depends in particular upon the age of the If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank,
AdBlue®. e.g. during repair work, do not use this fluid
Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour and to refill the tank. The purity of the fluid can no
are particularly irritating to: longer be guaranteed.
Rskin
Capacities
Rmucous membranes
Reyes model Total capacity
Technical data
You may experience a burning sensation in E 350 BlueTEC 24.5 l

your eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough-
ing and watering of the eyes.
Do not inhale any ammonia vapours that may Engine oil
be released. Fill the AdBlue® tank only in well-
ventilated areas. General notes
The quality of the engine oil is decisive for the
Low outside temperatures function and service life of an engine. After
extensive tests, Mercedes-Benz approves
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx-
engine oils that correspond to the current
imately -11 †. The vehicle is equipped with
technical standard.
an AdBlue® preheating system at the factory.
Winter operation can therefore be guaran- Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz approved
teed even at temperatures below -11 †. engine oils may be used in Mercedes-Benz
engines.
Additives Further information on tested and approved
engine oils can be obtained from any
! Only use AdBlue® in accordance with ISO Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Mercedes-
22241. Do not use additives with AdBlue® Benz recommends that you have the oil
and do not dilute AdBlue® with water. This change carried out at a qualified specialist
may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- workshop. Mercedes-Benz approval is indica-
treatment system. ted on the oil container by the inscription "MB
Approval" and the corresponding designa-
tion, e.g. MB Approval 229.51.
You can call up an overview of approved i If the engine oils listed in the table are not
engine oils on the Internet at: available, you may add the following engine
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com by enter- oils until the next oil change:
ing the designation, e.g. 229.5. Rvehicles with a petrol engine: MB
The table shows which engine oils have been Approval 229.1 229.3 or ACEA A3
approved for your vehicle. Rdiesel engines: MB Approval 229.1,
Petrol engines MB Approval 229.3, 229.5 or ACEA C3
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine
E 200 BlueEFFICIENCY 229.3, 229.5,
oils for AMG vehicles.
E 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 229.51
This may only be topped up once, and the
E 300 229.3, 229.5 quantity must not be greater than 1.0 l.
E 300 4MATIC BlueEF- Capacities
FICIENCY The following values refer to an oil change
E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY including the oil filter.
E 350 4MATIC BlueEF- Model Replacement
FICIENCY amount
E 500 BlueEFFICIENCY 229.5 E 200 BlueEFFI- 5.5 l
E 500 4MATIC BlueEF- CIENCY
FICIENCY E 250 BlueEFFI-
E 63 AMG CIENCY
Technical data
E 300 BlueEFFI- 6.5 l
Diesel engines with MB Approval CIENCY
diesel particle filter E 300 4MATIC
E 200 CDI BlueEFFI- 228.51, BlueEFFICIENCY
CIENCY 229.31, 229.51 E 350 BlueEFFI-
E 220 CDI BlueEFFI- CIENCY
CIENCY E 350 4MATIC
E 250 CDI BlueEFFI- BlueEFFICIENCY
CIENCY E 200 CDI BlueEF-
E 250 CDI 4MATIC FICIENCY
BlueEFFICIENCY E 220 CDI BlueEF-
E 300 CDI BlueEFFI- FICIENCY
CIENCY E 250 CDI BlueEF-
E 350 CDI BlueEFFI- FICIENCY
CIENCY E 250 CDI 4MATIC
BlueEFFICIENCY
E 350 BlueTEC
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils

for AMG vehicles.
Z
Model Replacement ing operation due to, for example, ageing or

amount soot and fuel accretion. It is therefore
strongly recommended to observe regular oil
E 300 8.0 l changes using an approved engine oil with the
E 500 BlueEFFI- appropriate SAE classification.
CIENCY
E 500 4MATIC
BlueEFFICIENCY Brake fluid
E 300 CDI BlueEF- G WARNING
FICIENCY Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
E 350 CDI BlueEF- moisture from the air; This lowers its boiling
FICIENCY point.
E 350 CDI 4MATIC If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,
BlueEFFICIENCY vapour pockets may form in the brake system
E 350 BlueTEC when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
driving downhill). This impairs braking effi-
E 63 AMG With external oil ciency.
cooler: 8.5 l
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
regular intervals. The brake fluid change inter-
Additives vals can be found in the Service Booklet.
! Do not use any additives with the engine
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
oil. This could damage the engine.
Technical data
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.

Engine oil viscosity Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist work-
shop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant
G WARNING
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics Antifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, naked
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity flames and smoking are prohibited when han-
rating, it flows slowly; the lower the viscosity, dling antifreeze.
the faster it flows. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
Engine oil selection is based on the respective engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn
outside temperatures and in accordance with yourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hot
the SAE classification (viscosity). The table engine parts.
shows you which SAE classifications are to be
used. The low-temperature properties of
engine oils can be significantly impaired dur-
! Only add coolant that has been premixed The coolant is checked at every maintenance
with the desired antifreeze protection. You interval at a qualified specialist workshop.
could otherwise damage the engine. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
Further information on coolants can be led with a coolant mixture that ensures
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
for Service Products, MB Specifications for tion.
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Inter-
net at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen and headlamp cleaning
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, system
even in countries where high temperatures Important safety notes
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not G WARNING
sufficiently protected from corrosion and Windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze is highly
overheating. flammable. Avoid spilling windscreen washer
! The engine cooling system is filled with fluid/antifreeze on hot engine components as
coolant, which must be renewed after it can ignite and burn. Severe burns could be
15 years or after 250,000 kilometres at the the result.
latest. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
following tasks: could damage the plastic lenses of the
Technical data
Ranti-corrosion protection headlamps.
Rantifreeze protection ! Do not use distilled or de-ionised water in
Rraising the boiling point the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in level sensor may be damaged.
the correct concentration, the boiling point of ! Only the washer fluids SummerFit and
the coolant during operation will be around WinterFit can be mixed. Otherwise, the
130 †. spraying nozzles could become blocked.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- At temperatures above freezing:
tion in the engine cooling system should:
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
Rbe at least 50 %. This will protect the engine
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
cooling system against freezing down to merFit.
around -37 †.
Rnot exceed 55 % (antifreeze protection Mix 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
down to -45 †). Heat will otherwise not be
dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con-
centrate in accordance with MB Specifica-
tions for Service Products 310.1.
Z
444 Vehicle data
At temperatures below freezing: Dimensions and weights

X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-
Fit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-
ature.
RDown to Ò10 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit
with 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò20 †: mix 1 part MB WinterFit
with 1 part water.
RDown to Ò29 †: mix 2 parts MB WinterFit
with 1 part water.
i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Vehicle data
General notes model : Open- ;
Please note that for the specified vehicle ing height Maximum
Technical data
data: headroom
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result Saloon 1737 mm – —
of: 1760 mm
- tyres
Estate 2056 mm – 1933 mm –
- load
2062 mm 1939 mm
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
E 63 AMG, 1739 mm – —
Saloon 1760 mm
Ritems of optional equipment increase the
unladen weight and reduce the maximum E 63 AMG, 2050 mm – 1925 mm –
payload. The unladen weight is specified in Estate 2059 mm 1934 mm
accordance with EC directive and includes:
- driver (68 kg) Missing values were not available at the time
- luggage (7 kg) of going to print.
- all fluids (fuel tank 90% full)
All models (except AMG
Rvehicle-specific weight information can be
vehicles)
found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 435). Vehicle length, Saloon 4868 mm
Ronly for certain countries: you can find vehi-
Vehicle length, Estate 4895 mm
cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu-
ments (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). Vehicle width including 2071 mm
These documents are delivered with your exterior mirrors
vehicle.
Vehicle data 445
All models (except AMG E 300 BlueEFFICIENCY

vehicles)
Unladen weight, Saloon 1730 kg
Vehicle width excluding 1854 mm
exterior mirrors Unladen weight, Estate 1840 kg
Wheelbase 2874 mm
E 300 4MATIC BlueEFFI-
Maximum roof load 100 kg CIENCY
Maximum boot load, 100 kg Vehicle height, Saloon 1474 mm
Saloon
Vehicle height, Estate 1517 mm
Maximum boot load, 250 kg
Estate Unladen weight, Saloon 1815 kg
Unladen weight, Estate 1920 kg
Vehicle height, Saloon 1471 mm E 350 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm
Unladen weight, Saloon 1615 kg Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm
Unladen weight, Estate 1735 kg Unladen weight, Saloon 1735 kg

Technical data
Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm E 350 4MATIC BlueEFFI-
CIENCY
Vehicle height, Saloon 1474 mm
E 300 Unladen weight, Estate 1925 kg

Unladen weight, Saloon
Unladen weight, Estate
E 300 BlueEFFICIENCY Unladen weight, Estate 2030 kg

Z
446 Vehicle data
E 500 4MATIC BlueEFFI- E 200 CDI BlueEFFI-

CIENCY CIENCY
Vehicle height, Saloon 1458 mm Unladen weight, auto- 1735 kg
matic transmission,
Vehicle height, Estate 1518 mm Saloon
Unladen weight, Saloon 1985 kg Unladen weight, auto- 1845 kg
Unladen weight, Estate 2075 kg matic transmission,
Estate
E 63 AMG
E 220 CDI BlueEFFI-
Vehicle length, Saloon 4887 mm CIENCY
Vehicle length, Estate 4914 mm E 250 CDI BlueEFFI-
CIENCY
Vehicle width including 2071 mm
exterior mirrors Vehicle height, Saloon 1471 mm
Vehicle width excluding 1854 mm Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm

exterior mirrors Unladen weight, Saloon 1735 kg
Vehicle height, Saloon 1440 mm Unladen weight, Estate 1845 kg
Technical data
Wheelbase 2874 mm E 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEF-

FICIENCY
Maximum roof load 100 kg
Saloon Unladen weight, Estate 1940 kg
Estate E 300 CDI BlueEFFI-
CIENCY
E 200 CDI BlueEFFI- Vehicle height, Saloon 1465 mm
CIENCY
Unladen weight, manual 1720 kg
transmission, Saloon
Unladen weight, manual 1825 kg
transmission, Estate
Trailer tow hitch 447
E 350 CDI BlueEFFI-

CIENCY
E 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEF-

FICIENCY
Example: anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch
: Anchorage points
E 350 BlueTEC ; Overhang dimension
Vehicle height, Saloon 1472 mm = Rear axle centre line
Technical data
Vehicle height, Estate 1515 mm For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the
overhang dimension including protective cov-
Unladen weight, Saloon 1845 kg ering is 1253 mm (Saloon) or 1278 mm
Unladen weight, Estate 1955 kg (Estate).
Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
changes to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
sis frame.
Z
448 Trailer tow hitch
Trailer loads
i The E 63 AMG model cannot be used to tow a trailer.
Saloon
Permissible trailer Permissible trailer

load, braked (at a min- load, braked (at a min-
imum gradient-climb- imum gradient-climb-
ing capability of 12 % ing capability of 12 %
from a standstill) from a standstill)
Manual transmission Automatic transmis-
sion
E 200 BlueEFFICIENCY 1700 kg 1900 kg
E 250 BlueEFFICIENCY – 1900 kg
E 300 (only available in certain – 2000 kg
countries)
E 300 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY – 2100 kg
Technical data

E 200 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY 1900 kg 1900 kg
E 250 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY – 2100 kg
E 300 CDI BlueEFFICIENCY – 2100 kg
E 350 BlueTEC – 2100 kg
Trailer tow hitch 449
Estate
Permissible trailer Permissible trailer

load, braked (at a min- load, braked (at a min-
imum gradient-climb- imum gradient-climb-
ing capability of 12 % ing capability of 12 %
from a standstill) from a standstill)
sion
countries)
Technical data
All models
Permissible trailer load, unbraked 750 kg
Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar nose- 84 kg
weight is not included in the trailer load)
Z
450 Trailer tow hitch
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer

Saloon

sion
countries)
Technical data

Estate

sion
countries)
24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview) 451

sion
Technical data
24 GHz radar sensor system (country overview)
The 24 GHz radar sensor system requires separate approval for each country. If you are driving
in a country in which the radar sensor system is not approved, you must deactivate the system
using the on-board computer (Y page 262).
The current country overview can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on
the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung.
Vehicles with a navigation system: the radar sensor system is deactivated automatically
near radio telescope facilities. A display message appears in the multifunction display to tell
you that the radar sensor system is being switched off (Y page 283).
The currently active systems are automatically deactivated:
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 195)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 225)
RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 229)
RBAS PLUS (Y page 71)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 76)
If deactivation does not occur automatically, you must deactivate the radar sensor system
using the on-board computer (Y page 262).
Vehicles without navigation and vehicles for Australia: you must deactivate the radar
sensor system using the on-board computer when you are near a radio telescope facility
(Y page 262).
Z
452

Mercedes e Class Saloon 2012 w212 Owners Manual 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes e Class Saloon 2012 w212 Owners Manual 01 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disclaimer

Internal use only

The illustrations in this manual show a left-

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29

Introduction ......................................... 23 Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 81

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors . . 105

Lights and windscreen wipers ......... 123

Climate control ................................. 141

Driving and parking .......................... 159

On-board computer and displays .... 243

Stowing and features ....................... 309

Maintenance and care ...................... 343

Breakdown assistance ..................... 359

Wheels and tyres .............................. 379

Technical data ................................... 431

Assistance menu (on-board com- Overview ........................................ 170

Battery (key) Brakes

Convenience closing feature .............. 97 Daytime driving lights

Important safety notes .................. 195 Driving system

E Emergency spare wheel

Deactivating/activating (except Flat tyre

Interior lighting ................................. 133 Kickdown

Switching the daytime driving Switching Adaptive Highbeam

Multifunction steering wheel Operating video DVD ..................... 253

Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 437 S

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys- Supplement Restraint System

Outside temperature ...................... 247 Driving tips .................................... 236

Tyre pressure monitor Securing from rolling away ............ 389

Protection of the environment Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.

Wireless vehicle components The diagnostics connection is only intended

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Implied warranty

Function Page Function Page

? H Combination switch 128

B K Adjusts the steering wheel

i Instrument cluster: kilometres Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Centre console, lower section

i Vehicles with selector lever or gear lever Function Page

J Stowage compartment 310

Overhead control panel

= D ê Deactivates the inte-

? E p Switches the left-

A F c Switches the front

Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

Useful information .............................. 42

Useful information Occupant safety

i This Owner's Manual describes all mod- Important safety notes

Panic alarm G WARNING

Airbags and belt tensioners could fail to

dent. The different airbag systems work

Have the airbags replaced at a qualified spe- They are deployed:

deployment can offer additional protection

Driver's airbag : deploys in front of the

Sidebags (example: Saloon)

Pelvisbag deployment enhances the level of

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury